JP7315041B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a plurality of ball entry means provided on a game board surface, a predetermined determination is made, and a dynamic display of a pattern announcing the determination result is executed on a display device. In such a configuration, a predetermined determination is individually made for each ball-entering means , and after the determination result is dynamically displayed with a pattern corresponding to each ball-entering means , the determination result is notified. In this way, a system has been proposed in which a plurality of symbols can be displayed dynamically .

JP-A-2005-319221

By the way, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games in such gaming machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition and executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition; first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating the first determination result of the first determination; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the second determination result of the second determination; a first privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information is stop-displayed; and a second privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stop-displayed on the second display means; a game state determination means capable of determining one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state; a period information determination means capable of determining period information corresponding to a period until the first identification information for setting the first game state when the second game state is set; and a performance based on the period information determined by the period information determination means. and a production execution means forThe game machine isExecuted by the production executing meansSaidstagingAsSuggestion Mode for Suggesting the Period Information to the PlayerIt is possible to execute a production that includes at leastThe suggesting mode is variable according to the passage of a period, and is configured in advance in a mode until the period corresponding to the period information ends, and the gaming machine comprises acquisition means for acquiring information to be used in the second determination by the determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and storage means for storing at least the information acquired by the acquisition means until the second determination condition is satisfied.The effect executing means is capable of executing the effect by varying the effect mode of the effect when the second determination result of the second determination is the specific second determination result..

According to the game machine of claim 1, the first determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition, and the second determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition; the first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result of the first determination; the second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result of the second determination; and a second privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means. a game state determination means capable of determining one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state; a period information determination means capable of determining period information corresponding to a period until the first identification information for setting the first game state when the second game state is set; , andThe game machine isExecuted by the production executing meansSaidstagingAsSuggestion Mode for Suggesting the Period Information to the PlayerIt is possible to execute a production that includes at leastThe suggesting mode is variable according to the passage of the period, and is preconfigured in a mode until the period corresponding to the period information ends, and the gaming machine includes acquisition means for acquiring information to be used in the second determination by the determination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means at least until the second determination condition is satisfied.The effect executing means can execute the effect by varying the effect mode of the effect when the second determination result of the second determination is the specific second determination result..

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a see-through view of the inside of the sorting device in the first embodiment from the front side, and (b) is a see-through view of the inside of the sorting device in the first embodiment from the rear side. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the display mode before and after sorting the pending symbol display displayed in the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a special symbol reserved ball storage area, a special symbol reserved ball execution area, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area, and a normal symbol reserved ball execution area in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table in the first embodiment, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the jackpot type table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the random number table per normal symbol in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a rearrangement pending storage area in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a secondary rearrangement pending storage area in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a normal time special per variation pattern table in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram schematically showing a normal time special off variation pattern table in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a time-saving/probability-variable special hit variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a time-saving/probability-variable special deviation variation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the pending|holding design display in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the pending|holding design display in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing first prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing first prefetch update processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 7 is a flowchart showing pending number display update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing temporary fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing pending rearrangement processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the figure which showed typically the special non-adjustment fluctuation pattern table for adjustment in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a first consecutive winning determination process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a pending number display update process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing pending rearrangement processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in the modification of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing pending rearrangement processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing pending number display update processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a large opening opening/closing process executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in a seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 3 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a first prefetching process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 3 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing pending rearrangement processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing pending rearrangement order determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing slave pending rearrangement pending storage area update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a see-through view of the inside of the sorting device in the ninth embodiment from the front side, and (b) is a see-through view of the inside of the sorting device in the ninth embodiment from the rear side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit in a ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning route notification processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start winning process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. (a) to (b) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device in the eleventh embodiment, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device in the modification of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third pattern display device in the fourteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a first caution notice process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. (a) to (b) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third pattern display device in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing part of another memory area of the RAM of the MPU of the main control unit in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing a secondary rearrangement reserved storage area in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing first prefetch update processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a first notification lottery process executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing first extended variation look-ahead processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing second prefetch update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing second notification lottery processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing pending number display update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third symbol display device in an eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third symbol display device in a modified example of the eighteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a rearrangement pending storage area in an eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a secondary rearrangement pending storage area in an eighteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing part of another memory area of the RAM of the main control device in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a part of the special hit (out) variation pattern table for time saving and probability variation in the eighteenth embodiment, and the normal special hit (out) variation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 18th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing first prefetch update processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing fusion effect lottery processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighteenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 19th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing part of another memory area of the RAM of the main controller in the nineteenth embodiment; It is a diagram schematically showing a part of the time saving/probability variation special hit variation pattern table and the time saving/probability variation special hit loss variation pattern table of the ROM of the main controller in the nineteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the nineteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 19th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing first prefetch update processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing variation change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 20th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a rearrangement pending storage area in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a part of other memory areas in the RAM of the MPU of the audio ramp control device in the twentieth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 20th Embodiment. 29 is a flow chart showing first prefetch update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twentieth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a first overlap winning process executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twentieth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a large opening opening/closing process executed by an MPU in a main controller in a twentieth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twentieth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twentieth embodiment; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation processing during a big hit performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing a secondary rearrangement reserved storage area in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing part of a normal-time special deviation fluctuation pattern table in the twenty-first embodiment; It is the figure which showed typically a part of time-saving/probability variation special deviation fluctuation|variation pattern table in 21st Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pending rearrangement processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pending rearrangement order determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing secondary pending rearrangement pending storage area update process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a sub-hold rearrangement display notification process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing pending number display update processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 18 are provided as an opening and closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 is provided with a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, a shooting rail (not shown) that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or a ready-to-win performance is performed, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit or blinked by the lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs to notify that the big win is in progress or the reach just before the big win is in progress. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a certificate stamp or the like stuck to the pasting space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation part 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent according to the operation. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. A ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through a card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball rental operation section 40, but in this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball rental operation section 40 so that the parts configuration may be shared. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

A lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 for storing balls that cannot be fully stored in the upper tray 17 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 is provided to be operated by the player to hit the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. Inside the operation handle 51, there are built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball while the operation is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, and thus the ball is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with the flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extraction lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened, and the ball is naturally dropped and discharged from the bottom opening. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a large number of nails for ball guidance, pinwheels, rails 61 and 62, a first start port 63a, a second start port 63b, a first variable prize winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like on a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. The first starting port 63a, the second starting port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws or the like. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front surface of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected in the inner position of the outer rail 62.例文帳に追加The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that a game area is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 where the game is played by the behavior of the balls. The game area is a substantially circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (an area in which prize winning openings are arranged and shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying part of the ball, and the ball shot with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the central part side while the momentum is attenuated. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, an arc member 70 made of resin formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is fixed by being driven into the base plate 60. - 特許庁

A distribution winning device 630 is provided in the lower center of the game area. FIG. 4(a) is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 630 viewed from the front. FIG. 4(b) is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 630 viewed from the back.

As shown in FIG. 4( a ), the distribution winning device 630 is provided with a normal electric accessory 64 at its upper portion. The ordinary electric accessory 64 is arranged in a state where the blades 64a and 64b facing each other stand upright in a normal state with an interval (the diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm) allowing about one game ball to enter. A route for game balls to enter a sorting device 630 is only a route passing between the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 in a normal state (a state in which the blades 64a and 64b stand up), and the player first shoots the game ball so as to pass the game ball between the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64.例文帳に追加

When a game ball enters the sorting device 630, a passive sorting member 640 is arranged, and the passive sorting member 640 receives the entered game ball in a receiving portion 640a or 640b. When a game ball is received by the storage portion 640a, the weight of the game ball causes the passive distribution member 640 to rotate counterclockwise (see FIG. 4A) to guide the game ball to the first start port 63a. Here, each of the passive distribution members 640 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 640c is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 640a and the storage section 640b.

On the base body 900 provided on the rear side of the distribution winning device 630, the base side magnet 900a is arranged at the position on the center line between the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 and the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64. As shown in FIG. 4(c), the distribution winning device 630 is viewed from the top, the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 900a is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body 900, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at its tip. The base-side magnet 900a is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the passive sorting member 640 side.

The magnet 640c of the passive sorting section 640 is also made of a rod-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet 900a, and is fixed to the passive sorting member 640 so that the tip faces toward the base-side magnet 900a. The passive distribution member 640 rotates, and the boundary wall between the storage section 640a and the storage section 640b is directly above (on the center line of the interval where the opposing blades 64a and 64b can enter about one game ball). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (N pole and N pole, for example), they repel each other, and the boundary wall of the passive distribution member 640 does not stop at a position facing directly upward, and is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 640c is positioned on the center line between the vane 64a and the vane 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 (upper position), the passive sorting member 640 rotates left or right due to repulsion between the magnet 640c and the base side magnet 900a. upward side). Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring due to contact of a game ball that has entered with the boundary wall between the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900c, for example, after the accommodation portion 640a receives the game ball and rotates to the left by about 90 degrees to guide the game ball to the first start port 63a, the passive distribution member 640 can be prevented from rotating to the right (accommodation portion 640a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first start port 63a, the accommodation portion 640b faces upward, and the game ball entering the sorting device 630 is received by the accommodation portion 640b, and the passive sorting member 640 rotates about 180 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball to guide the game ball to the second start port 63b. In this way, the passive distribution member 640 can alternately guide game balls entering the distribution device 630 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery game) resulting from winning the first start port 63a and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the second lottery game) resulting from the winning of the second start port 63b, which will be described later, can be efficiently executed.

A normal symbol starting port 67 is provided on the left side of the center of the game board 13 . The normal symbol starting port 67 is a gate-type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is performed. In the lottery performed in response to the passing of the game ball to the normal symbol starting port 67, the success or failure determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed.

When the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, variable display of the normal symbol is started in a second symbol display section 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and after the symbols "○" and "×" alternately light up for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery (symbol "○" or "X" in this embodiment) is stopped (lighted up). When the balls pass through the normal pattern starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second pattern display part 88, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37.例文帳に追加

When it is determined that the normal symbol wins, the second symbol display portion 88 lights up a symbol "○" indicating that the normal symbol lottery wins. When a winning pattern is displayed, the normal electric accessory 64 is activated, and the wings 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64, which are normally maintained in an upright state, move from a substantially vertical upright state to a substantially V shape (inverted V shape), and the game balls are guided by the wings 64a and 64b to make it easier for the game ball to enter the sorting device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of the lottery, the second symbol display portion 88 lights up a symbol "x" indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out of the lottery.

A first pattern display device 37 provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, is arranged in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. A plurality of LEDs 37a indicate the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variable display has not been performed among the balls that have won the first start port 63a, the second start port 63b, and the normal symbol start port 67, by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display are indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two left and right 7-segment LEDs. The 7-segment LED on the left side variably displays (dynamically displays) the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game. Specifically, after a variable display (in the present embodiment, the center segment of the seven segments is blinking) until a variable time (dynamic display time) has elapsed, which is determined based on the winning of the first start port 63a, the symbol indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. If the judgment result is out, a symbol "-" indicating the outage is displayed with one segment in the center lit up. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbols indicating the loss, such as symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the win, is displayed. The second lottery game is configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the emitted colors.

As will be described later, the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 has a variable time set for each variation mode, and corresponds to the dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns can be classified into a long-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time and a short-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time, depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is reachable or not. In this way, roughly sorting according to a fixed standard of time (here, reach, non-reach, or a standard time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)) also corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information.

In addition, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the accurate fluctuation start time, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long-term fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, whether or not a big win is made (big win lottery) is determined, and the type of big win is also determined. As the types of jackpot determined here, a 15R normal jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot, and a 2R probability variable jackpot are prepared. The jackpot pattern displayed on the LED 37b is a pattern indicating the jackpot type (in this embodiment, "9" is displayed for the 15R normal jackpot, "7" for the 15R variable variable jackpot, and "3" for the 2R variable variable jackpot, for example).

Here, the "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 8(b)), which will be described later, is set. "15R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8(b)) for high probability, which will be described later, is set. "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Fig. 8(b)) for high probability, which will be described later, is set.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) that variably displays a third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by winning (start winning) to the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that three pattern columns, left, middle, and right, showing the first special pattern, which is one of the third patterns, are displayed in the left display area Dm1, as shown in FIG. 5(a). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row, and the third pattern (first special pattern) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the left display area Dm1 of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 while the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Also, the second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, is displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.

The third symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are composed of 10 types of special symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110 to be described later is a big hit, a variable display of the same main symbols (for example, "777") is performed, and a big win occurs after the variable display is finished.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and is composed of a display area for displaying the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the upper display area Dm, and a display area for displaying reserved symbols (the number of reserved first lottery games and second lottery games) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is divided into a left display area Dm1 and a right display area Dm2 so that they can be displayed. Mainly, the left side display area Dm1 variably displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning to the first starting port 63a. On the other hand, the right display area Dm2 variably displays the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning to the second starting port 63b.

In the left display area Dm1, three pattern lines L1, L2 and L3 are displayed on the left, middle and right. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order. On the other hand, in the right display area Dm2, the symbol rows R1, R2, and R3 are displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol, and the variable display is similarly performed.

In addition, the third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line U1 in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided longer than the upper display area Dm, and is evenly divided into eight small reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 in the horizontal direction.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5(b), a total of three main symbols of special symbols (third symbols) are displayed in the upper display area Dm, and displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b is suspended up to four times, respectively. When a game ball wins in a first starting port 63a while the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and a reserved pattern display area (left reserved pattern display area) of the youngest number among display areas of the reserved pattern display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds where the reserved patterns are not displayed displays ``○'' which is the reserved pattern of the first lottery game.

Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 63b while the second special symbol is variably displayed, similarly to the case of winning the first starting port 63a, ``●'' which is the reserved symbol of the second lottery game is displayed in the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. When a game ball enters the distribution winning device 630, the game ball is distributed in order to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution member 640 (see FIG. 4). In the state where the variable display of the first special pattern is stopped and in the state where there is no suspension in the first lottery game, when the player wins the first start port 63a, the first special pattern is displayed variably in the left side display area Dm1 and then stopped, regardless of whether the second special pattern is being variably displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 63b, the second special symbol is variably displayed regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is variably displayed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously variably displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2, respectively. Therefore, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed by alternately allocating the winning game balls to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b by the distribution winning device 630.例文帳に追加As will be described later, the first lottery game and the second lottery game execute lotteries as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game, respectively, so that the number of lotteries can be increased compared to the case where the jackpot game is executed only in the first lottery game, and the chances for the player to get the jackpot can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of two of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but it is not limited to this, and three or four or more lottery games and corresponding starting ports may be provided respectively, and at the same time the results of each lottery may be displayed variably.

In the present embodiment, the distribution winning device 630 has a mechanical configuration (distribution of game balls by the passive distribution member 640), but it may be configured such that each time a game ball wins, the start timing of the first lottery game and the start timing of the second lottery game are alternately distributed. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for distributing game balls on the game board surface, and the game area can be effectively utilized.

When a game ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starter switch and the second starter switch, the main controller 110 draws a lottery for a big win, and the first pattern display device 37 displays the result of the lottery. Also, the first starting hole 63a and the second starting hole 63b are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

When either one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is stop-displayed as a pattern indicating a big win, if the other special pattern is being variably displayed, the variability display is temporarily interrupted, and after the big win game (for example, if the 15-round normal jackpot is a 15-round big win game), the variability display of the special pattern is continued for the remaining variation time.

The variable display for the remaining variable time is displayed in a variable mode exclusively for the remaining variable display so that the player can recognize the remaining variable display for the interrupted variable display. Further, as the variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display, a variation display mode matching the remaining variation time is selected. Specifically, when the remaining variation time is equal to or shorter than the reference time (three seconds or less in this embodiment), the third pattern display device 81 is caused to display the characters ``lottery result of the temporarily stopped variation display!'' during the remaining variation time, and then stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the determination result. Then, when the determination result is stopped and displayed, the character "The lottery result of the temporarily stopped variable display has been displayed!" is displayed and continues to be displayed until the next variable is started.

On the other hand, when the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 s in this embodiment), all the main patterns constituting the special symbols are variably displayed at a constant speed, and a notification mode indicating ``Temporarily stopped variable display is changing!'' is displayed. After that, when the remaining variation time elapses, the main symbols are stopped and displayed all at once with the symbols indicating the determination result.

With this configuration, the player can recognize the continuation of the interrupted variable display of the special symbols, and can recognize the lottery result of the interrupted variable display. Therefore, even if the variable display is interrupted in the middle, the player can be prevented from playing the game while having dissatisfaction or doubt that the lottery has disappeared in the middle.

Further, when one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is stop-displayed as a pattern indicating a big hit, if the other special pattern is in a state where the variable display is stopped, the start of the new variable display is prohibited. When the jackpot game ends, the variable display is again set to be able to start based on the winning to the corresponding starting ports 63a and 63b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the lottery game is executed in the other special symbol even during the big win and the occurrence of the big win is overlapped, and the trouble that the player cannot concentrate on the big win game.

In addition, when the remaining variation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted variation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player overlooks it or cannot understand the notification result because it is too short. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the information result is displayed after notifying the player that the lottery result will be displayed immediately, so the player can recognize that the information result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is displayed.

Further, even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the characters for notifying that the suspended variable display has been stopped are displayed, so even when the remaining variable time is very short (for example, within 1 s), the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Also, even when the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the player is notified that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is being varied, so that the player can easily recognize that the suspended variation display was effective without disappearing.

In the present embodiment, when the interrupted variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is to be resumed, the player is informed of this by means of characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be made by voice, lamp or the like. In addition, it is of course possible to notify the player in a display mode dedicated to resuming the suspended variable display, such as a display mode that allows the player to know that the variable display has resumed (for example, an animation is displayed to notify that the character or the like is resuming the suspended variable display). By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the interrupted variable display has been resumed.

In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit, and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is interrupted to stop the variable display. However, it is not limited to this, but it is also possible to continue the variable display of the special symbol while interrupting the measurement of the variable time during the big win game, restart the measurement of the remaining variable time after the big win game, and perform the variable display of the special symbol.

With such a constitution, the special pattern is continuously variably displayed even during the big winning game, so that the player can confirm that the other variable display will not disappear and will be continued, and can play the big winning game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, when one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern becomes a big hit, the variable display is interrupted if the other special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

By constructing in this way, it becomes possible to perform more lottery games even during the jackpot game, more lottery games can be played in a short period of time, and a lot of lottery games can be played by the player. In addition, in such a configuration, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating winning during the big win game, the execution of the big win game is delayed (stocked) until one of the big win games is finished, so that the player can continuously play the big win games.

Further, in this embodiment, the interrupted variation display mode of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the variation mode exclusively for remaining variation display. Not limited to this, the remaining variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 may also be displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display. Specifically, when the remaining variable display is to be performed on the 7-segment display 37b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed while blinking. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed by lighting the remaining variable display colors (for example, blue, etc.). By doing so, not only the third pattern display device 81 but also the first special pattern or the second special pattern displayed on the 7-segment display 37b can inform the player that the remaining variable display is being displayed.

Further, similarly to the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display mode may naturally be changed according to the remaining variation time.

Further, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed blinking in a predetermined display mode "for example, alphabet h" in a stopped state at a predetermined period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted).

A horizontally long rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery related to the first lottery gaming or the second lottery gaming in the main control device 110 is a jackpot, the first design display device 37 is turned on the jackpot stop after the prescribed time (fluctuation time) has passed, and the suspensioned pattern is displayed in corresponding to the jackpot. The occurrence of a jackpot is displayed in the corresponding display area of the device 81 (left display area DM1 or the right display area DM2). After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening/closing operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is determined by the type of the determined jackpot. For example, in the case of a 15R normal jackpot, the opening/closing operation can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a privilege game state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a value in the game (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol indicating the winning based on the winning of the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, the opening and closing operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate covering the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the case of a big win, a large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which a ball easily wins a specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. affixed to the affixing space K1 can be visually recognized through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not win any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port for communication with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover that are unopenably connected (connected by a caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is cut into the box base side and the box cover side when the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102 or when the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and performing ball payout by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). . The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122). The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display unit 88.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, a special pattern winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a special winning type counter C2 used for selecting the big winning pattern, a fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for fluctuation pattern selection are used. A normal winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display portion 88), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (S1000) (see FIG. 17), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 in which each counter value is stored for the winning of the first starting port 63a and a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 in which each counter value is stored for the winning of the second starting port 63b. In the present embodiment, up to four holding balls are provided in the first starting hole 63a and the second starting hole 63b, respectively, and a total of up to eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when a game ball wins a prize in a first starting port 63a during a period in which a special symbol lottery can be drawn, such as when special symbols are not being variably displayed or when a special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is stored in a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1, and when a game ball wins in a second starting port 63b, each counter value is stored in a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start hole 63a or the second start hole 63b during the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern or during the jackpot game of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, during which the special pattern lottery is not possible, if the number of reserved balls for the winning starting hole is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired, and the first special pattern reserved ball corresponding to the winning starting hole is stored. It is stored in the area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning starter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired, and only prize balls (five game balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of retained balls is set to 4 for each of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-399. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 corresponding to the winning starting port of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table 202a.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. In this special win random number counter C1, the number of random number values (win values) to be a big win is 1 when the probability is low, the value ``7'' is 10 when the probability is high, and the values ``0 to 9'' are stored in a jackpot random number table 202a.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, is sequentially added by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99 in this embodiment). For example, the value of the special winning type counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning starting port.

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 is not a random number that will result in a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss, the variation pattern in the variable display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") will be those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 is a random number for a big hit, the variation pattern and the stop type in the variation display performance are those at the time of the big win. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c.

The value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8(c)) stored in the ROM202. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 stores various tables. FIG. 8(b) schematically shows an example of the first jackpot random number counter table 202a, and FIG. 8(c) shows an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(c)) is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the special hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As described above, the jackpot types include "15R normal jackpot" in which the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8B) for low probability is set after the jackpot game with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, "15R probability variable jackpot" in which the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability is set after the jackpot game with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds (see FIG. 8B), and the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds. There is a "2R probability variable jackpot" in which a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(b)) for high probability is set after the winning game.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8 (c), the 15R normal jackpot is associated with the special hit type counter C2 value "60 to 99", the 15R probability variable jackpot is associated with the special hit type counter C2 value "0 to 49", and the 2R probability variable jackpot is associated with the special hit type counter C2 value "50 to 59".

When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is a value for a big win, the big winning type associated with the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 storing the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is determined from the big winning type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "20", the 15R probability variable jackpot is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "80", the 15R normal jackpot) is determined as the jackpot type.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type table 202b is defined so that the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of about 40%, the 15R variable variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 50%, and the 2R variable variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 10%.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters continues. The fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Further, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 100, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100).

The values of the variation pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b (start win), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner. Various counter values of the reserved balls stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. is not stored, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM203.

FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal time special per variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d is referred to when the special symbol big winning random number table 202a for high probability is set in the big winning random number table 202a (hereinafter referred to as normal gaming state), and the 15R big winning referred to when the 15R normal big winning and 15R variable variable big winning (hereinafter referred to as 15R big winning) and 2R variable big winning are determined as the big winning type. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the 2R probability variable jackpot exclusive which is referred to when the 15R jackpot exclusive and the 2R probability variable jackpot are determined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is a value (winning value) for a big win, a variation pattern group is selected from among the variation pattern groups corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same execution area according to the big winning type corresponding to the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 stored in the execution area.

The 15R jackpot includes various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of premium reach, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for various types of normal reach, 11 to 95 for various types of super reach, and 96 to 100 for various types of premium reach. The various types of Noble Reach are reach with a short fluctuation time, and after that short reach, the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned (so-called, the patterns are aligned at the end of the bitterness). A variety of super reach is a variation pattern in which the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after a reach with a longer variation time than normal reach (for example, a reach that develops from long reach or normal reach). It is a variation pattern in which the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after reach for a long variation time (for example, reach that further develops after super reach or special reach that develops from normal reach is different from super reach), and is not selected when the determination result is out.

It should be noted that "various types of reach" means that there are many types of reach with different effects. For example, super reach includes a reach in which the back image is rapidly changed and displayed, a reach in which a certain character is suddenly displayed, etc. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different effects, such as those with a notice effect before the start of the variable display, and those with a re-variable display with a big hit effect added.

In the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3. The 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is a special variation pattern that, for example, stops the special symbol at "341" and informs that the 2R probability variation has been won.

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal-time special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10(b), the normal time special loss variation pattern table 202e is composed of normal loss types that are completely lost as stop types at the time of loss in the normal game state, normal reach (short) types that are normal reach loss with relatively short fluctuation time among normal reach loss, normal reach (long) types that are normal reach loss with relatively long fluctuation time among normal reach loss, and super reach types that are super reach loss.

As for the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and each variation pattern group, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 29", normal outliers are determined, when it is "30 to 60", normal reach (short) types, when it is "61 to 89", normal reach (long) types, and when it is "90 to 100", super reach types are determined.

For each type of normal deviation, normal deviation A and normal deviation B are set in which fluctuation display is completed in a short time and reach is not established. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 100", the normal deviation A is selected, and when the value is "101 to 198", the normal deviation B variation pattern is selected. In addition, normal reach short fluctuation patterns A to C are set for various types of normal reach (short), in which the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short. When the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 70", when the normal short reach A is "71 to 128", and when the normal short reach B is "129 to 198", the variation pattern of the normal short reach C is selected. Similarly, variation patterns are selected for various normal reach lengths and various super reach lengths.

FIG. 11(a) is a diagram schematically showing a time saving/probability variation special hit variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. Moreover, FIG.11(b) is the figure which showed typically the time reduction use and probability variable special deviation fluctuation|variation pattern table 202e memorize|stored in ROM202. The time-saving/probability-variable special winning variation pattern table 202d and the time-saving/probability-variable special hit-losing variation pattern table 202a are a variation pattern selection table selected when the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a (hereinafter, the game state is the probability variable gaming state) and when a value of "0" or more is set in the time reduction counter 203k (hereinafter, the game state is the time reduction gaming state). is.

Since the selection of the variation pattern is the same as the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d and the normal special out variation pattern table 202e, description thereof is omitted. Only one type of the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special losing variation pattern table 202e has been described here, but the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special losing variation pattern table 202e are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively. Even if the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is acquired, the same fluctuation pattern is not selected. By configuring in this way, different variation patterns are likely to be selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and various effects can be produced.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters continues. The normal hit random number counter C4 (see FIG. 8(d)) is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number for the normal symbol jackpot is set by the normal symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 8(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the normal per symbol random number counter C4 coincides with the value of the normal per symbol random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit.

When the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. The value of the normal random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) in this embodiment, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (through gate). The number of random numbers to be won is 24 in the normal game state, and the range is "5 to 28". In addition, in the high probability game state, it is 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the normal game state, winning is determined when the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28", and in the high probability gaming state, winning is determined when the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204". In the normal game state, b is opened for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment), and in the high-probability game state, the action of opening for a predetermined time (1 s in this embodiment) is performed twice. The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being changed and displayed and each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, the random number is acquired from the normal winning random number counter C4 in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i and stored in the normal winning random number counter storage area 203i1. In addition, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is being variably displayed or the random number corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), the random number obtained from the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal winning random number counter storage area 203h1 of the corresponding number of times of holding (normal symbol holding 1 to 4). When the random number is stored in each area, the normal pattern flag 203j is set to ON, and the variable display of the normal pattern based on the random number is stopped, or when the data is shifted to the previous reservation area by completing the reservation, it is set to OFF. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal design flag of the newly shifted and stored reservation area is set to ON. Determination of whether or not data is stored in the reserved area or whether or not the normal design is displayed in a variable manner is executed by whether or not the normal design flag of which reserved area or execution area is turned on.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the big win lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results in the second symbol display unit 88, according to the values of the counters and the like.

In this embodiment, the lotteries of the first lottery game and the second lottery game are configured to select common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery game (second special symbol) may be configured with counter values that are updated with different values by setting various dedicated counters, respectively, and by differentiating the update triggers and initial values of the various counters between the first lottery game and the second lottery game.

By constructing in this way, even if the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the counter value of a different value can be acquired, and the problem of synchronizing the variation pattern selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the determination result of right or wrong can be suppressed.

Further, even if the variation patterns are selected from each common variation pattern table for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the problem of synchronizing the selected variation patterns can be suppressed and various performances can be performed. In addition, data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM with a small storage area, etc.) can be achieved.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, and a normal symbol reserved ball execution area. 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, time reduction counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, first jackpot flag 203o, second jackpot flag 203p, first fluctuation stop flag 203q, second fluctuation stop flag 203r, first fluctuation time storage area 203s, second fluctuation time storage area 203t, rearrangement pending storage area 203u, and other memory area 203v.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the winning of the first starting port 63a up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the game balls winning the second starting port 63b up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment).

The first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol, and is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored when the various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol, and the details are the same as the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c.

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning are stored respectively. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 63a in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and stored in the special winning random number counter storage area 203a1, the special winning type counter storage area 203a2, the variation pattern determination counter 203a3, and the variation type counter storage area 203a4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second starting port 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffers and stored in the corresponding areas (not shown) in the same manner as in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the MPU 201 selects the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) in order to execute processing such as setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, and the data corresponding to one start winning, It shifts to this special design reservation ball execution area 203c. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f count up to four times the number of reserved balls (standby number) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the winning of the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. is a counter. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 32, S1112) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the winning of the game ball in the first start port 63a. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 when the counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball in the second start port 63b. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by one.

When the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 transfers the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d to the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 16, S203) or the second fluctuation start process (FIG. 20). , S206), a big win lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g counts the number of suspended balls (waiting times) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display section 88 and the second symbol display device 88 of the third symbol display device 81) based on the game ball passing through the normal symbol start port 67 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Each is a counter that counts up to four times. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the game balls passing through the normal symbol starting port 67.例文帳に追加Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 32, S1112) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls displayed in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 29, S106).

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is a storage area in which a normal winning random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning to the normal symbol start port 67 is stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), it acquires the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 from the counter buffer and stores it in the normal winning random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h. The normal design flag 203j is set to ON in the normal design flag storage area 203h2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h has four reserved areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (value of counter C4, normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In a normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203h, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the normal pattern starting port 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area with the earliest digested order among the reserved areas where the data is vacant.

In addition, the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i is a memory for storing each counter value when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, and storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processes such as normal symbol winning lottery and display (variation pattern) setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable display effect of the normal symbols, the MPU 201 shifts the data corresponding to one start winning among the data corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-described normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203h (the value of the normal winning random number counter C4) to the normal symbol retaining ball execution area 203i in order to execute processing such as winning lottery and setting the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88. do. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored and reserved, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. When the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the normal winning counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (reserved area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by decrementing the reserved number by one), the normal pattern flag 203j of the reserved area before being shifted is set to OFF, while the normal pattern flag 203j of the shifted and stored reserved area is set to ON. In addition, when the variation display of the normal symbol is processed to stop the variation, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

The time saving counter 203k is a counter area in which the number of time saving times 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the number of times of time saving is set, a random number table per normal symbol for high probability is set in the random number table per normal symbol 202c until the number of times of time saving is set to 0. In addition, when the pattern "○" indicating the winning of the normal pattern is displayed on the second pattern display part 88, the operation of opening the wings 64a, 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 for a longer opening time (1 s in this embodiment) than in the normal game state is repeated twice. This game state is hereinafter referred to as a time-saving game state.

The time-saving counter 203k is decremented by one each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops to be changed and displayed, and when the value of the time-saving counter 203k becomes 0, the time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. The blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 are opened by setting the number of opening times to 1 in 2s.

The variable probability flag 203m is a flag indicating that the game state is a high probability game state. This flag is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game when the winning of the 15R probability variable jackpot game is reported in the first special pattern or the second special pattern and the 15R probability variable jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag 203m is set to ON and the first special symbol or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a pattern (all types) indicating a big win, it is set to OFF, and after the big win game, it is set to ON if it is a 15R variable probability big win or a 2R variable probability big win depending on the big win type.

The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the obtained value of the special winning random number counter C1 is a win based on the winning of the first starting port 63a. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF.

The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the obtained value of the special winning random number counter C1 is a win based on the winning of the second starting port 63b. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF.

The first fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that the jackpot judgment of the second special symbol is determined to be a win while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is set to ON in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S717) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Also, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S603), when the variation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, it is set to OFF.

The second stop flag 203r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a hit while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is set to ON in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S407) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Also, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 23, S803), the variation display of the second special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop processing is executed.

The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area in which the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variable time storage area 203s counts the variable time (counts the number of interrupts) when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and the variable time (2 ms per one interrupt) is measured.

The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area in which the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). The second variable time storage area 203t counts the variable time (counts the number of interrupts) when the second special symbol starts to vary, and measures the variable time (2 ms per one interrupt).

In the present embodiment, the first variable time storage area 203s and the second variable time storage area 203t measure the variable time by counting the number of interrupts. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the clock data may be acquired from the RTC at the start of the variation, and thereafter the clock data may be acquired at any time to measure the variable time. Further, it is of course possible to store the variable time for variable display in advance and subtract the value from time to time.

The rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is a storage area for storing each determination result determined based on each data of the reservation areas 1 to 4 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914).

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u. The rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is composed of a reservation data storage area in which each judgment data corresponding to each reservation number of reservation areas 1 to 8 is stored, and a variable data storage area in which each judgment data corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol being changed is stored.

Each of the pending data holding areas 1 to 8 is provided with a success/failure determination result storage area 203u1, a jackpot type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern type storage area 203u3, a variation order storage area 203u4, a variation start time storage area 203u5, and a prefetch probability variation flag 203u6. The reserved areas 1 to 8 are stored in order from the reserved area 1 in the order in which the respective reserved balls were established (total establishment order combining the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b). In other words, the reserved areas 1 to 8 show the establishment order in which the reserved balls are established by combining the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

The variable display data storage area is provided with a success/fail determination result storage area 203u1, a jackpot type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern storage area 203u3, and a prefetch probability variation flag 203u6 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The success/failure determination result storage area 203u1 is a storage area for storing the result of pre-determining the validity of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914).

The jackpot type storage area 203u2 stores the jackpot type determined by the special hit type counter C2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914).

The fluctuation pattern type storage area 203u3 is a storage area for storing the type of fluctuation pattern determined based on various data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). This variation pattern is data capable of identifying which variation pattern is the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and is also used as data for identifying which of the first special pattern and the second special pattern the data of the reservation area is.

The variable display order storage area 203u4 is a storage area for storing the actual variable display start order in the reserved areas 1 to 8 determined based on various data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). Specifically, the fluctuation display start order is determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of the newly stored ball on hold and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each ball on hold previously stored.

The fluctuation start time storage area 203u5 is a storage area in which the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 calculated based on various data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) is stored. It should be noted that once this variable display start time is stored in the reserved area, it is updated at any time during other processing (S112) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main control unit 110. FIG.

The look-ahead probability variation flag storage area 203u6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when it is predicted (determined in advance) that the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S933), which will be described later. In addition, the look-ahead probability variation flag storage area 203u6 is set to OFF, because every time data is shifted to a higher reservation area and stored, the area before the shift is cleared to 0. That is, the prefetch probability variation flag storage area 203u6 once set to ON is shifted to the changing data storage area, and new data is overwritten (shifted) in the changing data storage area, thereby setting to OFF. Also, when the game machine is powered on and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial value is set to OFF.

Each data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read from the stored backup area and set.

The other memory area 203v is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. FIG.

In this way, when a game ball enters the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b and a reserved ball is generated, various judgment data of each reserved ball are stored according to the establishment order of the reserved balls combining the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. Therefore, by generating the prize winning command based on the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, the voice lamp control device 113 can generate a command output to the display control device 114 so as to display the pending symbols in the order of establishment of the pending by combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the winning command. Therefore, the reserved design display of the first special design and the second special design can be displayed on the third design display device 81 in the order of establishment of the reservation combining the first special design and the second special design.

In addition, since the variable display start order of each suspension is discriminated and stored in relation to the establishment order, by generating a winning command based on the variable display start order, even the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the establishment order of each suspension and the actual variable display start order based on the received winning command.

Also, since the variable start time of each hold is stored in each hold area and the time is managed (updated according to the passage of time), it is possible to easily discriminate the change display start order of the newly stored hold data.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display unit 88, and a solenoid 209 such as a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated), the shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display production (variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, controls the voice output device 226 and instructs the display control device 114 so that the pending symbol display displayed in the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order.

Also, the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 . In the pachinko machine 10, since the prize winning to the prize winning port is an important factor for determining the game state, it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent the intentional prize winning to the prize winning port. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 has been vibrated by a player or the like, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114 to convey the vibration error. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the error type to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, a first fluctuation start flag 223c1, a second fluctuation start flag 223c2, a first stop type selection flag 223d1, a second stop type selection flag 223d2, a subordinate first fluctuation stop flag 223e, a subordinate second fluctuation stop flag 223f, a subordinate At least a first fluctuation restart flag 223g, a secondary fluctuation restart flag 223h, a subsidiary first fluctuation time storage area 223i, a subsidiary second fluctuation time storage area 223j, a secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, and an other memory area 223m are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read, and the command is analyzed by the command determination processing, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, is a variable display (dynamic display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (standby count) of the variable display effect reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, like the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, is a variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (standby count) of the variable display effect reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times.

The first variation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1502). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1602).

The second variation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the second variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1505). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1602).

The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variation stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1612).

The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variation stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1612).

The secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. It is set to ON when a temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110 (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1702).

The secondary second fluctuation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. It is set to ON when a temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110 (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1706).

The secondary first fluctuation restart flag 223g is a flag indicating that the temporarily stopped fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave first restart flag 223g is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1710).

The secondary second fluctuation restart flag 223h is a flag indicating that the temporarily stopped fluctuation display of the second special symbol is restarted. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave second restart flag 223h is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1714).

The secondary first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This is a storage area in which a value synchronized with the first variable time storage area 203s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is stored. Based on the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms and the actual fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is stored.

The secondary second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which the value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This is a storage area in which a value synchronized with the second variable time storage area 203t in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is stored. Based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms and the actual variable display time is stored.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k is a storage area in which the same data as the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is stored based on the winning command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110.

FIG. 9(b) is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k. The secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is composed of a reservation area for reservation data from a reservation area 1 to a reservation area 8, and a storage area for variable display data in which various data of the first special pattern and the second special pattern being variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are stored. Each reserve area has a win/fail determination result storage area 223k1, a jackpot type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a prefetch probability variation flag storage area 223k6, and a rearrangement flag 223k7, and each data extracted from the received winning command is stored in the corresponding reserve area. Also, each time a display variation pattern command for starting variable display of special symbols is generated, the data in the reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is shifted to the previous reserved area and stored. The reserved data in the reserved area 1 are shifted and stored in the storage area of the changing data of the first special pattern in the case of the first special pattern, and in the storage area of the changing data of the second special pattern in the case of the second special pattern.

The success/failure determination result storage area 223k1 is a storage area for extracting and storing the result of pre-determining the validity of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). The information of the winning judgment result extracted from the winning command is stored in the winning judgment result storage area 223k1 of one of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holdings (corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main control device 110).

The jackpot type storage area 223k2 is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the special hit type counter C2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

The fluctuation pattern type storage area 223k3 is a storage area for extracting and storing the type of fluctuation pattern determined based on various data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). This variation pattern is data capable of identifying which variation pattern is the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and is also used as data for identifying which of the first special pattern and the second special pattern the data of the reservation area is.

The variation order storage area 223k4 is a storage area for extracting and storing the actual variation display start order in the reserved areas 1 to 8 determined based on various data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914).

The fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 is a storage area in which, in the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead processing (FIG. 27, S914), the time until each data of the holding areas 1 to 8 calculated based on the various data stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b actually starts to change display is extracted from the received winning command and stored. When this variable display start time is stored in the reservation area, it is updated as needed in the reservation number display process (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until each data of the calculated reservation areas 1 to 8 actually starts the variable display, but is not limited to it. Each counter value for calculating the time until the variable start (for example, the type of the selected variation pattern, the counter value for calculating the remaining variable time of the special symbol during variation (interruption number, etc.)) and the command corresponding to the time until the variable display starts.

The predictive reading probability variable flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 223k2 is the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot.

The rearrangement flag 223k7 is a flag indicating that the reserved symbol display is requested to be rearranged by the player by operating the frame button 22 (the reserved symbol display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated).

Thus, when a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 63a or the second start port 63a and a reserve ball is generated, various determination data of each reserve ball are stored according to the establishment order of the reserve balls combining the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b based on the data extracted from the prize winning command. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can generate a command output to the display control device 114 based on the data in the sub-sorting pending storage area 223k so as to display the pending symbols in the order in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined to establish a pending state. Therefore, the reserved design display of the first special design and the second special design can be displayed on the third design display device 81 in the order of establishment of the reservation combining the first special design and the second special design.

Also, based on the prize winning command, the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated with the data synchronized with the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110, and even if the reservation data is changed (establishment of new reservation, etc.), the data can be sequentially updated in synchronization.

The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM deletion switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24 volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, and generates 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage to the control devices 110 to 114 etc. as required voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volts of direct current becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores each data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u in the backup area of the RAM 203 as backup data. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed-up data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is read from the backup area and stored in each corresponding reservation area or changing data storage area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u.

Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), like the winning command generated in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S939), all the winning commands are generated based on the sorting pending storage area 203u in which the backed-up data is read and stored, and are output to the sound lamp control device 113, whereby data synchronized with the sorting pending storage area 223k is also set in the slave sorting pending storage area 223k.

In the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting the winning command to the audio ramp control device 113, the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k are synchronized even at the time of recovery from a power failure. 3 may be stored as backup data.

The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) is pressed when the power is turned on (the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch (122, FIG. 3) is pressed). A main control device 110 clears backup data when a RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and transmits a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 to the payout control device 111.例文帳に追加

The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs control processing such as detection of winning of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and various lotteries such as winning and selection of variation patterns for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is increased, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the sub control device performs the lottery as to whether or not to set the game operation suggesting setting as in the present embodiment, so that the control load of the main control device 110 can be lightened.

The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered by a box called a board box, which consists of a base member and a cover member made of transparent plastic. The board box is caulked by a tamper-proof member called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. In general, the sealing member is configured such that when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an unsealing mark, such as by destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member, by inserting (crimping) a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231 , a work RAM 233 , a ROM 234 , an image controller 237 , an input port 238 , an output port 239 and bus lines 240 and 241 .

The output side of the audio lamp controller 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different lottery probabilities of big wins and the number of prize balls put out for one big win, there are models with exactly the same specification of the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

Below, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234 .

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234 . The ROM 234 is also connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 , and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 . The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 .

When the game ball enters the distribution device 630 and is distributed by the passive distribution member 640 and the game ball wins the first start port 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired, and based on the acquired counter value, lottery and variation pattern etc. are determined. displayed (dynamic display). Further, when a game ball enters the sorting device 630 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is sorted by the passive sorting device 640 and enters the second starting port 63b. When the game ball enters the second starting port 63b, similarly to the case of winning the first starting port 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired for the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second lottery game machine, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the left 7-segment LED performs variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the right 7-segment LED performs variable display corresponding to the second special symbol.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, a variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the left display area Dm1, and a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is performed in the right display area Dm2. By configuring in this way, the variable display of the first special symbols and the second special symbols can be performed, and the player can efficiently perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game.

When a game ball wins in a first start port 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed (a state in which the remaining variable time is set), the first lottery game for variably displaying the lottery result of each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) obtained based on the winning cannot be executed immediately, so each counter value is stored (memorized) in a first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37 are lit and displayed in a manner indicating the number of reserved first special symbols "1" (for example, one light emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is updated (the number of reserved balls is added by 1).

The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp controller 113 when each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In the winning command, it is possible to identify which one of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b has won, and it is possible to identify the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command command, it extracts the pending number from the received command, the pending information such as the information about the winning starting port, and based on the pending information, the third symbol display device 81 Executes the process of displaying the pending design in the corresponding pending design display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds. As shown in FIG. 5(b), if the reserved design is a reserved design corresponding to the reserved information of the first special design (first start port 63a), the second special design (the second start port 63b) is displayed.

Similarly, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 63b while the second special symbol is being variably displayed (a state in which the remaining variable time is set), each counter value is acquired, stored (memorized) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is updated. Then, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a suspended symbol indicating that the suspended information is stored.

The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are respectively displayed in a comprehensive prize winning order in which the game balls that have won the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are combined. One example shown in FIG. 12 will be specifically described. First, this shows a state in which the first special pattern and the second special pattern are being variably displayed, the first special pattern has a remaining 10 seconds of fluctuation time, and the second special pattern has a remaining 5 seconds of fluctuation time. In the lower display area Ds of the third design display device 81, the reserved design display area Ds1 has a reserved design "●" indicating that it is the reserved information of the second special design (the reserved information based on the winning to the second starting port 63b), the reserved design display area Ds2 has a reserved design "○" indicating that it is the reserved information of the first special design, and the reserved design display area Ds3 has the reserved design "●" indicating that it is the reserved information of the second special design. A reserved design "○" indicating that it is reserved information of the first special design is displayed in the design display area Ds4. In this case, it is indicated that the winning order of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b is from the reserved design display area Ds1 to the reserved design display area Ds4 in order from the earliest.

That is, after the game ball has entered the second start port 63b, it has entered the first start port 63a, then the second start port 63b, and then the game ball has entered the first start port 63a.

As shown in FIG. 12, in each hold data, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the hold becomes the start of fluctuation is predicted and stored in advance (the type of fluctuation pattern to be determined is stored). Then, since the second special pattern is stored in the first winning order (reservation area 1 in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u), when the remaining variation time (5s) of the second special symbol currently being displayed lapses, the variation display is started, so the variation display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds later. In addition, since the second special symbol stored in the second winning order (reservation area 2 in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u) is the suspension of the first special symbol, the variation display is started when the remaining variation time (10 s) of the first special symbol that is currently being displayed has passed, so the variation display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds later. Next, since the second special symbol stored in the third place in the winning order (retaining area 3 in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u) is the suspension of the second special symbol, when the remaining variation time (5s) of the second special symbol in the variable display passes the variation time (40s) of the suspension data stored in the first place in the winning order, the variable display starts, so the variable display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since the reservation of the first special symbol is stored in the fourth winning order (reservation area 4 in the sorting reservation storage area 203u), the variable display starts when the remaining variation time (10s) of the first special symbol currently being displayed in variable display elapses, and the variable display start time is calculated to be 20 seconds later.

In this way, the variable display start times of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are calculated in order of establishment in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, and based on the variable display start times, the variable display order is assigned in the order of the earliest variable display start time.

At this timing, when the player operates the frame button 22, the reserved pattern display of the third pattern display device 81 is rearranged with the reserved pattern display of the first special pattern which is the fourth prize winning order and the reserved pattern display of the second special pattern which is the third prize winning order (the reserved pattern display of the fourth prize order is interrupted before the reserved pattern display of the third prize order) as shown in the rearrangement display mode shown in FIG.

FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing a process of determining the order of starting variable display of reserved symbols newly stored by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) when a game ball enters the first start hole 63a after 1 s from the state of FIG.

Since FIG. 13 shows the state after 1 s from FIG. 12, the remaining variation time is 9 s for the first special symbol being varied and the remaining variation time is 4 s for the second special symbol. Also, the fluctuation start time of each reserved area in the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u is updated.

The reservation of the newly established first starting port 63a (first special symbol) is the fifth winning order, and each data is stored in the reservation area 5 in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u. First, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol under variable display, which is the same as the newly stored first special symbol, and the suspension variation time of the first special symbols of winning orders 2 and 4 are respectively added to calculate the time when the suspension of the newly established (stored) first special symbol starts variable display (in this case, 24 s).

Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the order after rearrangement (variation display start order) is reordered based on the variable display start time of each reserved area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 to request the rearrangement of the reserved pattern display, the reserved pattern display of the 4th and 5th winning order is rearranged with the reserved pattern display of the 3rd winning order (the reserved pattern display of the 4th and 5th winning order interrupts before the reserved pattern display of the 3rd winning order) as shown in the post-rearrangement display mode of FIG.

In this way, by calculating the variable display start time and determining the rearrangement order each time a reservation occurs, when the player performs an operation requesting the rearrangement (operation of the frame button 22), the reserved pattern display after the rearrangement can be quickly displayed.

Also, the variation pattern of the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot tends to be longer than the variation pattern selected when the variation time is off. As shown in FIG. 13, the first suspension in the winning order has a long variation time of 40 seconds. Therefore, the holding of the same second special pattern established later has a later variation display start time than the holding of the first special pattern established later, and when rearranged, a type (difference between the first special pattern and the second special pattern) different from the holding pattern display with the long fluctuation time selected is collectively displayed behind the display of the reserved pattern with the long fluctuation time selected. Therefore, the larger the number of reserved pattern displays interrupting and displayed in the reserved pattern display area subsequent to the reserved pattern display, the more the player expects a big win for the previous reserved pattern display, and the player can perform rearrangement with an expectation of a big win. Therefore, the interest in the game increases, and the game can be continued without getting bored.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 14 to 40. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing (FIG. 32) that is started when power is turned on, main processing (FIG. 33, S1200) that is executed after the start-up processing, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds), and NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 31) that is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The MI interrupt processing will be explained, and then the start-up processing (FIG. 32) and the main processing (FIG. 33, S1200) will be explained.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), based on various processes, commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, etc. are generated and temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the pending ball number command set in the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108). Also, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of a jackpot state, a large opening opening/closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 . Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal hitting random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the stop type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (399, 99, 100, 198, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. When the special winning random number counter C1 or the ordinary winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1 or the ordinary winning random number counter C4, and the initial value is set in the special winning random number counter C1 or the ordinary winning random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S107), and then a starting winning process accompanying winning to the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b is performed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and the details of the starting winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process (S108), the normal symbol variation process, which is the normal symbol variation process for the game ball passing through the normal symbol start port 67, is performed (S109), and then the through gate process for the game ball passing through the normal symbol start port 67 is performed (S10). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and details of the through gate process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for controlling the shooting of game balls is executed (S111), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The shooting control process (S111) is a process of determining on/off of ball shooting on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. When the ball shooting is on, the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol variation process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determined variation display mode is controlled to enable simultaneous variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, or the control is executed to stop and display in the display mode showing the determination result. The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S202: Yes), a first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 17, S204) will be described later in detail, but when the specified variation time of the first special symbol being displayed in variation has passed, the processing of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game, and the processing of temporarily stopping the first special symbol being displayed in variation when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped with the symbol indicating the big win and the big win game of the second lottery game is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) will be described in detail later, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, processing for restarting the variable display is executed, while when it is not temporarily stopped, if the reservation data (various counter values) are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball number storage area 203a, the big hit determination and the variation pattern selection processing are executed based on the reservation data.

After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S107) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207) will be described later in detail, but similar to the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204), when the specified variation time of the second special symbol during variable display has elapsed, the processing of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game, and the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped with the symbol indicating the big win, and the first lottery game jackpot game is executed. A process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol being displayed is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described later in detail, but similar to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), when the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, the process for restarting the variable display is executed. Selection processing is performed. After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301). Determination of whether or not the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is determined by whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped in spite of the variation time (variation pattern) being set. When it is determined that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301: Yes), measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is restarted (S302). As for the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, when a fluctuation pattern or the like is selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) to be described later, the start of measurement of the fluctuation time is set. When the variation pattern is selected, a variation pattern command is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, main controller 110 starts variable display of the first special symbol on first display device 37 accordingly. The variable display of the first special symbol (the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b) on the first symbol display device 37 is restarted (S303). A first special symbol variation restart command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to resume the variable display of the temporarily stopped first special symbol is set (S304). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S305). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S306). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S306: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S308). The data stored in the reservation area 1 to the reservation area 4 of the first special symbol reservation ball number storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S308). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S309). The first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 17, S309) will be described later in detail, but based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, based on the set game state, a big hit determination is performed. Further, when it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot, the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON. As a result, it is possible to recognize that a big win game is started after the first special pattern is started to be variably displayed and stop-displayed, and the second special pattern being variably displayed can be temporarily stopped during the big win game of the first special pattern.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S310). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), which will be described later in detail, is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c.

Next, referring to FIG. 17, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the game state is a high probability game state (during probability variation) (S402). Determination of whether or not the gaming state is the high probability gaming state is executed by whether or not the variable probability flag 203m is set to ON. When it is determined that the variable probability flag 203m is on (that is, the game state is a high probability game state (during variable probability)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol big win random number table 202a for high probability, it is determined whether or not the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the big winning random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability flag 203m is off (that is, the game state is a low probability game state (not during variable probability)) (S402: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the big winning random number based on the special symbol big winning random number table 202a for low probability, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S405). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON (S407). As a result, when the determination result is a big hit in the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the variation display of the first special symbol for informing the determination result is stopped and displayed, the variation display is temporarily stopped if the second special symbol is in the process of variation.

Thus, by setting the second variation stop flag 203r to ON before starting the variation display of the first special symbol, it is possible to prevent the problem that the control processing is concentrated at the time of the variation stop compared with the case of determining whether or not to temporarily stop the second special symbol when the first special symbol is stopped at the time of the variation display.

Based on the value of the acquired special winning type counter C2, a big winning design is set in the first design display device 37, and the first big winning flag 203o is set to ON (S408). As a result, in the first symbol display device 37, the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b is set to a symbol based on the value of the special winning type counter C2 (for example, "7" for a 15R probability variable jackpot).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is OFF (S405: No), a lost symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S409). In this embodiment, in the case of misalignment, the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is set to "-" indicating misalignment. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S310). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S501: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S502). When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S501: No), a special deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set. When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. Also, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

The jackpot type table is determined by the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S504). The jackpot type table is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table. In the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot, the 15R jackpot table is determined, and in the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R jackpot table is determined. The variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c (S505).

A variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 (S506). Here, a variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the audio ramp controller 113 is also set. A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S507). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set.

By starting the measurement of the variation time of the first special pattern together with the setting of the variation pattern command, the variation time can be measured by synchronizing the timing with the start of variation of the first special pattern, and the variation time can be accurately measured.

Next, referring to FIG. 19, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204), first, it is determined whether or not the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601). When it is determined that the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602). When it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602: Yes), a temporary first variation stop command for instructing the temporary stop of the first special symbol is set to the voice lamp control device 113, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped, and the first variation stop flag 203q is set to OFF (S603). Then, the measurement of the first variation time is interrupted (S604).

By configuring in this way, the first special symbol can also be temporarily stopped at the timing when the variation is stopped at the determination symbol that the second special symbol is a win. Therefore, the player can play the game while concentrating on the big win game in the second lottery game.

In addition, since the measurement of the first variation time is also interrupted in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, it is possible to accurately measure the remaining variation time after the big winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the third symbol display device 81 stops and displays the first special symbol in a display mode in which the player can understand that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, characters such as ``the first special pattern is temporarily stopped'' are displayed, and the player is notified of the temporary stop by continuing to variably display the left, middle, and right three main patterns constituting the special pattern in a swaying display mode. Further, the display mode for notifying the temporary stop is not limited to this, and other notification modes may be used.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is not the end time (that is, the variation display is in progress) (S602: No), the process of S605 is executed. When it is determined that the first variation stop flag 203q is off (S601: No), it is determined whether the variation time of the first special symbol during variation display is the end time (S605).

When it is determined that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not the end time (S605: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end time (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the first big hit flag 203o is set (S606). When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set (S606: Yes), the variable probability flag 203m is set to OFF (S607). Various settings of the jackpot game are made based on the determined fluctuation stop type (S608). Specifically, in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 15 times, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a in one round is set to 30 seconds. In addition, in the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 2 times, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 2s.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S606: No), it is determined whether the time saving counter 203k is greater than "0" (S609). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than "0" (S609: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 is subtracted by 1 (S610). In other words, the time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol is variably displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value smaller than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S609: No), the process of S611 is executed.

A first confirmation command is set to the sound lamp control device 113 to instruct to confirm and stop the variable display of the first special symbol (S611). The first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determined success/failure determination result (S612). The value in the first variable time storage area 203s is cleared to 0, and the first variable time measurement value is cleared to 0 (S613). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), the above-described first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), the first special symbol, the first variation time measurement restart, the first symbol display device 37, the first special symbol variation restart command, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area, the first special symbol jackpot for each process of S301 to S310 The determination process and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process of S701 to S710 are the same except that they are changed to the second special symbol, the second variation time measurement restart, the second symbol display device 37, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area, the second special symbol big hit determination process, and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709), in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), in the process of S401, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area is set to S711, the second special symbol reserved ball execution area is set to each process of S407 to S408, and the second fluctuation stop flag and the first jackpot flag are set to S717 to S718. However, since it is the same except that it is changed to the first fluctuation stop flag and the second jackpot flag, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) is the same as the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) with respect to each process of S507 to S508 except that the first stop type command and the first variation time measurement start are changed to the first stop type command and the first variation time measurement start in each process of S727 to S728, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207).

In the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207), the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204), the first variation stop flag, the first special symbol, the provisional first variation stop command, and the first variation time measurement interruption are the first variation stop flag, the first special symbol, the provisional first variation stop command, and the first variation time measurement interruption S801 to S804 for each processing of S601 to S604. Measurement is interrupted, respectively, and the first fixed command, the first special symbol, and the first variation time measurement value are the same in each process of S811 to S813 except that they are changed to the second confirmation command, the second special symbol, and the second variation time measurement value for each process from S611 to S613, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the control of the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is independently executed in parallel, so that the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, as compared with the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is executed by either one of them, the pachinko machine 10 is put into a state in which the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is easily executed in either the first special pattern or the second special pattern even if the fluctuation time of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is comparatively shortened, and the state in which the special pattern is not variably displayed becomes longer by increasing the efficiency of the game. It is possible to suppress the troubles that occur.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is executed one by one, when the sorting device 630 is provided as in the present embodiment, unless the variation time is comparatively shortened, many overflows that do not result in held balls occur. However, in the configuration where the lottery game is performed with both the first special pattern and the second special pattern as in the present embodiment, even if the variation with a long variation time is selected on the one hand, the special pattern is also varied on the other hand, so that many lotteries of special symbols can be performed in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect with a sufficient variable time as necessary, and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.

Also, even if the first special pattern and the second special pattern are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when the big winning game occurs in one of the first and second special patterns, the variable display of the other special pattern is temporarily stopped, so that the player can play the game while concentrating on the big winning game.

In addition, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is in progress, so the player can grasp that the lottery game which was in the middle of the variable display is not extinguished, and the player can play the big winning game without anxiety.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a sorting device 630, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are configured to easily win alternately, and the winning is biased to either the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, and by trying to win the other start port with less reserves, game balls win more than the upper limit of the number of reserves in one start port 63a, 63b, resulting in many invalid balls. It is possible to suppress troubles.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S108). The start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) determines whether the game ball has won the first start hole 63a or the second start hole 63b, and if it wins, the upper limit number of reservations (the first start hole 63a, the second start hole 63b, up to 4), each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, a process of predicting the result of right or wrong determination, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. in advance is executed based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 63a (starting winning) (S901). Here, winning to the first starting port 63a is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 63a (there has been a starting prize) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is obtained (S902). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reservations for the first starting port 63a (that is, whether the number of reservations is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S904). A reserved pitch number command for notifying the reserved number to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S905). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and reserved (stored) in the special winning random number counter storage area 203c1, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, the variation pattern determination counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c of the RAM 203. (S906).

Next, a first prefetch process is executed (S907). The first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S108) will be described in detail later, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol in which the variable display start order based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored It is determined in advance what the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined, and furthermore, the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. are determined from the variable display order and each stored counter value.

Next, with respect to each process from S908 to S914, the same process as the process performed for the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 63a executed in each process from S901 to S907 is different only in that it is the process executed for the second start hole 63b, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 25, the first look-ahead process (S907), which is one process of the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108), will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process (S907).

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, is read out (S921). The read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, and the variable display start time for starting the variable display based on the newly stored pending data (each counter value) is calculated (S922).

As shown in FIG. 12, this fluctuation start time is calculated by adding the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol (if the hold data is based on the first start port 63a, the first special symbol, and the second start port if the hold data is based on the start port 63b, the second special symbol) during the change display corresponding to the newly stored hold data, and the determined change time of each hold data previously stored based on the same start ports 63a and 63b as the newly stored hold data.

Here, each pending data previously stored based on the same starting port as the newly stored pending data is based on the previously stored first starting port 63a (corresponding to the first special symbol) if the newly stored pending data is the pending data based on the first starting port 63a. ) is pending data.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the rearranged order of all pending data stored in the sort pending storage area 203u is renumbered in descending order of the variable display start time (S923). Here, regarding the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, all the reserved data are renumbered. However, this is not limited to this, and when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, i.e., when the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data is interrupted by the variable display start order of the previously stored reserved data, only the changed order may be renumbered.

It is determined whether or not the game state when the newly stored holding data starts to fluctuate is the high probability game state (S924). The game state at the start of variation is discriminated by discriminating whether or not there is a state in which a look-ahead probability variation flag 203u6 is turned on although newly stored retention data are stopped before the start of variation, and whether or not there is a suspension to stop with a 15R normal jackpot after that. When it is determined that the game state when the newly stored hold data starts to fluctuate is the high probability game state (S924: Yes), the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted based on the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, and the determination result is stored in the pertinent rearrangement hold storage area 203u (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state when the newly stored reservation data starts to fluctuate is the low probability game state (normal game state) (S924: No), based on the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement suspension storage area 203u (S927).

A first prefetch update process is executed (S926). The first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926) will be described in detail later, but in the order in which the change display is actually started, the jackpot type (probability variation or not) and the variation pattern (variation time) are stored (updated) based on the determination result of the pending data (various counter values) stored in the sorting pending storage area 203u.

Next, the first prefetch update process (S926), which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this first prefetch update process (S926).

In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926), first, it is determined whether or not the winning judgment result predicted in the process of S925 or S927 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) was a jackpot (S931). When it is determined that the success/failure determination result predicted in the processing of S925 or S927 in the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907) was a jackpot (S931: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted jackpot was a probability variable jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot) (S932). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S932: Yes), the predictive variable probability flag 203u6 of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u corresponding to the newly stored pending data is set to ON (S933). In addition, since the data in the reservation area before being shifted is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted to the upper reservation area and stored, the read-ahead probability variation flag 203u6 is set to OFF there. In other words, the look-ahead probability variation flag 203u6 once set to ON is set to OFF by sequentially shifting the reserved area and overwriting (clearing to 0) the next new data in the changing data storage area.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the variable probability jackpot (that is, the 15R normal jackpot) (S932: No), the process of S934 is executed.

From the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state (probability variation or time saving) at the start of the variation display, the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display is predicted based on the values of the special winning type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 of the newly stored holding data (S934).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the win/loss determination result predicted in the processing of S925 in the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907) is out (S931: No), the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display is predicted based on the values of the variation pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data from the special outlier variation pattern table 202e corresponding to the gaming state at the start of the variation display (whether it is a variable probability or a short time) (S907). 935).

The predicted success/failure, stop type, and variation pattern are stored (corresponding to the newly stored pending data) in the area corresponding to the winning order of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u (S936). It is determined whether the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u has been stored by interrupting (changing the order of) the previously stored variable display start order (S937). If it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is interrupted (changed in order) to the previously stored variable display start order (S937: Yes), the hold data after the variable display start order of the newly stored hold data (the hold data in the order of starting to variate after the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored hold data stops fluctuating) is again predicted for success or failure, stop type, and fluctuation pattern. and update (S938). Based on the success/failure, stop type, variation pattern, winning order, variable display start order, and look-ahead probability variation flag 203u6 corresponding to all the pending data stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, a winning command for notifying the data to the audio lamp control device 113 is generated for each pending data (S939).

In this way, when the game ball wins the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b and is held until the corresponding special symbol can be started to be displayed in a variable manner, determination of whether the game is successful or determination of a selected variation pattern, etc. are executed before the start of the variable display, and the variation start order during the suspension is also calculated. Therefore, when the reserved symbol display is displayed, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in order of start of variation by the player's operation.

In addition, when a new hold is stored and the order of starting the fluctuation is changed by the hold (the order of starting the fluctuation of the newly stored hold is interrupted and stored), again among the holding areas stored in the sorting hold storage area 203u, for the hold of which the change starts after the newly stored hold is stopped, the success judgment, the stop type, and the change pattern are updated. can be updated to accurate data even when the

In the present embodiment, when the newly stored change start order of the reservation is interrupted and stored, the reservation data of the reservation area (appropriateness judgment, stop type, variation pattern) is updated again. With this configuration, the data in the reservation area can be updated each time a new reservation is stored, and can always be configured with more accurate data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the second look-ahead process (S914), which is one process of the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this second prefetching process (S914).

The second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) pre-reads the pending data based on the above-described first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) having won the first starting gate 63a, determines the order of starting variable display of the stored pending data, and makes various judgments. Since the same processing is executed with only one difference, detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, the second prefetch update process (S946), which is one process of the second prefetch process (Fig. 27, 914) shown in Fig. 28, predicts various selected data based on the order in which variable display of the reserved data is started based on the winning of the first opening 63a in the first prefetching update process (S926, Fig. 26). The only difference is that it is a process of predicting various selection data based on the order and generating a winning command.

In this way, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (reserved data is stored), the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) is executed. In the newly stored pending data, the order of starting the variable display is determined in the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914) by comparing with the variable display start time of each pending data stored in the rearranged pending ball storage area 203u first, so that the game state (whether or not the variable display is in progress) can be accurately determined when the stored pending data starts the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the result of determination of suitability, the type of stoppage, the variation pattern to be variably displayed, and the like. Therefore, next, even when new reserved data is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the fluctuation display start time of the newly stored reserved data can be accurately predicted based on the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of each reserved data predicted in the first look-ahead process (Fig. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (Fig. 27, S914). As a result, the correct variable display start order can be predicted.

In addition, when the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data is stored by interrupting the variable display start order of the previously stored reserved data (order is stored earlier), for each reserved data of the variable display start order after the newly stored reserved data, the game state at the start of the variable display is again predicted by the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), and the win/fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern prediction (prefetching). is performed, a winning command can be generated based on a more accurate prediction result. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored pending data from the winning command.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, the normal symbol variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 64, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1001). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the second symbol display section 88 displays the winning to when the opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 64 is being performed. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display portion 88 is being variably displayed (S1002). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being changed and displayed (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display section 88 has elapsed (S1003). Incidentally, the variable time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1017 and the processing of S1018, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second pattern display unit 88. FIG.

In the process of S1003, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1003: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that are being variably displayed has passed (S1003: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display section 88 is set (S1004). In the process of S1004, if the lottery for the normal symbol is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1018, the second symbol display part 88 is set so as to stop display (illuminate display) the "○" symbol as the second symbol. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is lost and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the processing of S1017, the second pattern display part 88 is set so as to stop display (illuminate display) the "x" pattern as the second pattern. When the stop display is set by the process of S1004, the variable display in the second symbol display section 88 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display section 88 in the display mode set in the processes of S1017 and S1018.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1005). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1005: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 64 is set (1006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a loss (S1005: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S1002: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of variable display in the normal symbol held) is acquired (S1007). After the process of S1007, the process of S1023 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is greater than 0 (S1008). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1008: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S1009).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203h are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area are shifted in the order of normal design reservation 1→execution area, normal design reservation 2→normal design reservation 1, normal design reservation 3→normal design reservation 2, normal design reservation 4→ordinary design reservation 4. After shifting the data, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i is acquired (S1011).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether it is not 0) (S1012). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not during the time saving) (S1012: No), the success/failure determination result is acquired based on the hit determination value of the normal symbol per random number table for low probability (FIG. 8(d)) (S1013). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not 0 (that is, the time is being shortened) (S1012: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot (S1014). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1014: Yes), the process of S1013 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1014: No), the win determination result is acquired based on the hit determination value of the normal symbol per random number table for high probability (FIG. 8(d)) (S1015).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is winning (S1016). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not a win (that is, a loss) (S1016: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode when losing, is set (S1017). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is winning (that is, winning) (S1016: Yes), the display mode of "O", which is the display mode at the time of winning, is set (S1018).

It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the game state is during time saving (including variable probability)) (S1019). If it is determined that the time is not being shortened (S1019: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 is set to 0.2 s, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1020).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during time saving (S1019: Yes), it is determined whether it is during the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (S1021). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1021: Yes), the process of S1020 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1021: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1020).

It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the game state is during time saving (including variable probability)) (S1023). When it is determined that the time is reduced (S1023: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3s (S1024). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not being shortened (S1023: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1025).

Next, the through gate passage processing (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through-gate passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67, and is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal winning random number counter C4 when the game ball has passed.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 30, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (gate) 67 (S1031). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1031: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1032). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1033).

If the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031: No), or if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 but the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is not less than 4 (S1033: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1031: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1033: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S1034). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt processing described above and the first normal symbol flag are stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (normal symbol reservation 1 to normal symbol reservation 4) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203 (S1035). In the process of S1035, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the normal symbol reserved 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal design reservation 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the area of normal design reservation 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the area of normal design reservation 4 is set as the first area.

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1041), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 32), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (11605).

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed, so the process proceeds to S1110 in such a case as well. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1110, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1110). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main controller 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1111, S1112).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, such as when the hall opens, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed during startup processing, the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1111, S1112) is executed.

Similarly, when power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S1111, S1112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1113.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1107: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1113). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S914). Then, the process proceeds to main processing (S1200), which will be described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the main process (S1200) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up process described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1200). This main process (S1200) is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 are transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1201).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (100 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). A display control process for the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1204).

Next, display control processing of a second pattern (for example, a pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display unit 88 is executed (S1205). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol is displayed with variation in the second symbol display part 88.例文帳に追加Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the normal win random number counter C4, and when the second symbol wins, the normal electric accessory 64 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206), and if power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the previous main process (S1207).

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous main processing (S1207: No), the initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing (S1208, S1209).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1208). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1202 (S1209).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1205 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1206, if the RAM 203 stores the power failure occurrence information (S1206: Yes), the power supply is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and as a result of the power failure signal SG1 being output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 31 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1210), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been shut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) (S1211). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1212), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1213), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

The process of S1206 is executed at the timing when the series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1205 ends, or when one cycle of the processes of S1208 and S1209 performed within the remaining time ends. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from the state of power interruption, the processing can be started from the processing of S1201 after the start-up processing is completed. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the process of S1201 can be started by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initialization process (S1301). Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process (S1400) executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, it is determined whether or not the current start-up processing was started during execution of the power-off processing (see FIG. 35) in S1418 due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 35, S1415), the power-off processing of S1418 is executed. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1418 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up processing was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power-off processing of S1418 was completed, or was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), it will transfer to S1304 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (because the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut off), so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if this launch process has been started after an instant power outage has been completed after the execution of the power supply process of S1418 is completed, or if a reset is started only on the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 by noise, etc. Since the keyword 55AAh is remembered, the data of RAM223 is determined to be normal (S1303: NO) and shifts to S1308.

If the power-off processing flag is ON (S1302: Yes), the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset during execution of the power-off processing in S1418. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is executed (see FIG. 35 and S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1418 is executed, the processing of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned on when the current start-up processing is started after a momentary power failure occurs and the execution of the power-off processing of S1418 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1109) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1310), interrupt permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned off, for example, because the current start-up process was started after the power was completely shut off, the process of S1304 to S1306 was passed through to the process of S1308, or the process was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1310 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1310).

The reason why the clear processing of S1309 is skipped is that when the processing of S1308 is reached from S1304 through the processing of S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304. This is because the control of the lamp control device 113 can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main processing (S1400) executed by MPU 221 in audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1400). When the main process (S1400) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process (S1400) was started or the process of S1401 was last executed (S1401). The reason why S1401 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is that S1402 to S1410 are processing related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), but it is preferable to execute the variable display processing in S1411 and the command determination processing in S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1402). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting performance, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, the setting for switching the display of the third pattern display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the pending number display update process (S1406), the process of updating the display of the pending symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k, which will be described later in detail.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring/performance processing, the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the performance effect, and the corresponding performance is set to be performed when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearrangement possible period (a period during which the jackpot game is being played and the state without reservation is omitted) to be described later, the reserved pattern display displayed in the order of establishment of the reservation is rearranged and displayed in the order of the start of the variable display.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1408), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1409, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410). After that, the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the process of S1411, in order to display a variable display effect on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and a variable display setting process is executed for setting the command to be transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), the temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) executes a process for temporarily stopping the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the reception of a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped or a temporary second variation stop command indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped from the main control device 110. The details of this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), the pending rearrangement process is executed (S1413). In this reserved sorting process, the reserved pattern display is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the variable display from the winning order based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, based on the player's button operation. The details of this pending rearrangement process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the pending rearrangement process (S1413), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1414). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1414 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off processing is executed (S1418). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1419), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416). On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S1400) is not executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1414). This command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and determines the command received from the main controller 110 as described above. Details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the first variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1501). Here, the first variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the first variation pattern command has been received (S1501: Yes), the first variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the second variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1505). Here, the second variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the second variation pattern command has been received (S1504: Yes), the second variation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is used when setting a second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the start of the second special symbol variation display effect and the second special symbol variation pattern type to the display control device 114 in the later-described variation display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411).

If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1507). If it is determined that the first or second stop type command has been received (S1507: Yes), the first stop type selection flag is set to ON if the first stop type command has been received. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to ON. (S1508). A stop type (either 15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, or 2R probability variable jackpot) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command is stored so as to be identifiable as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is stored so as to be identifiable as the second special symbol stop type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether a pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (S1510). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S1510: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter f of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command (that is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved in the main controller 110) is extracted, is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, and the second special symbol reserved ball number is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (S1511).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting hole 63a or the second starting hole 63b (start winning). 3e and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserve. The value of the ball number counter 223b2 can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110.

If it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), the information of each reserved area in the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u of the main controller 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each reservation area in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u to be extracted is, for each reservation, the winning judgment result, the jackpot type, the variation pattern type, the order of the variation display, and the time until the start of the variation display.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515). When it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515: Yes), when the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received, the slave first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON, and when the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received, the slave second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1516).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is not received (S1515: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol fluctuation restart command or the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is received (S1517: Yes), when the first special symbol variation resume command corresponding to the received command is received, the slave first variation resume flag 223g is set to ON. Also, when the second special symbol variation restart command is received, the secondary second variation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation resume command has not been received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

Next, the pending number display update process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process (S1406). This pending number display update process (S1406) is a process for updating the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each pending area of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k.

In the pending number display update process (FIG. 37, S1406), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each pending area of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k is updated (S1431). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the updating of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may of course be performed by other methods.

The reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is turned on is displayed in the variable display start order, and the reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned off is displayed in the order of establishment of reservation (S1432).

Here, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON in all the reservation areas in which the reservation data are stored when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed in this embodiment) during the rearrangement possible period in the reservation rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later. As a result, all of the displayed pending symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending establishment order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, the newly stored reservation is displayed at the end of the reserved pattern display displayed on the third pattern display device 81, that is, in the order established without being rearranged because the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF.

Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved pattern display, the reserved pattern display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and after that, the rearranged reserved pattern display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the reserved pattern display corresponding to the newly stored (occurring) hold is displayed at the end in the established order without interrupting the previously displayed reserved pattern display. , the player can suppress the problem of confusion about the order in which the current displays are displayed.

By rearranging only the reserved pattern displays displayed when the frame button 22 is operated in this way, the variable display start order can be notified only when the player wants to know.

Also, usually, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose establishment order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose establishment order is earlier (on the reserved pattern display area Ds1 side). Therefore, when the reserved pattern display is rearranged by operating the frame button 22, when the reserved pattern whose establishment order is late is interrupted and displayed before the reserved pattern whose establishment order is early, the player can expect that the reserved pattern which is displayed before the interrupted reserved pattern and is caused by winning the start port 63a, 63b different from the interrupted reserved pattern is a big win.

Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, he/she can operate the frame button 22 expecting that the arrangement order will be changed, thinking that the reserved pattern display may have a reservation that will result in a big win, and can operate the frame button 22 with a feeling of expectation for a big win.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1411). This variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) generates a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the first or second variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 and transmits the command to the display control device 114 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Also, based on the extracted stop type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot), a process of setting a display first or second stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411), first, it is determined whether or not the first variable start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). When it is determined that the first variation start flag 223c1 is off (S1601: No), the first variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1606 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is ON (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S1602).

In the processing of S1603, the variation pattern in the variable display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the processing of S1503 of the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) is obtained from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display of the 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", it is configured to indicate that it corresponds to the second special design.

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the display control device 114 starts the display control of the variation display performance so that the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed by the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the first special symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special symbol reserved ball corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol reserved ball is set), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the reserved data stored in the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is shifted to the previous reserved area (S1604). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner that reservation area 1→reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, reservation area 5→reservation area 4, reservation area 6→reservation area 5, reservation area 7→reservation area 6, reservation area 8→reservation area 7, and so on. Using the secondary first variable time storage area 223i, measurement of the variable time of the first special symbol is started (S1605).

It is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). If it is determined that the second variation start flag 223c2 is not ON (that is, OFF) (S1606: No), the first variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is ON (S1606: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF (S1607). In the processing of S1506 of the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is generated (S1608).

The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400). When the display control device 114 receives the second special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts the display control of the variation display performance so that the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is variablely displayed in the second special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command for the second special symbol, the second special symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) in the right display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command. Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special symbol reserved ball corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol reserved ball is set), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 is decreased by 1, and the reserved data stored in the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is shifted to the previous reserved area (S1609). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner that reservation area 1→reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, reservation area 5→reservation area 4, reservation area 6→reservation area 5, reservation area 7→reservation area 6, reservation area 8→reservation area 7, and so on.

Using the secondary second variable time storage area 223j, measurement of the variable time of the second special symbol is started (S1610).

It is determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to ON (that is, they are OFF) (S1611: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is ON (S1611: Yes), the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to OFF if the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is ON, and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to OFF if the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is ON (S1612). .

In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command is set (S1613). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, a display first stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, or 2R probability variable jackpot) is generated. In addition, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 is generated a second stop type command for display for notifying the stop type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, or 2R probability variable jackpot) (S1614). In addition, the first or second stop type command notified from the main controller 110 notifies the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, and is notified even if the judgment result is out. If the determination result is out, the out symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

By being configured in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

In addition, by shifting the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k based on the setting of the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is possible to reduce the control load of the main controller 110 by eliminating the need for controlling transmission of a dedicated command for shifting from the main controller 110.例文帳に追加

Next, the temporary fluctuation stopping process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 becomes a big hit, and the other variable display is temporarily stopped during the big win game.

In the temporary fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is determined whether or not the secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. When it is determined that the secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

A first temporary stop command for display is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed by the third symbol display device 81 . When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the display control device 114, after stopping the variable display of the first special pattern, slightly shakes and displays the first special pattern (left, middle and right main patterns) to inform the player that the variable display is temporarily stopped. In addition, by displaying the characters ``the first special pattern is temporarily stopped'' in the left display area Dm1 of the third pattern display device 81, it is configured to notify the fact that the variable display is temporarily stopped so as to make it easier for the player to understand.

In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbols that are being variably displayed are temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of the big hit, and can play the game without worrying that the lottery that is being variably displayed will disappear or become invalid.

In addition, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and may be a configuration in which the first special symbol is deleted from the left side display area Dm to notify that the temporary stop is being performed only by characters, or other configurations may be used.

When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol measured in the slave first variation time storage area 223i is interrupted (suspended).

By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be managed accurately, and even when the fluctuation display is restarted, the fluctuation display can be performed accurately with the remaining fluctuation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S1701: No), it is determined whether the secondary fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705). When it is determined that the secondary second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the secondary second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second temporary stop command for display is generated (S1707). The second temporary stop command for display, like the first temporary stop command for display, is a command for controlling the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81. As with the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in a temporary stop display mode.

When the second temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol measured in the second variation time storage area 223j is interrupted (temporarily stopped).

By configuring in this way, the variation time of the second special symbol can be managed accurately, and even when the variation display is resumed, the variation display can be performed accurately with the remaining variation time.

It is determined whether or not the secondary first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). When it is determined that the secondary first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709: Yes), the secondary first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1710).

It is determined whether or not the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the first special symbol stored in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is 3 s or less (S1711: Yes), the first short variation mode resume command for display is set (S1712). When the command for resuming the first short fluctuation mode for display is set, it is output to the display control device 114 . This command for resuming the first short fluctuation mode for display causes the display control device 114 to display the character ``lottery result of the temporarily stopped fluctuation display!'' in the left display area Dm1 for the remaining fluctuation time, and then stops and displays the first special pattern with the pattern indicating the lottery result based on the determination command output from the main controller 110.例文帳に追加When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "The lottery result of the temporarily stopped variable display has been displayed!", and continues to be displayed until the next variation starts.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3 s (S1711: No), the first normal variation mode resume command for display is set (S1713). When the command for resuming the first normal variation mode for display is set, it is output to the display control device 114 . This command for resuming the first normal variation mode for display displays characters ``Varying the temporarily stopped variation display!'' in the left side display area Dm1 during the remaining variation time, variably displays all the main patterns of the first special pattern (three patterns on the left, middle, and right) during the remaining variation time, and then stops and displays the first special pattern with the pattern indicating the lottery result based on the determination command output from the main controller 110.例文帳に追加Next, the variable time measurement is restarted in the secondary first variable time storage area 223i (S1714).

With this configuration, even if the main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the remaining variation time and selects the remaining variation mode, so that the control load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, when the remaining variation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted variation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player overlooks it or cannot understand the notification result because it is too short. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the information result is displayed after notifying the player that the lottery result will be displayed immediately, so the player can recognize that the information result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is displayed.

Further, even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the characters for notifying that the suspended variable display has been stopped are displayed, so even when the remaining variable time is very short (for example, within 1 s), the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Also, even when the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the player is notified that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is being varied, so that the player can easily recognize that the suspended variation display was effective without disappearing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the slave first fluctuation restart flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the slave second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1715). When it is determined that the secondary second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1715: Yes), the secondary second fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1716).

It is determined whether or not the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is 3 s or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode resume command for display is set (S1718). When the second short fluctuation mode resume command for display is set, it is output to the display control device 114 . This command for resuming the second short fluctuation mode for display displays the character ``The lottery result of the temporarily stopped variable display!'' is displayed on the display control device 114 in the right display area Dm2 during the remaining fluctuation time, and then the second special pattern is stopped and displayed with the pattern indicating the lottery result based on the determination command output from the main controller 110.例文帳に追加When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "The lottery result of the temporarily stopped variation display has been displayed!", and continues to be displayed until the next variation starts.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3 s (S1717: No), the second normal variation mode resume command for display is set (S1719). When the command for resuming the second normal variation mode for display is set, it is output to the display control device 114 . This command for resuming the second normal variation mode for display displays characters ``Varying the temporarily stopped variation display!'' in the right side display area Dm2 during the remaining variation time, variably displays all the main patterns of the second special pattern (three patterns on the left, middle, and right) during the remaining variation time, and then stops and displays the second special pattern with the pattern indicating the lottery result based on the determination command output from the main controller 110.例文帳に追加Next, the variable time measurement is restarted in the secondary second variable time storage area 223j (S1720). On the other hand, if it is determined that the secondary second fluctuation resume flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process is terminated.

With this configuration, even if the main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the remaining variation time and selects the remaining variation mode, so that the control load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, when the remaining variation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted variation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player overlooks it or cannot understand the notification result because it is too short. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the information result is displayed after notifying the player that the lottery result will be displayed immediately, so the player can recognize that the information result that has been interrupted (temporarily stopped) is displayed.

Further, even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the characters for notifying that the suspended variable display has been stopped are displayed, so even when the remaining variable time is very short (for example, within 1 s), the player can recognize that the suspended variable display is effective and the determination result is stopped and displayed.

Also, even when the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the player is notified that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is being varied, so that the player can easily recognize that the suspended variation display was effective without disappearing.

In the present embodiment, when the interrupted variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is to be resumed, the player is informed of this by means of characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be made by voice, lamp or the like. In addition, it is of course possible to notify the player in a display mode dedicated to resuming the suspended variable display, such as a display mode that allows the player to know that the variable display has resumed (for example, an animation is displayed to notify that the character or the like is resuming the suspended variable display). By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the interrupted variable display has been resumed.

In this embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to select a variation pattern in accordance with the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when the main controller 110 restarts the temporarily stopped variation table time, it may be configured to select a variation pattern with the same variation time or a variation pattern with a variation time slightly shorter than the remaining variation time depending on the remaining variation time. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the voice ramp control device 113 delays the difference between the remaining variation time and the variation pattern with the slightly shorter variation time to perform the variation display, thereby performing the variation display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern in accordance with the remaining variation time.

Next, the pending rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this pending rearrangement process (S1413). This pending sorting process (FIG. 40, S1413) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) executes a process of setting the pending symbol displays displayed in the pending establishment order on the third symbol display device 81 to be rearranged in the variable display start order when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid period.

In the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), first, it is determined whether or not it is a rearrangeable period (S1801). In the rearrangement possible period, a game state other than a jackpot game or a state of no reservation established at different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which one or more first special symbols and second special symbols are not reserved) is set in the rearrangement possible period.

If it is determined that it is the sortable period (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third pattern display device 81 displays the characters ``Perhaps rearrangement is possible!'' to inform the player of the period during which the frame button 22 can be operated. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may naturally be configured to control so as to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing a rearrangement possible period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and can operate the frame switch 22 at an appropriate timing. In addition, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and when the frame button 22 is operated, if the rearrangement is possible, the rearrangement display may be performed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1803: Yes), the sorting flags 223k7 of all the reserved areas in which the pending data of the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k are stored are set to ON (S1804).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the sortable period (S1801: No) and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1803: No), the process ends.

With this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be rearranged.

The player can know the actual order of starting the variable display, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (special symbol to start the variable display). Therefore, the game can be played while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

Further, in the configuration of this pachinko machine, since the game ball is easily won by alternating the first start port 63a and the second start port 64a by the distribution device 630, the first special pattern and the second special pattern are equally played and the game can be played efficiently.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the rearrangement of the reserved symbols is not limited to the configuration for executing the rearrangement based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, but it may naturally be constituted so as to be executed each time a new reserved pattern is stored. With this configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order from the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangement possible period is a game state other than during the jackpot game or a state without holding established at different start ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more first special symbols and second special symbols).

In addition, when the jackpot game is set as the rearrangement possible period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped fluctuation display during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the reserved first special pattern or the second special pattern and the remaining fluctuation time during the temporary stop, the rearrangement order is determined, and rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. By constructing in this way, even if a new reserved display mode is displayed during a jackpot game, the reserved display mode and the display mode already displayed before the reserved display mode are displayed are combined, rearranged in an accurate variation start order, and the correct variation start order can be notified to the player even in the jackpot game machine.

Further, in this embodiment, the rearranged data are stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u of the main controller 110 and the subordinate rearrangement reserve storage area 223k of the sound lamp controller 113. FIG. Not limited to that, the main control device 110 is configured to notify various data necessary for sorting by the winning command of the sound ramp control device 113 (results of winning or failing, jackpot type, variation pattern type, etc.), and the sound ramp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform sorting.

With this configuration, the main controller 110 backs up various data necessary for rearrangement in the RAM 203 even in the event of a power failure, and outputs the various data to the audio lamp controller 113 in the start-up process (FIG. 32) when the power is restored.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation start time of the reserved first special symbol or the second special symbol is calculated based on the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the start of fluctuation and the fluctuation pattern type of the data stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, and the fluctuation start order is calculated. Not limited to this, when a game ball wins, information (time information) as to whether or not the variation mode is longer than a fixed time is determined by determining whether or not the variation mode is a ready-to-win state, and the variation start order may be roughly determined based on the time information and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during variation and rearranged. By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform a player of a rough variation start order even in a pachinko machine 10 in which it is determined whether or not the variation mode is a ready-to-win state (whether it is a long-time variation mode or a short-time variation mode) at the time of winning, and an accurate variation time (variation mode) is determined by information such as the number of held balls at the start of variation.

Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation of a big win because the rearrangement is included in the suspended long-time variation mode (variation mode for reach), although it may not be the correct variation start order.

In the present embodiment, the sortable period is determined by the game state, but not limited to this, it may be configured to determine whether the sorting is possible (for example, the state in which the reserved symbol display is displayed) and notify that the sorting is possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to flexibly set the period in which the rearrangement is possible, and it is possible to give the player more opportunities to rearrange.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 explained the case of selecting the special winning variation pattern table or the special outlier variation pattern table according to the game state based on the judgment result of the big hit, and selecting various variation patterns.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number or more (three or more in this embodiment), and the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol by a predetermined number or more (two or more in this embodiment). If there is a large number of fluctuation patterns, a short-time fluctuation pattern configured with a shorter fluctuation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) than the other fluctuation patterns is selected. As for the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, similarly to the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the difference between the number of retained balls of the second special symbol and the number of retained balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is larger than a predetermined number or more, and the variation pattern of the short-time deviation is selected.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol respectively, it is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it judges the state of each other's held balls and selects a special variation pattern (in this embodiment, a variation pattern that is short-time off).

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 41 is a diagram schematically showing an adjustment special failure variation pattern table 202e in the special failure variation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The special out-of-adjustment variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table selected in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

This adjustment special outlier variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown), which will be described later. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of a special pattern for selecting a variation pattern is 3 or more, and the difference from the number of reserved balls of the other special pattern (second special pattern in the case of the first special pattern) is 2 or more, this special deviation fluctuation pattern table for adjustment is selected. The adjustment special failure variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table that is selected only when the result of the judgment is failure, and consists of only one type with a variation time of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, regardless of the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter CS3, a variation pattern outside the short time period (variation time of 0.5 seconds) is selected.

In this way, by selecting a variation pattern that is off for a short period of time, the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, and the difference from the reserved balls of the other special symbol is 2 or more, and even if the number of reserved balls is not equal to each other, it is possible to speed up the digestion of the larger reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be evenly reserved, and only the other one reaches the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), preventing an overflow from occurring. I can.

Also, by judging whether or not there are three or more reserved balls of a special pattern for selecting a variation pattern, it is possible to prevent frequent selection of a short-time-out variation pattern in a state where the number of reserved balls is small, and spoil the performance of the game (interest due to the variation of the special symbols).

In the present embodiment, the adjustment special outlier variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) has only one type of short-time variation pattern (variation time of 0.5 seconds), but is not limited to this. With this configuration, when the other special symbol is fluctuating, the number of reserved balls can be made more uniform by changing the type (fluctuation time) of the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern to be selected according to the remaining fluctuation time. Also, the fluctuation time of the reserved ball of the other special symbol may be predicted to change the fluctuation pattern of short-time deviation to be selected. By doing so, even if a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (for example, a variation pattern of super reach C) is selected among the reserved balls of the special pattern with fewer reserved balls, by selecting a variation pattern out of a short time corresponding thereto, the reserved balls of the special patterns can be adjusted to be more equal.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern for adjustment is determined by discriminating the difference between the held balls. However, the configuration is not limited to this. Instead of discriminating the difference between the held balls, the variation patterns selected by the special symbols of each other may be discriminated, and a variation pattern that reduces the difference in the variation time may be selected. Specifically, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation pattern selected by the second special symbol is discriminated, and if a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (variation time in accordance with the end of variation of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, etc.) may be determined so that the digestion speeds of the held balls are the same.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust the numbers of held balls to be equal to each other without determining extremely short or long variation patterns.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution winning device 630 assists the game balls to easily enter the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 64b alternately. Therefore, the digestion speed of the reserved balls differs depending on the difference in the selected variation pattern (variation time) between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the number of the retained balls may be biased between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the game balls may not be alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution device 630, resulting in bias. However, when bias occurs, if there is a difference of 2 or more in the number of reserved balls in the three states before the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit (4 in this embodiment), a short-time off variation pattern is selected, so the player can continue the game without worrying about overflow occurring with the reserved balls of one of the special symbols.

With reference to FIG. 42, in the second embodiment, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 18, S310) in place of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is executed.

43, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S320), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S320). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, when the result of the determination is out, it is a process for selecting a short-time out variation pattern according to the number of held balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S511). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S511: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S512). When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(c)) is determined by the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S513). The jackpot type table 202b (Fig. 8(c)) is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, and in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot and a 15R normal jackpot, the 15R jackpot table is determined, and in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R jackpot table is determined.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is off (S511: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 or more (S514). The number of the first special symbol reserved balls is determined based on the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three or more (S514: Yes), it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) (S515). Here, it is judged by the value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more (S515: Yes), the adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than 3 (S514: No), and if the result of subtracting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is determined to be less than 2 (S515: No), a special outlier variation pattern table 202e corresponding to the game state is set. When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. Also, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

The variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c (S518). A variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and a first variation pattern command is generated (S519). Here, the first variation pattern command is a command for notifying the selected first special symbol variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 . A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S520). After that, the start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S521).

In this way, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three or more, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the adjustment special omission fluctuation pattern table 202e (Fig. 41) is set, and a short-time omission fluctuation pattern is selected, whereby the fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed in 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started for the next reserved ball of the first special symbol. Retained spheres are digested. Therefore, one reserved ball of the first special pattern is digested after 0.5 seconds, and the speed of digestion of the reserved ball of the first special pattern is increased, and the difference between the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be adjusted to be small.

In addition, when a large number of game balls enter the first starting port 63a in a short period of time and the difference between the reserved balls becomes large, or when a relatively long variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern of Super Reach C) is selected in the first special pattern, while a relatively short variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern of the normal deviation A) is continuously selected in the second special symbol, When the difference in the reserved balls becomes large (for example, there are four reserved balls in the first special pattern and one reserved ball in the second special pattern). Each time the first special pattern starts to fluctuate, the state of the reserved ball is determined and a process of whether or not to select a short-time off variation pattern is performed, so that the first special pattern continuously selects a short-time off variation pattern, and can quickly adjust to reduce the difference of the reserved balls. Therefore, in the first special symbol, the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment) is reached, and in the second special symbol, the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment) is smaller than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (for example, 1), and when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are also to be reserved up to the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment), the game balls are alternately distributed by the distribution winning device 630, so that the game balls enter the first winning hole 63a, resulting in an overflow. can be prevented.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is three or more, by discriminating the difference between the reserved balls, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game because the short-time off variation pattern is not selected and the short-time off variation pattern is frequently selected until the number of the reserved balls of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit (four in this embodiment) by one. In addition, by selecting the fluctuation pattern of short-time loss, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the result of the lottery is a loss before stopping the special symbols and not having a sense of expectation for the big win.

Further, by selecting a relatively long variation pattern (super reach C variation pattern, etc.), even if a difference in held balls occurs, by selecting a short-time deviation variation pattern, adjustment can be made to reduce the difference in held balls. Therefore, overflow can be reduced, and many variation patterns with a relatively long variation time (variation patterns of super reach C, etc.) can be selected to entertain the player with the performance by variation of the special pattern and to prevent boredom with the game. Therefore, it is possible to perform a variety of performances, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the selection of the variation pattern can be restricted (for example, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern such as super reach C is extremely reduced).

Also, in the pachinko machine 10, the prize distribution device 630 alternately distributes to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Therefore, when the difference between the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is one, it is determined whether the difference between the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the reserved balls of the second special pattern is two or more so as not to select a short-time deviation variation pattern. Therefore, even when the prizes are evenly distributed by the distribution winning device 630, it is possible to prevent the frequent selection of short-time deviation fluctuation patterns.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is a hit, it is configured so as not to select the variation pattern for adjustment. By configuring in this manner, a variation pattern indicating a normal win can be selected as the variation pattern that will result in a win, and an effect of the variation pattern that will sufficiently win the player can be performed. Also, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a win, a big win game is started after the fluctuation is stopped, so there is no need to deal with troubles such as overflow even if the fluctuation pattern for adjustment is not selected.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 or more, but it is not limited to this, and may be set to 2 or more, or any other number as appropriate. In addition, without determining the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the difference in the number of reserved balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be directly determined.

Also, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more, but the number may be three or more, or any other number may be set as appropriate.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is used as the variation pattern that is out of a short time. However, it is not limited to this, and a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times, for example, different by 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided and selected. The selection may be made based on the counter value as in the selection of other variation patterns, or may be selected based on the state of the held balls of the second special symbol (the number of held balls, the difference between the held balls, the variation time determined in advance for the held ones, etc.), or, if the second special symbol is fluctuating, the selection may be made based on the remaining time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference between the second special symbol and the reserved ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of the short-time off variation pattern, to allow the player to play the game with the performance of the normal variation pattern, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal time is selected, but a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of out of normal A) may be selected from the normal fluctuation pattern table. By configuring in this way, the player can vary the special symbols in a variation pattern that is not normal, and it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity when the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

As for the second special symbol, similarly to the first special symbol, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, in each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), the first is changed to the second, and the second is changed to the first, and the detailed description and the effect are the same, so the description and illustration are omitted.

In the present embodiment, when the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (two or more in the present embodiment), a variation pattern that is out for a short time is selected. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the variation pattern selected by the reserved balls of the second special symbol is a relatively short variation pattern, a shorter variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 0.5 seconds) is selected, and if the variation pattern is relatively long, a variation pattern shorter than the variation pattern and capable of adjusting the difference of the retained balls may be selected.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust the difference between the held balls while performing a more natural fluctuation of the special symbols. Therefore, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a special loss variation pattern table for adjustment, a variation pattern table dedicated to short-time failures is provided, but it is not limited to that, in normal variation patterns (both hits and misses), a variation pattern for adjustment (for example, a short time variation of 0.5 seconds) is set at the top address, and a variation pattern for adjustment is selected by selecting the top address based on the difference between the held balls.

In this embodiment, the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution device 630 has been described, but even in a configuration in which the game balls are randomly won in the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b without the distribution device 630, the difference in the reserved balls can be adjusted to be equal with the configuration of the present embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, when there is a difference of a predetermined number or more in the state of the held balls, a variation pattern that is short-time out is selected and the difference is adjusted to be small.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, under the same reserved ball conditions as in the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with fewer reserved balls is selected, and the fluctuation pattern with the time until the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball with more reserved balls that starts to fluctuate first stops fluctuating is selected as the fluctuation time.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. The third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in that the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 adjusts the fluctuation time of the special symbol with fewer reserved balls to reduce the difference between the reserved balls.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Elements that are the same as in the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 44, in the third embodiment, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 44, S203) of the third embodiment is the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is replaced with the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (FIG. 45, S330). The processes of S301 to S309 in the third embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is executed.

45, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S330), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S330). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, when the success/failure determination result is out, when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is smaller than the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern by a predetermined number or more, this is a process for selecting a variation pattern for adjusting the difference.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), each process from S534 to S536 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment, and other processes are the same, so only the changed points will be described in detail.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S531: No), it is determined whether the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 3 or more (S534). The number of second special symbol reserved balls is determined based on the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is three or more (S534: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is two or more (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol by two or more) (S535). Here, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used for determination.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol by two or more (S535: Yes), a special deviation variation pattern command for first adjustment is set, based on the rearrangement retention storage area 203u, with the time until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the first retention of the second special symbol (the retention area with the earliest variation order among the retention areas of the second special symbols) ends from the present time, as the variation time.

Here, the value of the second variation time storage area 203t and the value of the variation time indicated by the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reservation area with the earliest variation order among the reservation areas of the second special symbol in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u are added to calculate the variation time. It should be noted that when the first adjustment special non-existent fluctuation pattern is selected, the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the process of S539 is skipped, and the next process of S540 is executed.

In this way, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, when the number of held balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (three or more in this embodiment) and the difference between the held balls is two or more (the number of held balls of the first special symbol is smaller), the variation pattern composed of the variation time until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the holding with the earliest variation order ends among the held balls of the second special symbol is selected. Therefore, since one reserved ball of the second special pattern is digested and the second special pattern reserved ball is not digested until the second one is about to be digested, the digestion speed of the first special pattern reserved ball is slowed down, and the difference between the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be adjusted to be small.

Further, by discriminating whether or not there are three or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, frequent selection of a variation pattern for adjustment and impairing the performance of the game can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is a hit, it is configured so as not to select the variation pattern for adjustment. By configuring in this manner, a variation pattern indicating a normal win can be selected as the variation pattern that will result in a win, and an effect of the variation pattern that will sufficiently win the player can be performed. Also, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a win, a big win game is started after the fluctuation is stopped, so there is no need to deal with troubles such as overflow even if the fluctuation pattern for adjustment is not selected.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 or more. Also, without determining the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, it is of course possible to directly determine the difference in the number of reserved balls between the second special symbol and the first special symbol.

Also, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time until the variation of the first reserved special symbol is completed is selected, but the variation time may be longer than the remaining variation time of the second special symbol during variation. Alternatively, a variation time longer than the variation time of the special symbol reserved first may be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time until the variation of the first reserved special symbol is completed is selected, but a variation pattern with a variation time close to or longer than the variation time may be selected from the normal variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)). By configuring in this way, the player can vary the special symbols in a variation pattern that is not normal, and it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity when the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

Also, the configurations of the second embodiment and the third embodiment may be combined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference between the reserved balls at the timing when both special symbols fluctuate, and it is possible to respond more quickly.

As for the second special symbol, similarly to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, in each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), the first is only changed to the second, and the second is changed to the first, and the detailed description and effects are the same, so the description and illustration are omitted.

Also, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more, but the number may be three or more, or any other number may be set as appropriate.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is used as the variation pattern that is out of a short time. However, it is not limited to this, and a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times, for example, different by 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) may be provided and selected. The selection may be made based on the counter value as in the selection of other variation patterns, or may be selected based on the state of the held balls of the second special symbol (the number of held balls, the difference between the held balls, the variation time determined in advance for the held ones, etc.), or, if the second special symbol is fluctuating, the selection may be made based on the remaining time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference between the second special symbol and the reserved ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of the short-time off variation pattern, to allow the player to play the game with the performance of the normal variation pattern, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal time is selected, but a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of out of normal A) may be selected from the normal fluctuation pattern table. By configuring in this way, the player can vary the special symbols in a variation pattern that is not normal, and it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity when the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

In this embodiment, the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution device 630 has been described, but even in a configuration in which the game balls are randomly won in the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b without the distribution device 630, the difference in the reserved balls can be adjusted to be equal with the configuration of the present embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, when there is a difference of a predetermined number or more in the state of the held balls, a variation pattern that is short-time out is selected and the difference is adjusted to be small.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game balls have successively entered either the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, and if the game balls have successively won, the variation pattern of the special symbols corresponding to the successive wins is selected to be out of the short-time variation pattern, and the difference of the reserved balls is adjusted to be small.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. The second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in that a short-time off variation pattern is selected on the basis of successive winning of game balls in one of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Elements that are the same as in the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment.

The first winning flag 203v1 is a flag indicating that the game ball has won the first starting port 63a. Specifically, the first winning flag 203v1 is a flag that is set to ON when a game ball wins the first starting port 63a and the first winning flag 203v1 is OFF in the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), which will be described later. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 63b, it is set to OFF.

The second winning flag 203v2 is the same as the first winning flag 203v1 except for the second starting port 63b, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

By configuring in this way, the distribution winning device 630 is not alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, for example, when the game ball wins continuously in the first start port 63a, when the game ball wins in the first start port 63a for the second time, the first prize flag 203v1 is already set to ON, and it can be determined whether or not the first start port 63a has won continuously. is configured as

The first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is a flag indicating that the game balls have won consecutively in the first starting port 63a. Specifically, in the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) to be described later, when the game ball has won the first starting port 63a, the first winning flag 203v1 is already set to ON, it is a flag that is set to ON. On the other hand, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), which will be described later, when the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set in the process of S526, it is set to OFF.

The second consecutive winning flag 203v4 is the same as the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 except for the second starting port 63b, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b has been continuously won. Therefore, by selecting a variation pattern for adjustment based on the fact that the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 or the second winning flag 203v4 is set to ON, it is possible to easily reduce the difference between the balls held between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

With reference to FIG. 47, timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process of the fourth embodiment, a part of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) is changed from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the second embodiment, and the start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) is added instead of the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108).

With reference to FIG. 48, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 48, S203) of the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment, with the addition of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 (FIG. 49, S340) instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 2 (FIG. 43, S320). The processes of S301 to S309 in the fourth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 49, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S340), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S340). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, when the success/failure determination result is out, it is determined whether the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is ON (that is, whether the game ball has continuously won in the first starting port 63a), and if it is ON, this is a process for selecting a short-time out variation pattern to adjust the difference.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), each process from S554 to S556 is changed with respect to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment, and the other processes are the same, so only the changed points will be described in detail.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), when it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is off (S551: No), it is determined whether the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is on (that is, whether the game balls have won consecutively in the first starting port 63a) (S554). When it is determined that the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is ON (S554: Yes), the adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is set OFF (S556).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is off (S554: No), it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more) (S555). Here, it is judged by the value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more (S555: Yes), the process of S556 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of subtracting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than 2 (S555: No), a special outlier variation pattern table 202e corresponding to the game state is set. When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. Also, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

By configuring in this way, when the prize is not alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distributing prize winning device 630 and the prize is continuously won to one of them, a short-time deviation variation pattern is selected. Therefore, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference in the retained balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, even when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is off, it is determined whether the difference between the reserved ball of the first special pattern and the reserved ball of the second special pattern is equal to or larger than a prescribed number (the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is two or more) or not, and when the difference is equal to or larger than the prescribed number, a short-time off variation pattern is selected. As a result, in the distribution winning device 630, even if the difference in the number of reserved balls (for example, two or more) occurs due to the difference in the variation pattern (variation time) selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the balls are alternately distributed, the difference in the number of retained balls can be adjusted to be small by selecting the short-time off variation pattern.

In the present embodiment, when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is off, the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game because the short-time off variation pattern is frequently selected and the player cannot fully enjoy the performance due to the variation of the special symbol. In addition, by selecting the fluctuation pattern of short-time loss, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the result of the lottery is a loss before stopping the special symbols and not having a sense of expectation for the big win.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is ON, the adjustment special loss variation pattern table 202e (Fig. 41) is set. However, if the first consecutive winning flag 203v is ON, the process of S555 is executed, and when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more, the special loss variation pattern table for adjustment 202e (Fig. 41) is set. may be configured to be set. By constructing in this way, even when the first starting port 63a is continuously won, if the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the normal variation pattern can be selected, and the frequent selection of the short-time off variation pattern can be suppressed.

As for the second special symbol, similarly to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, in each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), the first is only changed to the second, and the second is changed to the first, and the detailed description and effects are the same, so the description and illustration are omitted.

Referring to FIG. 50, start winning process 2 (S120), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120). The starting winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) of the fourth embodiment is the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the second embodiment, with the addition of the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S906) and the second continuous winning determination process (S980). The processes from S901 to S914 in the fourth embodiment are the same as the processes from S901 to S914 in the second embodiment. In the process of S901, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 63a (S901: Yes), the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) is executed.

In the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), first, it is determined whether the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON (that is, after the game ball has won the first starting port 63a last time) (S961). When it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is ON, the first continuous winning flag 203v3 is set to ON (S962). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is off (that is, the game ball won the second starting port 63b last time) (S961: No), the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON (S963). After that, the second winning flag 203v2 is set to OFF (S964).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the game balls have successively entered the first start port 63a without alternately entering the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

In the present embodiment, when the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is ON, the variation pattern for a short time is selected. However, it is determined whether the second consecutive winning flag 203v4 is ON, and if it is ON, the variation pattern configured by the variation time until the special symbol for the one with the earliest variation start order among the holding of the second special symbols stops varying may be selected as in the third embodiment. By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference in the retained balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As for the second consecutive winning determination process (S907), the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) is changed from the first to the second, and the second to the first, so detailed illustration and description are omitted.

In the present embodiment, the first winning flag 203v1 and the second winning flag 203v2 are respectively provided, but only one of them may be provided so that determination can be made depending on whether it is on or off. Specifically, in the case where only the first winning flag 203v1 is configured, when the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON, the first start opening 63a is won, and when the first winning flag 203v1 is set to OFF, it is determined that the second start opening 63b is won. By configuring in this manner, the number of flags and the like can be reduced, and the required capacity of the RAM can be reduced. The same applies to the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 and the second consecutive winning flag 203v4.

In the present embodiment, when two consecutive winnings are made in one starting hole, the adjustment variation pattern is determined to adjust the difference in the number of held balls. However, the variation pattern for adjustment may be determined when the variation of the special symbol is completed two or more times in a row between the start and end of one special symbol variation by the other special symbol. Further, by combining the consecutive wins and the consecutive fluctuations, it is possible to adjust the difference of the reserved balls to be more uniform.

In this embodiment, the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution device 630 has been described, but even in a configuration in which the game balls are randomly won in the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b without the distribution device 630, the difference in the reserved balls can be adjusted to be equal with the configuration of the present embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the pending symbols displayed in the lower display area Ds are displayed in the pending number display update process (FIG. 37, S1406) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The frame button 22 is operated, and the pending symbol display corresponding to the pending area in which the sort flag 223k7 is turned on is rearranged and displayed in the order in which the fluctuation starts.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, in the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the pending pattern display corresponding to the pending area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is sorted in the order of starting the fluctuation, and the pending pattern display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the pending area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is set to the background (holding figure The background on which the pattern display is displayed is displayed blinking (flash display).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. The fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the background screen of the pending symbol display area (any one of Ds1 to Ds8) displaying the sorted pending symbol display (the pending display corresponding to the pending area where the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON) indicates that the sorting has been completed.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a display from before rearrangement to after rearrangement of the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. Before rearrangement, a reserved display pattern corresponding to the order in which the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b were won in the lower display area Ds (“O” if the reserved pattern display is based on winning the first starting port 63a, and “●” if the pending symbol display is based on winning the second starting port 63b). In this embodiment, the allocation winning device 630 alternately distributes the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, so the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is likely to be displayed alternately.

After that, when the player operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display is rearranged, and the reserved symbol display is rearranged in the order of starting the variation. Then, the background is flashed (indicated by hatching in FIG. 52) with respect to the reserved symbol display displayed at that time (in FIG. 52, the reserved symbol display displayed in Ds1 to Ds5). After that, with respect to the reserved pattern display for the game ball newly winning the first starting hole 63a or the second starting hole 63b, the reserved pattern display is displayed in the winning order (the order in which the winning is established), and the reserved pattern display area (Ds6 to Ds7 in FIG. 52) is displayed with a normal background pattern (for example, blue background color) without blinking display.

In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, the background of the reserved pattern display area is blinked for the displayed reserved pattern display, so that the player can easily recognize the rearranged reserved pattern display. Therefore, regarding the order in which the reserved symbol displays are displayed, it can be easily identified whether it is the order of winning or the order of starting variation. Therefore, player confusion can be suppressed.

In addition, with respect to the reserved pattern display winning after the rearrangement is executed, the reserved pattern display is displayed in the winning order, and the background of the reserved pattern display area remains the normal background, so that the player can easily identify that the displayed reserved pattern display is before the rearrangement. Furthermore, since the background display is maintained in a flickering state for the rearranged reserved pattern display, the player can recognize the reserved pattern display before rearrangement and after rearrangement at once.

Also, when the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern display starts to fluctuate, the reserved pattern display is erased (digested), and the displayed reserved pattern displays are shifted one by one to the reserved pattern display area on the right side and displayed, but since the blinking display of the background is also shifted and displayed accordingly, even if the reserved pattern display is digested, the player can easily identify the rearranged reserved pattern display.

In the present embodiment, the background is displayed blinking as a notification mode indicating the reserved design display that has been rearranged. However, the background color is not limited to this, and the background color may be changed (for example, blue is usually changed to red when rearrangement is performed). Furthermore, it may be configured to notify by voice, text, etc. (for example, display voice or text saying "up to the third reserved pattern has been rearranged").

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 53, S1400). In the main process (FIG. 53, S1400) of the fifth embodiment, in place of the pending number display update process (FIG. 37, S1406), pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) and pending sorting process (FIG. 40, S1413), pending sorting process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) are added to the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. The processes of S1401 to S1405 in the fifth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1405 is completed, the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 54, pending number display update process 2 (S1440), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 53, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process 2 (S1440). The pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is a process for setting a command for displaying the pending symbol display in the pending symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds.

In the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each pending area of the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k is updated (S1441). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the updating of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may of course be performed by other methods.

The reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is turned on is displayed in the variable display start order, and the reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned off is displayed in the order of establishment of reservation (S1442).

The background of the reserved design display area in which the reserved design display corresponding to the reserved area of the secondary sorting reserved storage area 223k with the sorting flag 223k7 set to ON is displayed blinking (flash), and the background of the reserved design display area in which the reserved design display corresponding to the reserved area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to OFF is displayed on the display control device 114 with a normal background (for example, blue in this embodiment) is generated (S1443). ).

In this way, by flashing the background of the reserved pattern display area where the reserved pattern display of the reserved area where the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed, it is possible to inform the player that the reserved pattern display has been rearranged. Therefore, the player can recognize that the displayed pending symbol display is displayed in the order of starting the fluctuation by the notification mode.

In addition, the background of the reserved pattern display area displaying the reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area in which the sort flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed blinking, and the background of the reserved pattern display area in which the reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area in which the sort flag 223k7 is set to OFF (that is, the reservation established after the sorting is executed) is displayed in the normal background, so that the player can see the reserved pattern display in which the sorting is executed and the sorting which is not executed. It is possible to easily recognize the reserved symbol display of.

In addition, since a new background display change command is generated each time this pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed, even when a new pending occurs or a special symbol corresponding to the pending symbol display starts to change and the pending is terminated, the pending symbol display and the blinking display indicating that the rearrangement has been executed can be appropriately updated according to the state.

In addition, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON in all the reservation areas in which the reservation data are stored when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed in this embodiment) during the rearrangement possible period in the reservation rearrangement process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later. As a result, all of the displayed pending symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending establishment order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, the newly stored reservation is displayed at the end of the reserved pattern display displayed on the third pattern display device 81, that is, in the order established without being rearranged because the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF.

Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the reserved pattern display, the reserved pattern display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order, and after that, the rearranged reserved pattern display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the reserved pattern display corresponding to the newly stored (occurring) hold is displayed at the end in the established order without interrupting the previously displayed reserved pattern display. , the player can suppress the problem of confusion about the order in which the current displays are displayed.

By rearranging only the reserved pattern displays displayed when the frame button 22 is operated in this way, the variable display start order can be notified only when the player wants to know.

Also, usually, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose establishment order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose establishment order is earlier (on the reserved pattern display area Ds1 side). Therefore, when the reserved pattern display is rearranged by operating the frame button 22, when the reserved pattern whose establishment order is late is interrupted and displayed before the reserved pattern whose establishment order is early, the player can expect that the reserved pattern which is displayed before the interrupted reserved pattern and is caused by winning the start port 63a, 63b different from the interrupted reserved pattern is a big win.

Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, he/she can operate the frame button 22 expecting that the arrangement order will be changed, thinking that the reserved pattern display may have a reservation that will result in a big win, and can operate the frame button 22 with a feeling of expectation for a big win. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, a sound is output, so that the expectation for the big win can be amplified and produced.

Returning to the main processing (FIG. 53, S1400), the description continues. The processes of S1407 to S1412 in the fifth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1407 to S1412 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1412 is completed, pending rearrangement processing 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 55, pending rearrangement process 2 (S1450), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 53, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this reservation sorting process 2 (S1450). Suspended sorting process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is a process for setting a sorting notification sound command for notifying that sorting has been executed (performed) when the frame button 22 is operated when the sorting possible period of the pending symbol display is set, and for setting the sorting flag 223k7 of the slave sorting pending storage area 223k to ON.

In the pending rearrangement process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450), first, it is determined whether or not it is a rearrangeable period (S1451). In the rearrangement possible period, a game state other than a jackpot game or a state of no reservation established at different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which one or more first special symbols and second special symbols are not reserved) is set in the rearrangement possible period.

If it is determined that it is the sortable period (S1451: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1452). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third pattern display device 81 displays the characters ``Perhaps rearrangement is possible!'' to inform the player of the period during which the frame button 22 can be operated. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may naturally be configured to control so as to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing a rearrangement possible period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and can operate the frame switch 22 at an appropriate timing. In addition, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and when the frame button 22 is operated, if the rearrangement is possible, the rearrangement display may be performed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1453). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1453: Yes), a rearrangement notification sound command is set (S1454). The rearrangement notification sound command causes the voice output device 226 to output a notification sound indicating that the rearrangement is (has been) executed (in this embodiment, a voice saying "reorder").

In addition, in the present embodiment, voice is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a specific sound effect (for example, fanfare music, etc.) is output. The output time may be appropriately set in accordance with the effect, and may be configured so that a dedicated melody or sound effect is output all the time while the rearranged reserved pattern display is being displayed. With this configuration, the player can be strongly aware that the rearrangement has been executed, and can easily understand that the reserved symbol display is rearranged.

The rearrangement flags 223k7 of all the reserved areas in which the reserved data of the secondary rearranged reserved storage area 223k are stored are set to ON (S1455).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the sortable period (S1451: No) and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1453: No), this process is terminated. With this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be rearranged.

The player can know the actual order of starting the variable display, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (special symbol to start the variable display). Therefore, the game can be played while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

Further, in the configuration of this pachinko machine, since the game ball is easily won by alternating the first start port 63a and the second start port 64a by the distribution device 630, the first special pattern and the second special pattern are equally played and the game can be played efficiently.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the rearrangement of the reserved symbols is not limited to the configuration for executing the rearrangement based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, but it may naturally be constituted so as to be executed each time a new reserved pattern is stored. With this configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order from the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangement possible period is a game state other than during the jackpot game or a state without holding established at different start ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more first special symbols and second special symbols).

In addition, when the jackpot game is set as the rearrangement possible period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped fluctuation display during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the reserved first special pattern or the second special pattern and the remaining fluctuation time during the temporary stop, the rearrangement order is determined, and rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. By constructing in this way, even if a new reserved display mode is displayed during a jackpot game, the reserved display mode and the display mode already displayed before the reserved display mode are displayed are combined, rearranged in an accurate variation start order, and the correct variation start order can be notified to the player even in the jackpot game machine.

Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the reserved pattern display area is displayed blinking for all the reserved pattern displays displayed in the reserved pattern display area.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the rearrangement is executed, and the background of the pending symbol display area is displayed blinking only for the pending symbol display of the fluctuation start order which is different from the establishment order.

That is, the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in the following points. The modified example of the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that a background display change command for blinking the background is generated for the reserved pattern display area in which the reserved pattern display of the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON in the reserved number display update process 2 (FIG. 57, S1440) with the change start order different from the winning order is displayed.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the fifth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before rearrangement and after rearrangement in the modification of the fifth embodiment. Before rearrangement, the reserved design display of the first special design (“○” in this embodiment) and the reserved design display of the second special design (“●” in this embodiment) are displayed in order of formation. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to execute the rearrangement, the reserved pattern display '○' of the first special pattern displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds3 and the reserved pattern display '●' of the second special pattern displayed in the reserved pattern display area Ds4 are rearranged, and the background thereof is displayed blinking to form a display mode (notification mode) indicating the rearrangement.

Generally, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose establishment order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose establishment order is earlier (on the reserved pattern display area Ds1 side).

Here, the background blinks only for the reserved symbol display whose display order is changed by executing rearrangement, with the establishment order and the variation start order being different. Therefore, when the reserved pattern display is rearranged by operating the frame button 22, the player can easily recognize the reserved pattern display whose order is changed and displayed by interrupting the reserved pattern whose establishment order is late before the reserved pattern whose establishment order is early. Therefore, among the reserved patterns displayed before the interrupted reserved pattern, it is possible to expect that the reserved pattern caused by the prize winning to the starting ports 63a, 63b different from the interrupted reserved pattern is a big win.

In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, he/she can operate the frame button 22 expecting that the arrangement order will be changed, thinking that there may be a big hit pending in the reserved pattern display, and can operate the frame button 22 with a feeling of expectation for the big win.

In addition, in order to indicate that the rearrangement is performed, when the display order of the reserved pattern display is changed, the background may be blinked, and further, the reserved pattern display which was displayed when the rearrangement was performed may be displayed in a special color (for example, red) so that the rearranged reserved pattern display may be identified. With such a configuration, the player can identify both the pending symbol display displayed when the rearrangement is executed and the pending symbol display the display order of which is changed by the rearrangement. Therefore, player confusion can be further suppressed.

With reference to FIG. 57, pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 57, S1440), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 53, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fifth embodiment, will be described.

The processing from S1441 to S1442 in the modified example of the fifth embodiment is the same as the processing from S1441 to S1442 in the fifth embodiment. In the modification of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1442 is executed, it is determined whether there is a reserved area in which the winning order and the fluctuation start order are different from among the reserved areas of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k for which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON (S1445). Here, the reservation area and the variable start order storage area 223k4 are discriminated to determine whether the order is different. Specifically, if the variation start order stored in the variation start order storage area 223k4 in the reservation area 2 is the third, the variation start order is the third although the winning order is the second, and it is determined that the order is different.

When it is determined that there is a reservation area in which the order of winning and the order of starting variation are different among the reserved areas of the secondary sorting reserved storage area 223k in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON (S1445: Yes), the background of the reserved design display area in which the reserved design display corresponding to the reserved area determined to be different in the order of winning and the order of starting variation among the reserved areas in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed blinking (changed). A command is generated (S1446).

In this way, when the rearrangement is executed, the background of the displayed reserved pattern display and the reserved pattern display whose display order is changed is displayed blinking, so that the player can identify the reserved pattern whose order is changed.

The notification mode for notifying the reserved pattern display whose display order is changed is not limited to blinking display, but may be indicated by character display, may be notified by voice, may be another display mode other than blinking display, and may be displayed in a special color or pattern.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the reserved pattern display area is displayed blinking for all the reserved pattern displays displayed in the reserved pattern display area.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the lower display area Ds is provided with a pre-sorting pending display area Dsa in which the pending symbol display is displayed in the winning order before sorting and a post-sorting pending display area Dsb in which the pending symbol display is displayed in the order in which the variation after sorting is started. Until the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved pattern display is displayed only in the reserved display area before rearrangement Dsa in order of prize winning, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved pattern display displayed at that time is displayed in the reserved display area after rearrangement Dsb in the order of starting variation.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in the following points. The sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in that the pending symbol display is displayed in the winning order and, apart from that, the pending symbol display is displayed in the order of starting variation.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the fifth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing pending symbol displays displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before sorting (unperformed sorting) and after sorting (performed sorting) in the sixth embodiment. Before sorting, the reserved design display area (Ds1 to Ds5) of the pre-sorting reserved display area Dsa holds the first special design ("○" in this embodiment) and holds the second special design ("●" in this embodiment). At this time, the reserved design display is not displayed in the rearranged reserved display area Dsb.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to execute the rearrangement, the reserved pattern displays are displayed in the winning order in the reserved display area Dsa before the rearrangement, and the reserved pattern displays displayed in the reserved display area Dsa before the rearrangement are displayed in the reserved display area Dsb after the rearrangement in the order of starting to change.

Thus, when rearrangement is executed, the reserved pattern display before rearrangement and after rearrangement are vertically displayed in parallel, so that the player can recognize how the rearrangement is performed by comparing the reserved pattern display in the reserved display area before rearrangement Dsa with the reserved pattern display in the reserved display area after rearrangement Dsb. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize the pending symbol display whose order is different from the winning order in the order of starting the variation.

Generally, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose establishment order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose establishment order is earlier (on the reserved pattern display area Ds1 side).

Here, the reserved pattern display whose establishment order and variation start order are different and whose display order is changed by executing the rearrangement can be easily recognized by comparing the reserved display area before rearrangement Dsa and the reserved display area after rearrangement Dsb. Therefore, when the reserved pattern display is rearranged by operating the frame button 22, the player can easily recognize the reserved pattern display whose order is changed and displayed by interrupting the reserved pattern whose establishment order is late before the reserved pattern whose establishment order is early. Therefore, among the reserved patterns displayed before the interrupted reserved pattern, it is possible to expect that the reserved pattern caused by the prize winning to the starting ports 63a, 63b different from the interrupted reserved pattern is a big win.

In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, he/she can operate the frame button 22 expecting that the arrangement order will be changed, thinking that there may be a big hit pending in the reserved pattern display, and can operate the frame button 22 with a feeling of expectation for the big win.

In the present embodiment, the reserved pattern display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated is displayed in the order of starting fluctuation in the reserved pattern display after rearrangement Dsb, but not limited to this, the reserved patterns that are established thereafter may be displayed in the reserved drawing display region Dsb after rearrangement in order of winning.

In addition, regardless of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the reserved symbol display before rearrangement and after rearrangement may naturally be displayed at all times. With such a configuration, the player can always visually recognize the reserved pattern display displayed in the winning order and the order of starting the variation, so that the player can quickly recognize that there is the reserved pattern display whose variation is started in an order different from the winning order by rearrangement.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 59, S1400). In the main process (FIG. 59, S1400) of the sixth embodiment, holding number display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is added instead of holding number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) to the main process (FIG. 53, S1400) of the fifth embodiment. The processes of S1401 to S1405 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1405 is completed, the pending number display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 60, pending number display update process 3 (S1460), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 59, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process 3 (S1460). Reservation number display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is a reservation design display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the reservation display area before rearrangement Dsa and the reservation display area Dsb after rearrangement of the lower display area Ds. It is a process for setting a command for displaying the design display.

In the pending number display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each pending area of the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k is updated (S1461). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the updating of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may of course be performed by other methods.

It is determined whether or not the secondary rearrangement flag 223k7 of the reservation area 1 in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462). When it is determined that the secondary rearrangement flag 223k7 of the reservation area 1 in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462: Yes), a reservation display command for display is set to display the reservation pattern display of the reservation areas in which the rearrangement flag is set to ON in the order in which the fluctuation is started (S1463).

By controlling in this way, the reserved pattern display can be displayed in the reserved display area Dsb after rearrangement only for the reserved pattern display (the reserved area where the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON) when the rearrangement is executed.

A reservation display command for display is generated to display the reservations stored in the reservation area in the pre-arrangement reservation display area Dsa in order of winning (S1464). Thereby, the pending symbol display can always be displayed in the winning order in the pre-rearrangement pending display area Dsa. Further, when the rearrangement flag 223k7 is ON, the reserved symbol display can be displayed in the reserved display area after rearrangement Dsb and the reserved display area before rearrangement Dsa.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the secondary sorting flag 223k7 of the reserve area 1 in the sorting reserve storage area 223k is set to OFF (S1462: No), the process of S1464 is executed. Thus, when the rearrangement flag is turned off in the reservation area 1 (that is, all the reservation areas), reserved pattern display is displayed in the winning order only in the reservation display area before rearrangement Dsa, and the player can easily recognize that the rearrangement is not executed.

Further, in a state in which the rearrangement is not executed, the reserved pattern display is not displayed in the post-arrangement reserved display area Dsb until the player operates the frame button 22, so that when the player operates the frame button 22, the display change when the reserved pattern display is displayed in the post-arranged reserved display area Dsb is increased, and the player's willingness to execute the rearrangement can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the sorting flag 223k7 is determined only in the reservation area 1, but not limited to that, it may be determined about the sorting flag of all the reservation areas in which various data are stored, or it may be configured to determine whether any of them is on.

In the present embodiment, the post-rearrangement reserved display area Dsb is configured to be always displayed, but not limited to this, only the pre-rearrangement reserved display area Dsa is always displayed, and when the rearrangement is executed (when the player operates the frame switch 22), the post-rearrangement reserved display area Dsb is displayed, and when all the rearranged reserved symbol displays are digested (variation starts), it may be automatically hidden. In addition, when the rearrangement possible period comes, a character for notifying that the rearrangement is possible is displayed, but instead, when the rearrangement becomes possible, a rearrangement reservation display area Dsb (a state in which the reservation symbol display is not displayed) may be displayed to inform the player that the reservation symbol display can be rearranged. By constructing in this way, the reserved display area Dsb after rearrangement is not normally displayed, the space can be used as the upper display area Dm, and the variable display of the main pattern and the display of other performance patterns can be displayed in a large space. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the lottery that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case of setting the rearrangement possible period in a game state other than the jackpot game or the state of no hold established at different start ports 63a and 63b (the state in which one or more first special symbols and one or more second special symbols are not held) has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, it is set to be included in the rearrangement possible period even during the jackpot game.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot game starts, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 recalculates the time at which each hold variation starts after the jackpot game. The rearrangement data is output to the sound ramp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 sets the rearrangement possible period even during the jackpot game, and executes the rearrangement, which is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 61, the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103). The large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103) of the seventh embodiment not only controls the opening/closing of the first variable prize winning device 65, but also, when the jackpot game starts, it is a process for recalculating the time to start changing each hold starting after the jackpot, and generating rearrangement data in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the recalculated data.

In the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103), first, it is determined whether or not the big winning game is started (S131). Whether the start of the jackpot game is determined by whether the start of the jackpot is set in the processing of S608 in the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204) or the processing of S808 in the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207).

When it is determined that the jackpot game is started (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the value of the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5 of each reservation area stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is recalculated in consideration of the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol or second special symbol, starting after the big win (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the value of the variation start time storage area 203u5 of each reservation area stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is recalculated starting after the big win (S134).

Based on the variable start time recalculated in the process of S133 or S134 and stored in the variable start time storage area 203u5, a rearrangement data command is generated for each reservation area (S135).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being played (S136: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S137). When it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S137: Yes), a process of opening the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time to start a new round (S137: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is met (S140). When it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), the process of closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S142). If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S142: Yes), an ending command is set (generated) (S143).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is over (S144). When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S144: Yes), the jackpot game end is set (S145). It is determined whether or not it was a variable probability jackpot (S146). Whether or not it was a variable probability big win is determined whether the result of the lottery that triggered the execution of the big win game is a 15R variable probability big win or a 2R probability variable big win.

When it is determined that the probability variable jackpot was won (S146: Yes), the probability variable flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S144: No), or if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not set (S146: No), this process is terminated.

Thus, when the jackpot game starts, the fluctuation start time in each reservation area is updated after the jackpot game as a starting point. Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the jackpot game, by generating the rearrangement data command based on the updated variation start time, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can also update the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting the fluctuation after the jackpot game.

Further, it is possible to discriminate whether the first special pattern or the second special pattern is temporarily stopped and, if it is temporarily stopped, to calculate the fluctuation start time after the elapse of the remaining fluctuation time as a starting point for holding the special pattern, thereby calculating the more accurate fluctuation start time and generating the rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can rearrange the pending symbol display in a more accurate order of starting fluctuation based on the fluctuation start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 62, S1400). In the main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) of the seventh embodiment, command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is added instead of the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) to the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. The processing of S1401 to S1413 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the processing of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1413 is completed, command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed.

Command determination processing 2 (S1470), which is one processing of the main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 2 (S1470). Command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, and is processing for determining a command received from main controller 110.

In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) of the seventh embodiment, S1520 and S1521 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. The processing of S1501 to S1518 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the processing of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment. If it is determined in the process of S1517 that the first or second special symbol variation restart command has not been received (S1517: No), the process of S1520 is executed.

In the process of S1520, it is determined whether or not the rearrangement data command output by main controller 110 has been received. If it is determined that the rearrangement data command has been received (S1520: Yes), the data in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k is updated based on the received rearrangement data command. Here, the rearrangement data command is data indicating the recalculated fluctuation start time. Note that the rearrangement data command is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and may of course be generated based on each data in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement data command has not been received (S1520: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

In the present embodiment, although the description is omitted, when a game ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b during the jackpot game, the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 S923 or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) S942, the fluctuation start time is calculated with the start point after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, when the jackpot game is started, the fluctuation start time of each reservation is recalculated starting from the end of the jackpot game, output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a rearrangement data command, and the value of the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 of each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is also updated.

Also, even if a game ball wins in the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b during the jackpot game, the data indicating the fluctuation start time after the jackpot game ends is transmitted by the prize winning command, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can rearrange the newly reserved reserved pattern display in the order of the fluctuation start based on the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Therefore, even during a jackpot game that tends to be monotonous, the player can perform an operation to rearrange the reserved symbol displays and enjoy the game by rearranging the reserved symbol displays.

Generally, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose establishment order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose establishment order is earlier (on the reserved pattern display area Ds1 side).

Therefore, even during the big win, the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the display of the reserved patterns, so that among the reserved patterns displayed before the interrupted reserved pattern displayed, the player can expect that the reserved pattern generated by winning the start ports 63a, 63b different from the interrupted reserved pattern displayed may be a big win.

In this way, the player can operate the frame button 22 during the big win to increase the enjoyment during the big win game by operating the frame button 22 in anticipation of a change in the arrangement order to see if there is a big win in the reserved pattern display and if the big win can be obtained continuously.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 72. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, 907) or the second look-ahead processing (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is numbered in order of the fluctuation start time, and a winning command indicating the order is output to the sound lamp control device 113b, and arranged based on the order. The case where the replacement is executed has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 generates winning commands for various counter values obtained based on the winning without numbering in the order of fluctuation start in the first look-ahead process (907 in FIG. 25) or the second look-ahead process (S914 in FIG. 27) even if the game ball wins the first start hole 63a or the second start hole 63b. When receiving the winning command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 calculates the variation start time based on each counter value indicated by the winning command, assigns the variation start order, and rearranges the reserved pattern display in the order based on the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 performs rearrangement of the pending symbol display by calculating and assigning a variation start order based on the received winning command.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is a diagram schematically showing part of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. The ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is provided with a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a special hit variation pattern table 222c, and a special loss variation pattern table 222d. These tables are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the special loss fluctuation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is deleted. Illustration of this is omitted.

Thus, since each table is stored in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the same manner as the ROM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it will be described later, but before the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display starts to change, based on each counter value indicated by the winning command from the main control device 110, the big hit determination and the selection of the variation pattern can be performed in advance, the variation start time can be calculated, and the variation can be rearranged in the order in which the variation starts. The variable start order can be numbered based on the variable start time as follows. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 does not need to execute each control process for determining the fluctuation start order in advance, and the control load can be reduced.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65 . FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process of the eighth embodiment, starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) is added instead of starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 66, start winning process 3 (S150), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 65) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). The starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) of the eighth embodiment is the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment, in which the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) is replaced, the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) is added, the second look-ahead process (S914, FIG. 27) is added, and the second look-ahead process 2 (S1060) is added.

With reference to FIG. 67, the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), which is one process of the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050). The first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) of the eighth embodiment is a process for generating a winning command based on each counter value obtained based on the game ball entering the first starting hole in the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150).

In the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), first, in the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150), each counter value (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, variation pattern determination counter C4) newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is read out (S1051).

A winning command is generated based on each counter value (value read in S1051) newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S1052). This winning command indicates each counter value, and is a command by which the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the winning order based on this winning command.

As for the second prefetching process 2 (S1060), since the first prefetching process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) is only changed from the first to the second, illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 does not perform big hit determination, variation pattern selection, variation start time calculation, variation start order numbering, etc. based on the acquired counter value in the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), so the control load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, in this embodiment, the winning command is configured to be generated only for a newly established hold, but not limited to that, it may be configured to be generated again for all holds stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. By configuring in this way, the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 can update all the data in the secondary sorting reservation storage area 223k each time a game ball wins, and even when the data is destroyed by noise or the like, sorting processing can be performed by updating.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 68, S1400). In the main processing (FIG. 68, S1400) of the eighth embodiment, command determination processing 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) instead of command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) is added to the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment, and pending sorting processing 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) is added instead of pending sorting processing (FIG. 40, S1413).

Command determination process 3 (S1490), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 68, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 3 (S1490). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, the process of S1530 is added instead of the processes of S1513 and S1514 to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. As for other processing, the same processing as the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment is executed.

In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a winning command output from the main controller 110 has been received (S1512). When it is determined that a winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), each counter value (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, variation pattern determination counter C4) is extracted from the received winning command and stored in the other memory area 223m in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1530). Here, in the other memory area, the winning order indicated by the winning command (the winning order combining the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b) is stored so as to be identifiable for each counter value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), the process of S1517 is executed. Note that the subsequent processing has already been described in the first embodiment, and therefore will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, each counter value extracted from the winning command is stored in the other memory area 223m, but it is not limited to this, and may be stored in the corresponding reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223m. By configuring in this way, the winning order of each counter value can be determined by the reserved area, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced.

With reference to FIG. 70, pending sorting process 3 (S1480), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 68, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this reservation sorting process 3 (S1480). In the pending rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, S1811 and S1812 are added to the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment. As for other processing, the same processing as the reservation rearrangement processing ( FIG. 40 , S1413) of the first embodiment is executed.

In the pending rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480), first, in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490), the winning command is received, and each counter value is stored in the other memory area 223m (that is, it is determined whether the winning command has been received) (S1811). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1811: Yes), the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is executed. The pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812), which will be described in detail later, is a process for determining the order of starting to change the pending symbol display based on each counter value indicated by the received winning command. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1811: No), the process of S1801 is executed. It should be noted that the processing from S1801 is the same as the processing from S1801 of the reservation rearrangement processing (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 71, the pending rearrangement order determination process (S1812), which is one process of the pending rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this pending rearrangement order determination process 3 (S1812). The pending rearrangement order determination process 3 (FIG. 71, S1812) of the eighth embodiment is a process for determining the variable start order based on each counter value indicated by the winning command.

In the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812), first, each counter value stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, variation pattern determination counter C4) is read (S1821).

The read data is stored in a reserve area corresponding to the prize winning order indicated by the prize winning command in the rearrangement reserve storage area 223k (in the present embodiment, the prize winning command is output in the order of prize winning, so it may be stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas). A variable display start time for starting variable display based on the newly stored pending data (each counter value) is calculated (S1822).

As shown in FIG. 12, this fluctuation start time is calculated by adding the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol (if the hold data is based on the first start port 63a, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol if the hold data is based on 63b, the second special symbol) under the variable display corresponding to the newly stored hold data, and the determined change time of each hold data previously stored based on the same start ports 63a, 63b as the newly stored hold data. Here, the remaining variable time is determined based on the secondary first variable time storage area 223i or the secondary secondary variable time storage area 223j.

Here, each pending data previously stored based on the same starting port as the newly stored pending data is based on the previously stored first starting port 63a (corresponding to the first special symbol) if the newly stored pending data is the pending data based on the first starting port 63a. ) is pending data.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the post-rearrangement order is renumbered in ascending order of the variable display start time of all the pending data stored in the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k (S1823). Here, regarding the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, all the reserved data are renumbered. However, this is not limited to this, and when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, i.e., when the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data is interrupted by the variable display start order of the previously stored reserved data, only the changed order may be renumbered.

It is determined whether the game state at the start of fluctuation is a high probability game state (variable probability game state) (S1824). Here, the game state at the time of start of variation is determined by determining the special symbol whose variation is stopped and determined before the special symbol corresponding to the newly established hold starts to vary.

When it is determined that the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the high probability game state (S1824: Yes), based on the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the success/failure determination result storage area 223k1 of the corresponding secondary sorting retention storage area 223k (S1825). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the low probability game state (normal game state) (S1824: No), based on the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the success/failure determination result storage area 223k1 of the corresponding sub-sorting retention storage area 223k (S1826).

Next, the slave pending rearrangement storage area update process (FIG. 72) is executed (S1827). The secondary sorting storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827) will be described later in detail, but in the order in which the variable display is actually started, based on the determination result of the pending data stored in the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k, the jackpot type (probability variable or not) and the variation pattern (variation time) are determined based on each counter value and stored (updated).

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the secondary pending rearrangement storage area update process (S1827), which is one process of the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812), will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the secondary pending rearrangement pending storage area update process (S1827).

In the secondary pending rearrangement pending storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827), first, it is determined whether or not the winning judgment result predicted in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) was a jackpot (S1831). If it is determined that the result of the determination of whether or not the prediction was a jackpot in the processing of S1825 or S1826 in the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) (S1831: Yes), the predicted jackpot is a definite variable jackpot (15R definite variable jackpot or 2R definite variable jackpot). It is determined (S1832). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S1832: Yes), the predictive reading probability variable flag 223k6 of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k corresponding to the newly stored pending data is set to ON (S1833). When the data is shifted to a higher reservation area and stored, the prefetch probability change flag 223k6 is set to OFF because the data in the reservation area before being shifted is cleared to 0. In other words, the predictive reading probability variation flag 223k6 once set to ON is set to OFF by being overwritten (cleared to 0) when the next new data is shifted in the storage area of the changing data in the reserved area in order.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the variable probability jackpot (that is, the 15R normal jackpot) (S1832: No), the process of S1834 is executed.

From the special winning variation pattern table 222c corresponding to the game state (probability variation or time saving) at the start of the variation display, the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display is predicted based on the values of the special winning type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data (S1834).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted success/failure determination result in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is out (S1831: No), the variable display is started based on the values of the variable pattern determination counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data from the special outlier variable pattern table 222d corresponding to the game state at the start of the variable display (whether it is probability variable or time saving). A time-determined variation pattern is predicted (S1835).

Predicted success or failure, stop type, and variation pattern are stored in each storage area (corresponding to the newly stored suspension data) corresponding to the reservation area corresponding to the winning order of the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k (S1836). It is determined whether the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k was stored by interrupting (changing the order of) the previously stored variable display start order (S1837). If it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k is stored (changed) by interrupting the previously stored variable display start order (S1837: Yes), the hold data after the variable display start order of the newly stored hold data is again predicted and updated (S1838).

In this way, in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, based on each counter value indicated by the winning command output by the main controller 110, the winning judgment, the selection of the variation pattern, and the rearrangement order (variation start order) are determined. Therefore, the control load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can reliably execute the processing even when processing such as the winning of the game ball to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b and the selection of the variation pattern are concentrated.

Also, since the winning command output from the main control device 110 only indicates each counter value, even if the command is intercepted by a hanging board or the like, it is difficult to determine whether the judgment is a big win, and fraud can be suppressed.

In addition, since the data amount of the winning command output by the main controller 110 can be made small, the burden of command transmission/reception between the main controller 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and the time required for command transmission/reception can be shortened.

Further, if the value of each counter value is backed up by the voice lamp control device 113, even when the power is restored from the time of power failure, the main controller 110 does not need to output each counter value again, and the start-up time of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on can be shortened.

In the present embodiment, each time a hold is made, it is determined whether there is a change in the order of the start of variation (the order is interrupted and stored), and the game state (high probability or low probability) at the time of start of variation is determined again to determine whether the game is successful or not in advance. By constructing in this way, the game state at the start of fluctuation is not changed by the order of start of fluctuation, and there is no need to redo the determination of success or failure in advance, and the control load in the game can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 78. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution winning device 630 has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 630 next time, a winning notification lamp 660 is provided to notify to which of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b the game ball is distributed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 630, it is notified to which of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b it is distributed.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, the distribution winning device 630 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described. The distribution winning device 630 in the ninth embodiment has a winning notification lamp 660 added to the front side of the distribution winning device 630 in the first embodiment, which is visible to the player. This winning notification lamp 660 is a lamp for notifying to which of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b the game ball is distributed when it enters the distribution winning device 630. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), the award notification lamp 660 is composed of a left route award notification lamp 660a and a right route award notification lamp 660b. The left route winning notification lamp 660a is controlled to light up when the passive sorting member 640 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the housing portion 640a is placed at a position where it can receive the game ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 630 (that is, when the game ball is guided to the first start port 63a).

In addition, the right route winning notification lamp 660b is controlled to light up when the passive distribution member 640 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the housing portion 640b is placed at a position where it can receive the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 630 (i.e., the state in which the game ball is guided to the second start opening 63b).

The distribution winning device 630 is provided with a rotation angle sensor 670 for detecting the rotation of the passive distribution member 640 at the rotation shaft portion of the passive distribution member 640, and is configured to detect the rotation angle when the passive distribution member 640 rotates. The rotation angle sensor 670 is set so that the position where the passive sorting member 640 rotates to the position where the magnet 640c provided on the passive sorting member 640 and the base side magnet 900a overlap becomes the origin (rotation angle 0 degrees). When the passive sorting member 640 rotates clockwise from the origin position (see FIG. 74(a)), the rotation angle becomes positive. Conversely, when the passive sorting member 640 rotates counterclockwise (see FIG. 74(a)) from the origin position, the rotation angle becomes negative.

Here, the position where the passive sorting member 640 rotates to the position where the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a overlap is the origin position of the rotation angle sensor 670. Since the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900a are arranged with magnetic poles that repel each other, the passive sorting member 640 does not stop at this origin position, but stops at a position rotated in either the left or right direction in front view, and the rotation angle sensor shows a positive value. becomes a negative value. Therefore, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is in a position where the game ball can be guided to the first starting port 63a. On the other hand, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a negative value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is at a position where the game ball can be guided to the second starting port 63b. Therefore, by controlling the lighting of the winning notification lamp 660 on the basis of the determination result, it is possible for the player to determine in advance which of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b the game ball will be distributed to when it enters the distribution winning device 630 next time.

In addition, the position where the passive distribution member 640 stops is the position where the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 becomes negative or positive (that is, other than the origin), so that the left route winning notification lamp 660a or the right route winning notification lamp 660b of the winning notification lamp 660 is always lit, and the player can always be notified of the winning route.

In this way, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 630, it is possible to determine in advance which one of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b to be distributed. When a game ball enters the ball at 30 and is distributed to the first start port 63a, overflow occurs and the game balls are wasted, so a problem arises that the game ball cannot always be shot unless the player knows whether the game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b.

However, in this embodiment, the player can know in advance whether the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b will be allocated next by the winning notification lamp 660, so that only when it is determined that the overflow will occur, the shooting of the game balls can be stopped and the game can be played efficiently.

Next, referring to FIG. 75, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A winning notification lamp 660 and rotation sensors 670 are added to the main controller 110 . The award notification lamp 660 is connected via an input/output port so that lighting is controlled based on a command from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 . Further, the rotation angle sensor 670 is connected so that the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can acquire the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 via an input/output port.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76 . FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process of the ninth embodiment, starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) is added instead of starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) to the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (FIG. 14).

Referring to FIG. 77, start winning process 4 (S160), which is one process of timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). The starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment has a winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) added to the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment. The processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment are the same as the processes of S901 to S914 in the first embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 78, the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070). The prize-winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) of the ninth embodiment is a process for executing lighting control for notifying which of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b the game ball will be distributed to when the next game ball enters the distribution prize-winning device 630.

In the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070), first, it is determined whether the rotation angle sensor 670 has a positive value (that is, whether the game ball is guided to the first start hole) (S1071). When it is determined that the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value (S1071: Yes), the lighting of the left route winning notification lamp 660a is controlled (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation angle sensor has a negative value (S1071: No), the lighting of the right route winning notification lamp 660b is controlled (S1073).

In this way, by determining the state of the passive distribution member 640 from the value of the rotation angle sensor 670, when the game ball next wins the distribution prize device 630, it can be accurately determined to which of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b the game ball is distributed, and the player can be notified of accurate information.

In the present embodiment, the notification is performed by the lamp, but the notification is not limited to this, and may be notified by voice or the like, or may be configured to be notified by characters, patterns, etc. in the third pattern display device 81. May be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player in a more comprehensible manner. In addition, if the third pattern display device 81 informs by characters, patterns, etc., the player can confirm the prize winning route of the distribution prize winning device 630 while visually recognizing the variable display of the special symbols, and the game can be made easier.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment described above, the state of the passive distributing member of the distributing prize winning device 630 is determined by the rotation angle sensor 670 to determine whether the game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 63a, the distribution winning device 630 determines that the game ball is guided to the second starting port 63b.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment in the following points. The tenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment in that when a game ball wins a prize in the sorting winning device 630 based on winning the first start hole 63a or the second start hole 63b, it is determined to which of the first start hole 63a and the second start hole 63b the game ball is distributed.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment. Elements that are the same as in the ninth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 79, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the rotation sensor 670 is deleted from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 80, timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 of main control unit 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the tenth embodiment has a starting winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170) instead of the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) in addition to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) of the ninth embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 81, start winning process 5 (S170), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 80) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). The starting winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170) of the tenth embodiment is different from the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment, except that the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is deleted and the processes of S1080 and S1090 are added. The processes of S901 to S914 in the tenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment.

When it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 63a (S901: Yes), lighting control for lighting the right route winning notification lamp is executed (S1080). Here, the distribution winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b, so that when it is detected that the game ball has won the first starting port 63a, it can be determined that the distribution winning device 630 is in a state of distributing the next entered game ball to the second starting port 63b. With this configuration, the state of the passive sorting member 640 can be predicted and determined without detecting the state of the passive sorting member 640, and the configuration can be simplified without the need to provide a sensor or the like for detection. Similarly, when the game ball has won the second starting port 63b (S908: Yes), the lighting control for lighting the left route winning notification lamp is executed (S1090).

In this way, the lighting display of the winning notification lamp 660 is switched every time a game ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, so that the player can confirm in advance which of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b the game ball will be distributed to when the game ball wins the distribution prize winning device 630, and when the game ball is entered, the game ball does not become a reserved ball and overflows. A game can be played by judging whether or not it will occur.

In this embodiment, the passive sorting member 640 is configured to rotate when it comes into contact with a game ball, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to be movable by a motor, solenoid, or the like.

In such a configuration, the passive distribution member 640 is movable (rotated) so as to alternately distribute to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. Further, when the passive distribution member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, the state of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined, and the movement control may be performed so as to distribute the ball to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b corresponding to the special symbol that is less reserved. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow exceeding the upper limit number of reserved balls in one special pattern, and evenly hold the first special pattern and the second special pattern up to the upper limit number of times.

In addition, when the passive sorting member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, when an error or fraud (abnormal winning, etc.) is detected in the game, the boundary wall between the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b of the passive sorting member 640 is moved so that the position on the center line between the vane 64a and the vane 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 (that is, the position where the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900a overlap), and the game ball is moved to the first position. It may be configured so as to prevent winning in the starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. By configuring in this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is tampered with, the lottery game can be controlled so as not to be performed, and the damage on the gaming parlor side can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a power failure occurs, the data in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the data in the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are backed up (data is held by supplying backup power from the power supply device 115). Then, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10, it is confirmed whether each data in the RAM 23 and the RAM 223 is destroyed, and if not destroyed, the data is loaded (used) as it is, the state immediately before the power is turned off is restored, and the game is started.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 generates a rearrangement return data command based on each data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u and outputs it to the sound lamp control device 113 in the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. On the other hand, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 compares the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command with the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the RAM 223, and if they match, it returns to start the game, and if they do not match, it updates the data in each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k to the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command, and starts the game.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The eleventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that each data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k backed up when the power is turned on is collated and a process of whether or not they match is executed.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

82(a) and 82(b) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing an example when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the pending symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of completion and then restored. In the upper display area Dm, characters "holding is being displayed in the order of establishment" are displayed, indicating that the reserved symbols are displayed in the order of establishment. This character is displayed until the game is restarted and a newly established reserved symbol display is displayed. Details will be described later, but when the pending symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of establishment and returns, the data in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the data in the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are collated and do not match.

FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing an example when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the suspended symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of start of fluctuation and the game returns. In the upper display area Dm, characters "holding is being displayed in the order of start of fluctuation" are displayed, indicating that the reserved symbols are rearranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation. This character is displayed until the game is restarted and a newly established reserved symbol display is displayed. Details will be described later, but when the pending symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of start of fluctuation and returns, the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the data in the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are collated and matched.

By configuring in this way, the game parlor side, maintenance and inspection contractor, etc. can confirm whether or not data inconsistency has occurred for some reason when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Further, since the normal display is displayed, the player does not know that some trouble has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and the player can be prevented from having anxiety and doubt.

In addition, since data collation is performed at the time of initial setting when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can be restored with more accurate reserved symbol display. Furthermore, when the data do not match, the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u are updated, so that the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k can be made to match when the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u are started, and the problem of displaying an erroneous reservation pattern display at the time of recovery can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, it is notified by displaying characters in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of return, but it is not limited to that, it may be a sound or the like, It may be configured to light a dedicated lamp or the like, and at the time of return, the reserved symbol display may be displayed in a special display mode (for example, blinking or displayed in a special pattern).

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are configured to retain the contents of the RAM 203 and RAM 223 for a certain period of time (one week in this embodiment) without being initialized by supplying backup power (power stored in the capacitor) from the power supply 115 even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. are

With reference to FIG. 83, startup processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. The start-up process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment has the process of S1120 added to the start-up process (FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. The processes from S1101 to S1114 in the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes from S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S1109 or S1112 is executed, the process of S1120 is executed. In the process of S1120, a rearrangement return data command is generated based on each data in each reserved area of the rearranged reservation storage area 203u and output to the sound lamp controller 113. FIG. This rearrangement return data command is generated for each reservation area, attached with data indicating each reservation area (reservation areas 1 to 8), and each data of each reservation area (property determination result storage area 203u1, jackpot type storage area 203u2, variation pattern type storage area 203u4, variation start time storage area 203u5, look-ahead probability variation flag 203u5).

In this way, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and before the normal game (main process (FIG. 33, S1200)) is executed, the data in the sorting pending storage area 203u is output to the sound lamp control device 113 as a sorting return data command in the start-up processing (FIG. 83). 223k, and the data in the secondary permutation reservation storage area 223k of the sound lamp controller 113 can be matched with the data in the permutation reservation storage area 203u of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, for example, even if the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 stores correct data, if the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110 is erroneous or has been initialized, even if the display of the reservation pattern is displayed based on the data of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k when the power supply is restored, it may be an erroneous display of the reservation pattern. However, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main controller 110 and the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the sound lamp control device 113 are collated, so the above problems can be prevented.

With reference to FIG. 84, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. The start-up process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) is different from the start-up process of the first embodiment (FIG. 34) in that each process from S1320 to S1325 is added. The processes from S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes from S1301 to S1311 in the first embodiment.

In the start-up process (84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S1131 is executed, the process of S1320 is executed. It is determined whether a reordering return data command has been received from main controller 110 (S1320). If it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has not been received (S1320: No), this process is repeatedly executed. That is, it is in a standby state until it receives the rearrangement return data command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has been received (S1320: Yes), it is determined whether the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command match (S1321). If it is determined that the data in the sub-reordering reservation storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command match (S1321: Yes), all the rearrangement flags 223k7 of the reservation areas storing the data are set to ON (S1322). A display command for instructing display of characters "holding is being displayed in the order of start of fluctuation" indicating that the reserved pattern display is rearranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1323).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k and the data indicated by the sorting return data command do not match (S1321: No), the data in the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k is updated based on the data indicated by the sorting return data command output by main controller 110, and the sorting flags 223k7 of the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k are all set to OFF (S1324). A display command for instructing display of the character "holding is being displayed in the order of completion" indicating that the reserved pattern display is displayed in the order of establishment in the left display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1325).

The start-up process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is configured such that the main process (S1200) is executed after the process up to S1311 of the start-up process (FIG. 84) of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 84) and the start-up process (not shown) of the display control device 114 are completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, before the rearrangement return data command is output from the main controller 110, in the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the process of S1320 is executed to wait for the rearrangement return data command to be output from the main control device 110.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the audio lamp control device 113 from failing to receive the rearrangement return data command. In addition, in the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, after executing the process of setting interrupt permission (S1311), the rearrangement return data command is received and the process of collation is executed. Therefore, even if the main control unit 110 starts the main process (FIG. 33, S1200) first and transmits the command, it can be executed after executing the process of collating the corresponding process, which is necessary for normal games. It is possible to prevent the problem of freezing due to the inability to perform control processing.

In this embodiment, when the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is initialized by operating the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) at power-on, the rearrangement return data command becomes a command indicating that there is no data in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u. This command may be substituted with a dedicated initial value setting command or the like.

In the present embodiment, when the collation matches, the pending symbol display is displayed in the order of the start of fluctuation, and when the matching does not match, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the order of establishment. In addition, the reserved pattern display may be displayed in the state (arrangement order) immediately before the power is turned off, and the third pattern display device 81, a dedicated lamp, etc. may be configured to notify the result of collation by patterns, characters, or the lighting mode of the lamp. By constructing in this way, even if an instantaneous power failure or the like occurs, it is possible to more accurately return to the reserved symbol display state before the power failure, so that the game can be resumed with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is turned off (the game state is a high probability, a low probability, or a time saving (normal symbol high probability state)), and if it is during a time saving, how many times of time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return, and can perform determination such as rearrangement.

Next, a modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82(c) and 85. FIG. In the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, when the matching result does not match, as shown in FIG. 82(c), the pending symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol.

FIG. 82(c) is a diagram showing an example of when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the suspended symbol display is displayed with temporary symbols and then restored in the modification of the eleventh embodiment. In the upper display area Dm, characters of "temporarily displaying pending" are displayed, indicating that the pending symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol. The temporary reserved pattern display and characters for notifying it are displayed until the game is restarted, newly established, a winning command generated based on each reserved area of a rearranged reserved storage area 203u of a main control device 110 is received, and each reserved area of a secondary rearranged reserved storage area 223k is updated. Details will be described later, but when the reserved design display is displayed as a temporary reserved design display and returns, the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are collated and do not match.

By constructing in this way, when the data in the sub-reordering reservation storage area 223k of the voice lamp control device 113 and the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110 do not match, a temporary reservation pattern display is displayed, so that the game parlor side or the trader who performs maintenance and inspection of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 and the data do not match. In addition, by continuing to display the temporary reserved symbol display until a new winning command is received, it is possible to prevent an erroneous reserved symbol display from being displayed to the player.

In the present embodiment, the temporary reserved design display is displayed, but not limited to that, the reserved design display areas Ds1 to 8 are not displayed in a special color or display mode (eg, yellow or blinking display mode).

With reference to FIG. 85, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing this startup process. In the start-up process (FIG. 85) of the modification of the eleventh embodiment, S1330-S1331 are added in place of the steps S1324-S1325 of the start-up process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment. The processing from S1301 to S1323 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the processing from S1301 to S1323 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1321 that the data in the secondary sorting reserve storage area 223k and the data indicated by the sorting return data command do not match (S1321: No), the data in each reserve area of the secondary sorting reserve storage area 223k is cleared to 0 (initialized) (S1330). A display command (temporary symbol command) for displaying a temporary reserved symbol display on the display control device 114 for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, a period from when a new winning command is received until a new reserved symbol display is displayed) is generated and output (S1331).

In this way, when the collation of data does not match, a temporary reserved pattern is displayed and the regular reserved pattern display is delayed until a winning command is newly received, thereby informing the player of a more correct reserved pattern display.

In addition, since the normal reserved pattern display is restored at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, the player can recognize the reserved pattern display as if the display is resumed again when the player starts the game, and the game can be played at ease.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is turned off (the game state is a high probability, a low probability, or a time saving (normal symbol high probability state)), and if it is during a time saving, how many times of time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return, and can perform determination such as rearrangement.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, backup power is supplied from the power supply 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 so that data is backed up even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, backup power is not supplied from the power supply device 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, based on the rearrangement return data command from the main controller 110, the data in the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area 223k is updated to restore the reserve symbol display to the state immediately before the power was turned off.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the twelfth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that the data is not backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, based on the rearrangement return data command output from the main control unit 110, the process of restoring the pending symbol display to the state immediately before the power was turned off.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

Although not shown, in the twelfth embodiment, backup power from the power supply device 115 is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 .

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1400). The main processing (FIG. 86, S1400) of the twelfth embodiment is different from the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the eleventh embodiment in that S1417 to S1419 are omitted. The processing from S1401 to S1416 in the twelfth embodiment is the same as the processing from S1401 to S1416 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the twelfth embodiment, in the main process (FIG. 86), when it is determined that there is power-off occurrence information (S1415: Yes), no processing is performed and the pachinko machine 10 waits until the power is turned off.

With reference to FIG. 87, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this startup process. The start-up process of the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 87) is different from the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) in that the processes of S1340-S1343 are added instead of the processes of S1320-S1325. The processes from S1301 to S1311 in the twelfth embodiment are the same as the processes from S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

When the processing of S1311 is executed, it is determined whether or not the rearrangement return data command output from main controller 110 has been received (S1340). If it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has not been received (S1340: No), a process of waiting until the rearrangement return data command is received is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has been received (S1340: Yes), the data in each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is updated based on the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command (S1341). The rearrangement flag 223k7 of each reservation area is set to OFF (S1342). A display command is generated to display characters "holding is being displayed in the order of establishment" indicating that the pending pattern display is displayed in the order of establishment in the upper display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and is output to the display control device 114 (S1343).

In this way, even if the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not supplied with backup power, the rearrangement return data command based on the data stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u is output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the power is turned on. Therefore, even if backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113, the reserved symbol display at the time of power failure can be restored and displayed when the power is turned on again. Therefore, the capacity of the backup power supply of the power supply device 115 can be reduced, and the size of the power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be made compact.

Further, when the power is turned on again, regardless of the state at the time of power-off, the reserved pattern display is displayed in the order of formation, and the display of the display in the order of formation is reported, so that the order in which the restored reserved pattern displays are displayed can be easily discriminated.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is turned off (the game state is a high probability, a low probability, or a time saving (normal symbol high probability state)), and if it is during a time saving, how many times of time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return, and can perform determination such as rearrangement.

Next, a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification of the twelfth embodiment, in the start-up process (FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, when the rearrangement return data command is received from the main control device 110, the data in the subordinate rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated, the rearrangement flag 223k7 of the reservation area in which the data is stored is all set to ON, and the reservation pattern display after return is displayed in the order of fluctuation start.

With reference to FIG. 88, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing this startup process. In the start-up process (FIG. 88) of the modification of the twelfth embodiment, S1350-S1351 are added in place of the steps S1342-S1343 of the start-up process (FIG. 87) of the twelfth embodiment. The processes from S1301 to S1341 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment are the same as the processes from S1301 to S1341 in the twelfth embodiment.

In the start-up process (88) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S1341 is executed, in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k, all the rearrangement flags 223k7 of the reservation areas in which data is stored are set to ON (S1350). A display command is generated to display the characters "holding is being displayed in the order of start of fluctuation" indicating that the reserved pattern display is rearranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation, and is output to the display control device 114 (S1351).

In this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again from the power-off state and the reserved pattern display is restored, the reserved pattern display is rearranged and displayed regardless of the order displayed immediately before the power is turned off. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the power has been turned off and the order has been forcibly rearranged.

In addition, since the reserved pattern display is automatically rearranged and displayed when the power supply is recovered from the interruption, it is possible to recognize that the reserved pattern display rearranged and displayed was established before the power interruption, and the game can be restarted without anxiety even if the power interruption occurs during the normal game.

In the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113, when receiving a rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110, sets all the rearrangement flags 223k7 to ON, and in the main processing executed thereafter, the pending symbol display is rearranged and displayed in order of start of fluctuation. However, not limited to this, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a rearrangement return data command from the main control device 110, it may be configured to generate and output a display command for rearranging and displaying the pending symbol display based on the value indicated by the change order storage area 203u4 of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u indicated by the rearrangement return data command. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the control addition for rearranging the reserved symbol display at the time of start-up processing. Therefore, if a rearrangement return data command output from the main controller 110 is received, the pending symbol display can be rearranged and displayed. In this case, the rearrangement flags 223k7 may all be set to ON so that the reserved pattern display is maintained in a rearranged state even after the start-up process, or the rearranged reserved pattern display displayed during the start-up process may be maintained in a rearranged state until the display is completed.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is turned off (the game state is a high probability, a low probability, or a time saving (normal symbol high probability state)), and if it is during a time saving, how many times of time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return, and can perform determination such as rearrangement.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 90. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, in the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a rearrangement return data command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u that is backed up, and the data indicated by the output rearrangement return data command is collated with the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k to restore the display of the reservation symbols to the state immediately before the power failure occurred. explained the case.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, backup power is supplied from the power supply 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, in the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the reserved symbol display is displayed and restored based on the data in the subordinate rearrangement reserved storage area 223k that is backed up without receiving the rearranged return data command from the main controller 110.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. The thirteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that the main controller 110 does not output a rearrangement return data command to the sound ramp control device 113, but executes the process of restoring the reserved symbol display based on the data backed up in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the sound lamp control device 113.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the present embodiment, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, is supplied with backup power when the pachinko machine 10 is not powered, and each data stored in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is held.

Referring to FIG. 89, startup processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this startup process. The start-up process (FIG. 89) of the thirteenth embodiment is different from the start-up process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment in that the process of S1120 is deleted. The processing from S1101 to S1114 in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as the processing from S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment. That is, the same processing as the start-up processing (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment is executed.

With reference to FIG. 90, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. The start-up process of the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 90) is different from the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) in that the process of S1360 is added instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. The processes from S1301 to S1311 in the thirteenth embodiment are the same as the processes from S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the process of S1310 is executed, the data stored in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k A display command for displaying the reserved symbol display on the display control device 114 is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1360).

Here, the displayed reserved symbol display is displayed based on the data of each reserved area stored in the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k immediately before the power is turned off. Since even the state of the rearrangement flag 223k7 of each reserved area is stored, the reserved pattern display is displayed in the order displayed immediately before the power was turned off.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing to be performed when the power of the main controller 110 is turned on, and it is possible to shorten the start-up time (the time until the normal game is executed) when the power is turned on.

In addition, the reserved symbol display can be restored in the state immediately before the power is turned off, and the player can restart the game without worrying even after the power is turned on again.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th embodiment, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a big win such as super ready-to-win is selected at the timing when the variation can be started in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a notification mode is displayed to notify the player so as to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The fourteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is selected, the player is notified to pay attention to the display area displayed with the variation pattern.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c), display modes displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 91(a) is a diagram schematically showing that the background image of the right display area Dm2 is displayed blinking when a variation pattern such as Super Reach is selected in the right display area Dm2.

FIG. 91(b) is a diagram schematically showing that when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right display area Dm2, the size of the second special symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol in the reach state) displayed in the right display area Dm2 is displayed as a larger symbol than in normal times.

FIG. 91(c) is a diagram schematically showing that when a variation pattern such as super ready-to-win is selected in the right display area Dm2, characters "Look right!!" are displayed in the left display area Dm1 to inform the player to look at the right display area Dm2.

With this configuration, the player can play the game while paying attention to the display area on the side where the background image is blinking, thereby preventing the player from overlooking the variation mode displayed in the variation pattern that is likely to be selected when a big win such as super ready-to-win is achieved.

In addition, the player can easily understand which display area to look at and does not need to always pay attention to both display areas while playing the game. Therefore, even if the game is played for a long time, the fatigue of the player can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol to be noticed is notified by the notification as described above. However, the size of the display area of the left side display area Dm1 or the right side display area Dm2 of the upper display area Dm for displaying the special symbol to be noticed may be varied. Specifically, when it is desired to draw attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol, the size of the left display region Dm1 may be enlarged to the right display region Dm2 side and displayed, and the size of the right display region Dm2 may be reduced or eliminated (all the upper display region Dm may be changed to the left display region Dm1). By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the variation mode of the special symbol that the player wants to pay attention to. Further, the player can play the game expecting that the left side display area Dm1 or the right side display area Dm2 will not be greatly changed, and can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

Next, referring to FIG. 92, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram schematically showing part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. A first delay time storage area 203v5 and a second delay time storage area 203v6 are added to the other memory area 203v.

The first delay time storage area 203v5 is a storage area in which, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the second special symbol, the same time as the selected variation time is stored as a delay time for delaying the start of variation of the first special symbol.

Although details will be described later, the first delay time storage area 203v5 stores the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern when the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a super reach variation pattern that becomes an outlier.

Further, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated each time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed. Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, is subtracted.

The second delay time storage area 203v6 is a storage area in which, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the first special symbol, the same time as the selected variation time is stored as a delay time for delaying the start of variation of the second special symbol.

Although details will be described later, the second delay time storage area 203v6 stores the same delay time as the variation time of the selected variation pattern when the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is a variation pattern that will be a big hit or a variation pattern of super reach that will be out.

Further, when the delay time is stored in the second delay time storage area 203v6, the time is updated each time the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is executed. Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), is subtracted.

Thus, when a variation pattern for a big hit or a variation pattern for super reach is selected in the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the start of variation of the other special pattern to start the variation after that is delayed, so that the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be prevented from being variably displayed at the same time with a high probability of being selected in the case of the big win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a complicated game state in which the player needs to pay attention to both the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2.

In the present embodiment, the first delay time storage area 203v5 and the second delay time storage area 203v6 are configured to store delay times, but are not limited to this, and may be configured to store count values and the like. With such a configuration, the count value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, so that the number of times the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed may be counted to measure the time.

With reference to FIG. 93, in the fourteenth embodiment, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 93, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 18, S310) in place of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the fourteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 94, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S350), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S350). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern for a big hit or a variation pattern for super ready-to-win that results in a loss, a delay time is set for delaying the start of variation of the second special symbol, and processing for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to see the variation mode of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the variation pattern that becomes a big hit or the super reach that is not displayed is variably displayed) (S571). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S571: No), the first delay time is updated by subtracting 2 ms (S584). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S571: Yes), it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S572). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S572: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S573). When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S572: No), a special deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S575). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S576).

A variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and a first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is generated (S577).

For the variation pattern selected in the process of S577, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern or an unsuccessful super reach (S578). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that results in a big win or a super reach variation pattern that results in a loss (S578: Yes), the same variation time as the selected variation pattern is set as a delay time in the second delay time storage 203v5 (S579). A first warning notice command is set to instruct the sound lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the left side display area Dm1 where the first special symbol is displayed (S580).

A second mute command is set to mute the sound effect or voice that varies the second special symbol (the sound effect or voice that is set to the variation pattern that varies the second special symbol) (S581). A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S582). The measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S583).

In this way, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern of the big hit or the super reach of losing is selected, the notification mode is set so that the player pays attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the variation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to pay attention to, and can play the game easily.

In addition, in the variation mode of the first special pattern, when a variation pattern that results in a big win or a super reach that results in a loss is selected, sound effects and voices related to the variation of the second special pattern are muted so that attention is paid to the variation mode of the first special pattern. Therefore, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner which special symbol should be paid attention to. In addition, it becomes easier to hear the voice and sound effects of the first special symbol, and the game can be enjoyed more.

In addition, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern of the big hit or the super reach of losing is selected, the start of the variation of the second special symbol is delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the notable variation mode from being displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 at the same time, and to provide the game easy for the player to understand. In addition, by displaying the variation modes in which the player expects the possibility of a big win at different times (not displayed at the same time), the player can play the game while maintaining the expectation of the big win for a longer period of time, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

By starting measurement of the variation time of the first special pattern together with the setting of the variation pattern command, the variation time can be measured by synchronizing the timing with the start of variation of the first special symbol, and the variation time can be accurately measured.

In order to make the player pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol, as the notification mode to be notified, the size of the first special symbol may be made large (see FIG. 91(b)). In addition, in order to draw attention to the first special symbol, the right side display area Dm2 may be configured to display the characters "Look to the left!" Also, the above contents may naturally be combined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the super reach that results in a loss is selected, the effect sound and voice related to the variation of the second special symbol are muted so as to pay attention to the variation pattern of the first special symbol. However, not limited to this, two speakers are provided in the pachinko machine 10, one is configured to output the sound, sound effect, etc. related to the first special symbol, and the other is configured to output the voice, sound effect, etc. related to the second special symbol. In the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern that results in a big hit or the super reach that results in a loss is selected, the speaker that outputs the voice, sound effect, etc. related to the second special symbol is disabled or has a low output. It may be configured to draw attention to aspects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily switch voices, sound effects, etc. (switching which voice, sound effect, etc. is to be output between the first special symbol and the second special symbol).

With reference to FIG. 95, in the fourteenth embodiment, the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206). The second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 95, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 22, S710) in place of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 20, S206) of the first embodiment, and the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is added. The processes of S701 to S709 in the fourteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 96, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S750), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S750). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol. In addition, when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern for a big hit or a variation pattern for a super reach that results in a loss, a delay time for delaying the start of variation of the first special symbol is set, and processing for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to see the variation mode of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750), first, it is determined whether a delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (that is, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, whether a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a super reach that is out is displayed in a variable manner) (S751). If it is determined that the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (S751: No), the second delay time is updated by subtracting 2 ms (S764). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second delay time is not set (S751: Yes), it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot (S752). Whether or not a big win is determined is determined by whether or not the second big win flag 203p is set to ON. When it is determined that the second big hit flag 203p is set to ON (S752: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S753). In this embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set for the first special symbol, and a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol is set to the second special symbol. When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S752: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S755). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S756).

A variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and a second variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated (S757).

For the variation pattern selected in the process of S757, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern or an off super reach (S758). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that results in a big win or a super reach variation pattern that results in a loss (S758: Yes), the same variation time as the selected variation pattern is set as a delay time in the first delay time storage 203v5 (S759). A second warning notice command is set to instruct the sound lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the right side display area Dm2 where the second special symbol is displayed (S760).

A first mute command is set to mute the sound effect or voice that varies the first special symbol (sound effect or voice that is set to the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is varied) (S761). A second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S762). The measurement start of the second variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, is set (S763).

In this way, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern of the big hit or the super reach of losing is selected, the information mode is set so that the player pays attention to the variation mode of the second special symbol, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the variation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to pay attention to, and can play the game easily.

In addition, in the variation mode of the second special pattern, when a variation pattern that results in a big hit or a super reach that results in a loss is selected, sound effects and voices related to the variation of the first special pattern are muted so that attention is paid to the variation mode of the second special pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand which special symbol should be paid attention to. In addition, it becomes easier to hear the sound of the second special symbol and sound effects, and the game can be enjoyed more.

In addition, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern of the big hit or the super ready-to-win is selected, the start of variation of the first special symbol is delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the notable variation mode from being displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the side display area Dm2 at the same time, and to provide the game easy for the player to understand. In addition, by displaying the variation modes in which the player expects the possibility of a big win at different times, the game can be played while maintaining the expectation of the big win for a longer period of time, and early boredom with the game can be prevented.

By starting the measurement of the variation time of the second special pattern together with the setting of the variation pattern command, the variation time can be measured by synchronizing the timing with the start of variation of the second special symbol, and the variation time can be accurately measured.

In order to make the player pay attention to the variation mode of the second special symbol, as the notification mode to be notified, the size of the second special symbol may be configured to be large (see FIG. 91(b)). In addition, in order to draw attention to the second special symbol, the left display area Dm1 may be configured to display characters "Look to the right!" Also, the above contents may naturally be combined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the first special symbol.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a big hit such as super reach is selected at the timing when variation can be started in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of displaying a notification mode for notifying the player to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The fifteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a jackpot such as super reach is selected and a command indicating the variation pattern command is output to the voice ramp control device 113, the voice ramp control device 113 notifies the player to pay attention to the display area displayed with the variation pattern.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The variable display setting process (S1411), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1411). In the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) of the fifteenth embodiment, S1630 and S1640 are added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) of the first embodiment. The processing from S1601 to S1614 in the fifteenth embodiment is the same as the processing from S1601 to S1614 in the first embodiment.

In the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1603 is executed, the first warning notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is executed. The first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) will be described later in detail, but in the main control device 110, if the selected variation pattern of the first special symbol is a variation pattern that makes a big hit or is a super reach that is out, it is a process for setting a command for executing notification to draw the player's attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol and a command for muting the voice and sound effect related to the variation mode of the second special symbol.

In the first warning notice process (FIG. 98, S1630), first, it is determined whether the first variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a super reach (S1631). If it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or is a super reach out (S1631: Yes), the first caution notice command is generated to instruct the display control device 114 to blink the background image of the left side display area Dm1 that displays the first special symbol (see FIG. 91 (a)), and is output to the display control device 114 (S1632).

A second mute command for muting the voice and sound effects relating to the variation mode of the second special symbol is generated and output (S1633). On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or is not a super reach (S1631: No), this process is terminated.

Returning to the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the description continues. When the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1411) is executed, the processes from S1604 to S1608 are executed. When the process of S1608 is executed, the process of the second warning notice process (S1640) is executed. The second caution notice process (S1640) is the same as the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) except that the first caution notice command is changed to the second caution notice command, and the second mute command is changed to the first mute command.

In this way, the type of the variation pattern output from the main controller 110 is discriminated, and when the variation pattern for the big win or the super reach that the player expects for the big win is set, the notification mode for drawing the player's attention to the variation mode is set, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the variation mode. Therefore, the player can discriminate which special pattern variation mode should be paid attention to, and can play the game easily. Therefore, fatigue of the player can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the first caution command or the second caution command, the background image of the display area on the side where the special symbol is displayed is displayed blinking, but the size of the special symbol on the side that attracts attention may be configured to be large (see FIG. 91 (b)). In addition, in order to focus on the special symbol on the side of attracting attention, for example, if it is a notification mode for notifying to focus on the second special symbol, the left side display area Dm1 may be configured to display the characters "Look to the right!" Also, the above contents may naturally be combined. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the fluctuation mode of the special symbol which is highly likely to be selected when the jackpot is achieved.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern for the first special symbol, when the variation pattern for the big hit or the super reach (that is, the variation pattern with the high probability of being selected for the big win) is selected, it is discriminated whether or not the same variation pattern is selected for the second special symbol, and if it is selected, the start of variation for the variation pattern selected for the first special symbol is delayed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The sixteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected in the event of a big win is selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the start of variation of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is delayed until the variation display of the second special symbol is completed.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the display mode displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 shows, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 99, in the second special symbol (left display area Dm2), in a state in which the variation pattern of super ready-to-win that is out is selected and displayed, in the first special symbol (right display area Dm1), the super ready-to-win that is out is also selected, the start of fluctuation in the first special symbol is delayed, and the characters "Look right!" is displayed. Then, when the super ready-to-win fluctuation pattern displayed with the second special symbol ends, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 99, it is a diagram schematically showing that the delayed super ready-to-win fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner.

Thus, when a variation pattern (for example, super reach) with a high probability of being selected in the case of a big hit is selected from the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the start of variation of the variation pattern in the first special symbol is delayed, so that the player can concentrate on the variation mode of one special symbol and play the game calmly.

In addition, the player can play the game with expectation of the big win for a long time and can be prevented from getting tired of the game early because the variation pattern having a great expectation of the big win is continued and the variation of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is sequentially started.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with a first delay time storage area 203v5. This first delay time storage area 203v5 is a storage area for storing, as a delay time for delaying the start of variation of the first special symbol, the same time as the time until the variation pattern selected or variably displayed in the second special symbol finishes varying when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected at the time of a big hit such as super ready-to-win is selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described in detail later, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a variation pattern of Super Reach that results in a loss. time is stored.

Further, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated each time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed. Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval at which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, is subtracted.

With reference to FIG. 100, in the sixteenth embodiment, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 100, S203) of the sixteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment, with the addition of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 6 (FIG. 101, S360) instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 18, S310). The processes of S301 to S309 in the sixteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 101, in the sixteenth embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (S360), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (S360). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern for a big hit or a variation pattern for a super reach that results in a loss, it is determined whether or not a similar variation pattern is selected in the second special symbol, and if it is selected, a delay time for delaying the start of variation of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set, and processing for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to pay attention to the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360), first, whether a delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, in the variation pattern between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is determined whether a variation pattern for a big hit or a variation pattern for a super reach that is not selected) (S621). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S621: No), the first delay time is updated by subtracting 2 ms (S635). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S621: Yes), it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S622). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S622: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S623). When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S622: No), a special deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S625). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S626).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, a variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated (S627).

For the variation pattern selected in the process of S627, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern or an off super reach (S628). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that results in a big hit or a super reach variation pattern that results in a loss (S628: Yes), it is determined whether a variation pattern that results in a big hit or a super reach that results in a loss is being selected or fluctuated in the second special symbol (S629).

In the second special symbol, when it is determined that the variation pattern to become a big hit or the super reach to lose is being selected or fluctuated (S629: Yes), the time until the variation pattern to become a big hit or the super reach to become a big hit being selected or varied in the second special symbol or the super reach to be changed is stored as a delay time in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S630).

In the left display area Dm1 where the first special pattern is displayed, a second warning notice command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to display the characters "Look right!" to notify attention to the second special pattern (right display region Dm2) (S631). On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when it is determined that the variation pattern that becomes a big hit or the super reach that is not selected or is not being varied (S629: No), the process of S632 is executed. A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S632). Measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S633).

In this way, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win that results in a loss is selected in the variation modes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the start of variation of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is delayed until the variation of the variation pattern displayed in the second special symbol ends, so that it is possible to suppress the variation display of the variation pattern in which the player has a great expectation for the big win at the same time in both display areas. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the display of the variation pattern of one special symbol with a sense of anticipation for the big win, and to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. Also, by displaying in both display areas, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation of one of the special symbols.

In addition, in the second special pattern, while the variation pattern is displayed, a notification mode for notifying to pay attention to the second special pattern is displayed, so that the player can easily discriminate the special pattern to be paid attention to, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the second special pattern, when the variation pattern with expectation for the big win is completed, the delayed variation pattern of the first special pattern is next started to be variably displayed, so that the player can continuously enjoy the variation mode with great expectation for the big win and can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

In the present embodiment, as a notification mode for notifying the user to pay attention to the second special symbol, the characters are used for notification, but the background image of the left side display area Dm2 may be blinked or displayed in a special color. Also, the second special symbol may be displayed in a larger size. Also, it is of course possible to configure so as to notify by combining them.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the start of the variation of the first special symbol is delayed, but not limited to this, the variation is started by adding the time until the variation of the second special symbol is finished to the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol. may be configured to display By configuring in this way, there is no need to change the timing of the fluctuation start, and the control load can be suppressed compared to the case of delaying.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol is delayed, but the second special symbol may be delayed, or the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which starts to fluctuate later, may be delayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 116. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined is notified by the display mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b and becomes a reserved ball, a win/deny decision is made in advance before the start of variation is possible, and as a result, when a big win is achieved, it is decided by lottery whether to inform the player in advance that the win/fail decision result will be a big win due to the change due to the hold.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The seventeenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a jackpot is notified (hereinafter referred to as one-shot notification) in a state where the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a retained ball before the variation is started.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the display mode displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 102(a) is a diagram schematically showing a display mode in which the player is notified in advance that, in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 among the reserved symbol displays of the second special symbols is normally displayed as "●", but is displayed as a special reserved symbol display "▲", and is stopped and displayed in a special symbol display mode indicating a big win.

In addition, FIG. 102(b) is a diagram schematically showing a display mode in which the player is informed in advance that, in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the suspended symbol display displayed in the suspended symbol display area Ds4 among the suspended symbol displays of the first special symbol is normally displayed as "○", but is displayed as "△" which is a special suspended symbol display, and is stopped and displayed in a special symbol display mode indicating a big hit.

By constructing in this way, the player can recognize the success/failure determination result in advance by the reserved pattern display, and can expect that the special reserved pattern display for notifying the big hit will be displayed each time the reserved pattern display is displayed, and can be more interested in the game.

In the present embodiment, the big hit is notified in advance by the reserved symbol display (one-shot notification), but it is not limited to that, it may be notified by voice, may be notified by a dedicated lamp or the like, or may be configured to be notified by characters, patterns, etc. in the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram schematically showing part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. A first notification flag 203v7, a second notification flag 203v8, and a notification timer storage area 203v9 are added to the other memory area 203v.

The first notification flag 203v7 is a flag indicating that a reserved symbol display (“Δ” in this embodiment) for informing a big hit is being displayed in the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol. The first notification flag 203v7 will be described later in detail, but in the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the special reserved design display for notifying the jackpot is displayed. Also, although not shown, the first notification flag 203v7 is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started based on the reserved symbol display for notifying that a jackpot will be won. Note that this flag is set to OFF at the time of initial setting.

The second notification flag 203v8 is a flag indicating that a special reserved symbol display (“▴” in the present embodiment) for notifying a big hit is displayed in the second special reserved symbol display. The second notification flag 203v8 will be described later in detail, but in the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the special reserved design display for notifying the big win is displayed. Also, although not shown, the second notification flag 203v8 is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started based on the special reserved symbol display for notifying that a jackpot will be won. Note that this flag is set to OFF at the time of initial setting.

A notification timer storage area 203v9 is a storage area for storing the time from display to stop of variation of the special pattern based on the display of the reserved pattern, when one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is displayed by the reserved pattern display (one-shot notification) for informing a big hit. When a one-shot announcement is made with one special pattern, and when a variation pattern to win with the other special pattern is selected, a variation time longer than the set time stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a big win prior to the big win by the one-shot announced reserved symbol display, and to prevent the players from being confused.

In addition, after the one-shot announcement, a reservation corresponding to a special symbol different from the one-shot announced special symbol (for example, a second special symbol when one-shot announcement is performed by the one-shot announcement in the reserved symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol) is established, and when the fluctuation is stopped before the one-shot announced reserved symbol display and a big win is achieved, the game state may be changed. In detail, it is predicted that a variation will start in a high-probability game state, it is determined in advance that it will be a big win, and one-shot notification is made, but due to the difference in the order of variation start due to the hold established after that, if the change is started first and the normal 15R jackpot is stopped and displayed, the game is changed to a normal-probability (low-probability) game state after that, and the success/failure determination result corresponding to the one-shot-notified reserved pattern display is not a big win but a failure.

However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the one-shot announcement is made, the variation pattern is selected so as not to generate a big winning game, so the above-described problems can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a notification that confuses the player.

FIG. 104 is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k in the seventeenth embodiment, a reservation notification flag 223k8 is added to the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k in the first embodiment.

The reservation notification flag 223k8 is provided for each reservation area, and when the first notification command or the second notification command is received from the main controller 110, the reservation notification flag 223k8 of the reservation area indicated by the command is set to ON. In addition, the pending notification flag 223k8 is set off by resetting each data in the pending area to the initial value (clearing to 0) when the pending is completed, the pending area is shifted, and the data is shifted from the pending data storage area to the changing data storage area.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, the first prefetch update process (S926), which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 105, S926) in the seventeenth embodiment, a first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) and a first extended fluctuation look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160) are added to the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. The processes from S931 to S939 in the seventeenth embodiment are the same as the processes from S931 to S939 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S931, when it is determined that the predicted result of the win/loss determination is a big hit (S931: Yes), the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) is executed. The first announcement lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) will be described later, but when the one-shot announcement has not been executed, a lottery process is executed to determine whether to execute the one-shot announcement.

In the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1151). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1151: No), it is determined whether or not the winning one with the first variation order is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1152).

If it is determined in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u that there is a prize that comes first in the order of variation (S1152: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the items with the higher order of variation are out of order in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1152: No), the notification count value is obtained (S1153). The notification count value is a value obtained by acquiring the value of the special per type counter C2. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special hit type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value, but the notification counter is not limited to this, and may be provided exclusively.

It is determined whether the obtained notification count value is a win count value (any one of 0 to 30 in this embodiment) (S1154). When it is determined that the acquired notification count value is a hit (S1154: Yes), a first notification command is generated to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to display the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol for which this determination has been made as a reserved symbol display (one-shot notification) for notifying a big hit (S1155). This first notification command is a command indicating which reserved area's reserved pattern display is a command.

The time until the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display ends is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1156). The first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S1157). On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out of range (S1154: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is ON (S1151: Yes), the notification timer is updated by subtracting 2 ms from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1158).

Thus, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is turned on, a lottery is not performed as to whether or not to perform the one-shot notification, so that once the one-shot notification is performed, the next one-shot notification is not performed until the big winning game is finished, and the player is prevented from being confused by the one-shot notification being performed a plurality of times.

Further, by performing a lottery as to whether or not to perform the one-shot announcement, it is possible to prevent the one-shot announcement from being performed even in the case of a reserved pattern display that results in a big win every time, and to prevent the player from having no expectations for the big win if the one-shot announcement is not made.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation ends is stored as the notification timer, but the counter value or the like may be stored, and the counter value may be updated each time it is updated.

Referring back to FIG. 105, the description continues back to the first prefetch update process (FIG. 105, S926). When the process of S934 or S935 is executed, the first extended change look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160) is executed.

In the first extended change look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160), first, it is determined whether or not the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161). When it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161: Yes), the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 when the second special symbol corresponding to the reservation area starts to change is calculated (predicted) for the data of the reservation area stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, which triggered the second notification flag 203v8 to be set to ON, and the selected variation pattern (variation time) is determined (predicted) (S 1162). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to OFF (S1161: No), this process is terminated.

By constructing in this way, even when one-shot notification is performed in the reserved pattern display corresponding to the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern is extended and displayed, the reserved pattern display can be rearranged in the correct order of starting the variation by discriminating (predicting) the variation pattern (variation time) in advance. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct variation start order, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the second look-ahead update process (S946), which is one process of the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing this second prefetch update process (S946). In the second look-ahead update process (FIG. 108, S946) in the seventeenth embodiment, a second announcement lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) and a second extended fluctuation look-ahead process (FIG. 108, S1180) are added to the second look-ahead update process (FIG. 28, S946) in the first embodiment. The processing from S951 to S959 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as the processing from S951 to S959 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S951, when it is determined that the predicted win/loss determination result is a big win (S951: Yes), the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) is executed. The second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) will be described later, but when the one-shot announcement has not been executed, a lottery process is executed to determine whether to execute the one-shot announcement.

In the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1171). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1171: No), it is determined whether or not the winning one with the first variation order is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1172).

If it is determined in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u that there is a win that comes first in the order of variation (S1172: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the items with the highest variation order are out of order in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1172: No), the notification count value is obtained (S1173). The notification count value is a value obtained by acquiring the value of the special per type counter C2. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special hit type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value, but the notification counter is not limited to this, and may be provided exclusively.

It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a win count value (any one of 0 to 30 in this embodiment) (S1174). When it is determined that the obtained notification count value is a hit (S1174: Yes), a second notification command is generated for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to display the reserved symbol display of the second special symbol for which this determination has been made as a special reserved symbol display (one-shot notification) for notifying a big hit (S1175). This second notification command is a command indicating which reserved area's reserved pattern display is a command.

The time until the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display ends is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1176). The second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1177). On the other hand, if it is determined that the obtained notification count value is out of range (S1174: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is ON (S1171: Yes), the notification timer is updated by subtracting 2 ms, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1178).

Thus, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is turned on, a lottery is not performed as to whether or not to perform the one-shot notification, so that once the one-shot notification is performed, the next one-shot notification is not performed until the big winning game is finished, and the player is prevented from being confused by the one-shot notification being performed a plurality of times.

Further, by performing a lottery as to whether or not to perform a one-shot announcement, it is possible to prevent the one-shot announcement from being performed even when the reserved pattern display that results in a big win is made every time, and to prevent the problem that the player loses expectations for the big win if the one-shot announcement is not made.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation ends is stored as the notification timer, but the counter value or the like may be stored, and the counter value may be updated each time it is updated.

Referring to FIG. 108, the description will be continued by returning to the process of the second prefetch update process (FIG. 108, S946). When the process of S954 or S955 is executed, the second extended change look-ahead process (S1180) is executed. The second extended change look-ahead process (S1180) is the same as the first extended change look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160), except that the second notification flag 203v8 is changed to the first notification flag 203v7.

By constructing in this way, even when one-shot notification is performed in the reserved pattern display corresponding to the second special pattern and the variable display of the first special pattern is extended (delayed), the reserved pattern display can be rearranged in the correct order of starting the variation by determining the fluctuation time in advance. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct variation start order, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

With reference to FIG. 110, in the seventeenth embodiment, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 110, S203) of the seventeenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment, with the addition of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (FIG. 111, S370) instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 18, S310). The processing of S301 to S309 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as the processing of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 111, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S370), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventeenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S370). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, in the second special pattern, when the one-shot notification is performed, a variation pattern longer than the time until the variation mode of the special pattern corresponding to the one-shot reserved pattern display is completed is set.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S651). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S651: Yes), it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S652). When it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S652: Yes), a variation pattern with a variation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is set as the first alternative variation pattern as the first alternative variation pattern command (S653).

Here, as the selection of the variation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, the variation pattern of the closest variation time is selected from the variation pattern of the variation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 from the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d or the time saving/probability special winning variation pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time. For example, in the normal game state (low-probability game state), if the jackpot type is the 15R jackpot and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot B is selected.

Further, when the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than all the variation patterns in the variation pattern table, an alternative variation pattern is set with the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 plus 5 seconds as the variation time. In this alternative variation pattern, all the main symbols in the special symbols are variably displayed during the variation time, and then stopped in a display mode indicating a big win. In addition, even when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variable jackpot, instead of the normal 2R probability variable dedicated variation pattern, an alternative variation pattern having a variation time of a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S652: No), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S654). In this embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set for the first special symbol, and a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol is set to the second special symbol. When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S655).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S651: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S656). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. The variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c (S657).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, a variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated (S658).

A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S659). The measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S660).

With reference to FIG. 112, in the seventeenth embodiment, the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206). The second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 112, S206) of the seventeenth embodiment is the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 20, S26) of the first embodiment, and the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 22, S710) is replaced by the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (FIG. 113, S770). The processing of S701 to S709 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as the processing of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 113, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S770), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventeenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S770). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol. In addition, in the first special pattern, when the one-shot notification is performed, a variation time is set until the variation mode of the special symbol corresponding to the one-shot notified reserved symbol display finishes varying.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot (S771). Whether or not a big win is determined is determined by whether or not the second big win flag 203p is set to ON. When it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S771: Yes), it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S772). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is ON (S772: Yes), a second alternative variation pattern command is set as a second alternative variation pattern having a longer variation time than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S773).

Here, as the selection of the variation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, the variation pattern of the closest time with the variation time longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is selected from the normal time special winning variation pattern table 202d or the time saving/probability special winning variation pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time. For example, in the normal game state (low-probability game state), if the jackpot type is the 15R jackpot and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot B is selected.

Also, when the value in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than any variation pattern in the variation pattern table, an alternative variation pattern is set in which the variation time is a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value in the notification timer storage area 203v9. After all the main symbols in the special symbols are variably displayed during the variation time, this alternative variation pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win. In addition, even when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variable jackpot, instead of the normal 2R probability variable dedicated variation pattern, an alternative variation pattern having a variation time of a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is off (S772: No), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S774). In this embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set for the first special symbol, and a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol is set to the second special symbol. When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S775).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S771: No), a special deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S776). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S777).

A variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and a second variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated (S778). A second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S779). The measurement start of the second variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, is set (S780).

In this way, when one-shot notification is executed in the reserved design display corresponding to the second special design, when one-shot notification is performed in the reserved design display corresponding to the first special design of the first special design, the second special design The variation mode in which the result of the judgment result is a big hit is delayed until the special design corresponding to the once-notified special reserved design display stops fluctuating. It is possible to prevent hits from occurring.

Therefore, assuming that the lottery is drawn in a high-probability game state, even if one-shot announcement is made, the big win does not occur earlier, so that the game state cannot be changed and the trouble that the lottery game based on the reserved pattern display with the one-shot announcement does not become a big win can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an alternative variation pattern is selected to delay the occurrence of a big hit, but it is of course possible to delay the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent another big win from occurring prior to the big win triggered by the reserved symbol display in which the one-shot announcement was made.

Further, in the present embodiment, all jackpots are delayed, but only the 15R normal jackpot may be delayed. With this configuration, the 15R probability variable big win and the 2R probability variable big win occur before the big win based on the one-shot announced reserved pattern display, but the game state is prevented from being changed from the high probability to the low probability, and the lottery game based on the one-shot announced reserved pattern display can be made a big win. In addition, even before the big win based on the one-shot announced reserved pattern display, the big win is generated to provide the player with many big win games and increase the player's expectation for the big win.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 114, S1400). In the main processing of the seventeenth embodiment (FIG. 114, S1400), the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) and the pending number display update processing (FIG. 37, S1406) are replaced with the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. The processing of S1401 to S1413 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as the processing of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1413 is completed, command determination processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed.

Command determination processing 4 (S1560), which is one processing of the main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 4 (S1560). Command determination processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, and is processing for determining a command received from main controller 110.

In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1470) of the seventeenth embodiment, S1561 and S1562 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. The processes of S1501 to S1518 in the seventeenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment. When it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation restart command has not been received in the process of S1517 (S1517: No), the process of S1561 is executed.

In the process of S1561, it is determined whether the first notification command or the second notification command output by main controller 110 has been received (S1561). When it is determined that the first notification command or the second notification command has been received (S1561: Yes), the reservation notification flag 223k8 in the reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k indicated by the received notification command is set to ON (S1562).

With reference to FIG. 116, pending number display update process 4 (S1550), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process 4 (S1550). In the pending number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), the pending symbol display for which the sort flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in the order of the start of fluctuation, and the pending symbol display for which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to OFF is displayed in the order of establishment. This is a process for displaying in .

In the reservation number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated (S1551). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the updating of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may of course be performed by other methods.

A reservation display command for display is set to display the reserved pattern displays of the reserved areas in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON in the order of starting variation, and to display the reserved pattern displays in the order in which the reservation is established for the reserved areas in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to OFF (S1552).

By controlling in this way, the reserved pattern display can be rearranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation only for the reserved pattern display (the reserved area where the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON) when the rearrangement is executed (when the frame switch 22 is operated).

It is determined whether there is a reserved area for which the reserved notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553). When it is determined that there is a reservation area where the reservation notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: Yes), the reservation design display for which the reservation notification flag 223k8 is set to ON is a special reservation design display (In this embodiment, a reservation display command for display is generated for displaying "△" for the first special design and "▲" for the second special design) (S1554). A voice command for outputting a voice indicating that the one-shot announcement has been made (in the present embodiment, a voice saying “big win!!”) is generated (S1555). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no reserved area for which the reserved notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: No), this process ends.

In this way, when the reservation notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, the reservation pattern display is set to be displayed by the special reservation pattern display for notifying that it is a big hit, so that the player can play the game with expectation that the special reservation pattern display will not be displayed every time a new reservation pattern display is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, when the special reserved symbol display is displayed, the fact that the game is a big win is also announced by voice, so that the gambling spirit of the player can be heightened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game more quickly.

Further, the reserved pattern display is updated and displayed each time the reserved pattern display update processing 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) is executed, so that the reserved pattern display and the special reserved pattern display can be moved and displayed with the completion of the reserved pattern, the correct reserved pattern display can be displayed to the player, and the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the voice for notifying that the one-shot notification has been made is configured to be repeatedly notified while the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, but it is not limited to this, and may be output only once.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by displaying the reserved design display as a special reserved design display, the one-shot notification is notified, but not limited to this, the background may be displayed in a different color or display mode (for example, blinking display).

In this embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) and the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), and outputs various commands such as the winning command, the first notification command, and the second notification command to the sound lamp control device 113. However, not limited to this, the main control device 110 outputs a command indicating various count values (special hit random number counter C1, etc.) acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b to the voice ramp control device 113. 07) and the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914). With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing of the game (detection of winning of various winning ports, etc.) can be performed without missing anything. This configuration can be similarly applied to the first to sixteenth embodiments described above, and can reduce the control load of main controller 110 .

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 123. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which variation patterns are selected separately for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the result of the win/loss determination is notified.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed, the left display area Dm1 that variably displays the first special symbol and the right display area Dm2 that variably displays the second special symbol respectively display related performances, and notify the result of determination of each.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The eighteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that when a specific condition is established in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a variable display mode (hereinafter referred to as a fusion performance) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are related to each other is displayed, and the player is notified of the result of the winning/failure determination.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117(a), the display mode of the fusion effect variation pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. When it is determined by the first special pattern or the second special pattern that the fusion performance variation pattern is selected, the variable display (fusion performance) of the special pattern by the fusion performance variation pattern is started at the timing synchronized with the first special pattern and the second special pattern. As shown in FIG. 117(a), the fusion effect is a display mode in which a ball-throwing competition is performed in the left display area Dm1 displaying the first special symbol and the right display area Dm2 displaying the second special symbol. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1, as a red set, the result of the determination of the first special symbol is indicated, and in the right display area Dm2, as the white set, the result of the determination of the second special symbol is indicated. If the red group wins against the white group in ball throwing, it means that the first special symbol will win big, and if the white group wins against the red group, it means that the second special symbol will win big. On the other hand, when the result of throwing in the red group and the white group is a tie, it indicates that the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both out.

In this way, normally, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2, the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol and the second special symbol are individually variably displayed, but when the fusion effect is determined, the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol and the second special symbol are related to each other, which is different from the normal time, is notified of the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol and the second special symbol are involved. I can.

In addition, since the fusion performance is constituted so as to be easily determined when the result of judging whether the first special pattern or the second special pattern is winning, the player can play the game with a high expectation for the big win when the variable display of the fusion performance is started. Therefore, the player can play the game with anticipation even during the normal time (period when the fusion performance is not displayed) in anticipation that the variable display of the fusion performance will start, and enjoy the game for a long time.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect is the effect of throwing balls, but it is not limited to this, and the distinction between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is eliminated, and if the main character (player) wins the enemy, the effect may be such that the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be a big hit. In such a case, when the fusion performance is started, the partition between the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 disappears, and the performance of one-on-one car race with the enemy is displayed in the upper display area Dm. With this configuration, the player can understand that if the main character's car reaches the finish line faster than the enemy's car, the player will win a big win, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbols (main symbols) as numbers are not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. By constructing in this way, the player can confirm the success/failure determination result even by looking at the main pattern, and can easily recognize whether the performance has notified the failure or the winning.

Alternatively, the main symbols may be displayed in the form of temporary symbols such as "o" and "x" in place of numbers. By configuring in this way, the area for displaying the main symbol can be reduced, and the display area that can be used for the fusion effect can be configured to be larger.

Next, the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a). In the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, an adjustment performance flag 203u10 and a fusion performance execution flag 203u11 are added to each of the reservation areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (the changing data of the first special pattern and the second special pattern).

The adjustment effect flag 203u10, which will be described in detail later, is a flag indicating that the selection of the variation pattern for adjusting the time is pending so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can simultaneously start the variable display. This adjustment performance flag 203u10 is set to ON with respect to a reserved area corresponding to a special symbol that changes to adjust the time in order to execute the fusion performance when it is determined to execute the fusion performance in the fusion performance lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the reservation area shifts due to the digestion of the reservation and the fluctuation of the special symbol ends, it is set to OFF by being overwritten by the data of the newly shifted reservation area. Note that the fused performance means that the variably displayed first special pattern and the second special pattern are started at the same time, and the fused performance variation pattern performing the related variable display in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 is variably displayed together with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is a flag indicating that the execution of the fusion effect is pending. Although the details will be described later, the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON for the reservation area corresponding to the reservation determined to execute the fusion effect when it is determined to execute the fusion effect in the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. On the other hand, each data in the reserved area is shifted by digestion of the reserved, and when the variation of the special symbol is finished, it is set to OFF by being overwritten by the data of the newly shifted reserved area.

With reference to FIG. 118(b), the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. Similar to the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110, the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k has an adjustment effect flag 223k10 and a fusion effect execution flag 223k11 added to each of the reservation areas 1 to 8 and the changing data storage area (the data during change between the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Note that the adjustment effect flag 223k and the fusion effect execution flag 223k11 are the same as the adjustment effect flag 203u10 and the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110 except that they are set to ON based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 119(a) is a diagram schematically showing part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. A fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is added to the other memory area 203v. This fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a counter value acquired when it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed by the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220), which will be described later. In addition, the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is a counter value that is incremented by 1 in the process (S1209) in which the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1209) in the main process (FIG. 33), is incremented to the upper limit value of 99, and is updated to the initial value of 0 when it reaches 100.

Next, FIG.119(b) is the figure which showed the fusion production|presentation fluctuation pattern list memorize|stored in ROM202 of MPU201 of the main control unit 110 in this embodiment. This fusion effect variation pattern list is a diagram collectively representing the fusion effect variation patterns added to the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special loss variation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, respectively. This fusion performance variation pattern is allocated and stored at a specific address in the special win variation pattern table 202d and the special loss variation pattern table 202e. Specifically, a variation pattern in which the first special symbol wins the throw-in performance is stored at the top address of a special winning variation pattern table 202d for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol as a fusion performance variation pattern selected when the result of the determination of the success or failure of the first special symbol is a win and the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a loss. In addition, a variation pattern in which the second special symbol loses in the throwing performance is stored at the head address of the special outlier variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

In addition, as a fusion performance variation pattern selected when the first special symbol is lost and the second special symbol is a result of judging whether or not the winning is successful, a variation pattern in which the first special symbol loses in the throwing performance is stored at the top address of a special failure variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, a variation pattern in which the second special symbol wins in the throwing effect is stored at the top address of the special winning variation pattern table 202e for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, as a fusion performance variation pattern selected in the case of the result of right/wrong determination that the first special symbol is lost and the second special symbol is also failed, a variation pattern of drawing in the throw-in performance is stored at the last address of the special failure variation pattern for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

By configuring in this way, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 decides to execute the fusion performance, it can easily select the fusion performance from the judgment result of the first special pattern and the second special pattern for which the fusion performance is to be executed, and can reduce the control load as compared with the case of selecting using the counter value or the like.

In the present embodiment, the fusion effect selects a fusion effect variation pattern for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the display mode that is variably displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. However, not limited to this, the display mode displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 may be selected as one fusion effect variation pattern based on the combination of the result of the judgment. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the display modes displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 from being deviated from each other. Moreover, the control load of the display control device 114 can be reduced as compared with the case where the fusion effect is displayed separately.

Further, the main controller 110 selects the fusion effect variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and outputs the variation pattern command to the sound lamp control device 113 as in the present embodiment. Then, the audio ramp control device 113 that has received the variation pattern command or the display control device 114 that has received a display command based thereon from the audio ramp control device 113 may perform display control as one variation mode. By configuring in this way, the main controller 110 can select the fusion performance variation pattern by the same control as when selecting the normal variation pattern and output it to the sound lamp control device 113 even when selecting the fusion performance variation pattern, and can suppress complication of the control executed by the main controller 110.例文帳に追加

Further, in the present embodiment, the combined effect variation pattern is stored in the special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special loss variation pattern table 202e, respectively, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a dedicated variation pattern table composed of each combined effect variation pattern may be set and stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, in the eighteenth embodiment, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) of the eighteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) is replaced with a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380). The processes of S301 to S309 in the eighteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 121, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S380), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the eighteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S380). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Further, when it is determined to execute the fusion production, a synchronous variation pattern and a fusion production variation pattern for executing the fusion production are selected.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (FIG. 121, S380), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S671). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S671: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S672). In this embodiment, although not shown, a special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set for the first special symbol, and a special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol is set for the second special symbol. When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S673).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is off (S671: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S674). In this embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is configured to have a special deviation variation pattern table 202e dedicated to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is dedicated to the second special symbol. When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), a time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

It is determined whether the adjustment effect flag 203u10 in the reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u corresponding to the reservation to start fluctuation is ON (S675). When it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is ON (S675: Yes), a synchronous variation pattern corresponding to the variation time stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reserved area is selected, and a first variation pattern command indicating the selected synchronous variation pattern is generated (S676). Here, this synchronous variation pattern is a variation pattern for adjusting the variation start time so that, when it is determined to execute a fusion effect in a fusion effect lottery process (not shown) executed in one process of a fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) or a second look-ahead update process (not shown) described later, the hold of the first special symbol determined to execute the fusion effect and the hold of the second special symbol start fluctuating display at the same timing. Concretely, the variation time is stored by adding the difference time to the selected variation time for the suspension which starts the variation immediately before so as to match the variation start time of the later variation start time with the variation start time of the earlier variation start time among the suspension of the first special pattern and the second special pattern decided to execute the fusion performance.

In addition, the synchronous variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the result of the determination of success or failure is a failure, and is a variation pattern in which the main symbol is variably displayed for a set variation time, and is variably displayed so as to be stopped in a display mode indicating the failure.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is off (S675: No), it is determined whether the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 in the reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u corresponding to the reservation to start fluctuation is set to ON (S677). When it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S677: Yes), the first special pattern and the second special pattern in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to be ON is determined based on the determination result, a fusion effect variation pattern is selected, and a first variation pattern command for notifying the selected fusion effect variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is generated (S678).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S677: No), based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S679).

A variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and a first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated (S680). A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S681). Measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S682).

In this way, by determining whether the adjustment performance flag 203u10 or the fusion performance execution flag 203u11 is set to ON at the time of selecting the variation pattern, the variation pattern is normally selected based on each counter value, and when it is decided to execute the fusion performance, a selection method of the variation pattern different from the usual one is possible, and the selection of the variation pattern can be flexibly executed according to the situation.

In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (not shown) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected for the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (Fig. 121, S380), and the second variation pattern command is generated based on the selected variation pattern. , the same processing is executed, so a detailed description is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the first prefetch update process (S926), which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 122, S926) in the eighteenth embodiment, the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) and S1240 to S1241 are added to the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. The processes from S931 to S935 in the eighteenth embodiment are the same as the processes from S931 to S935 in the first embodiment.

When the process of S934 or S935 ends, the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) is executed. The details of the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) will be described later, but when the selected variation pattern is a winning variation pattern or a super reach, a process for determining whether or not to execute a fusion effect is executed.

Next, after the process of S936 is executed, it is determined whether the rearrangement order is interrupted and renumbered or the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1240). If it is determined that the rearrangement order is interrupted and renumbered or the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1240: Yes), the winning judgment result storage area 203u1 stored in each reservation area, the jackpot stop type storage area 203u2, the variation pattern type storage area 203u4, the variation start time storage area 203u5, and the look-ahead probability variation flag 203u6 are updated, and based on the variation start time, The sort order is renumbered (S1241). Here, when the variation start order is changed due to a newly generated suspension, the game state (probable variation or normal) at the time of variation start may be changed, but even in such a case, the correct rearrangement order (variation start sequence) can be recognized by re-executing the winning/failure determination again in the game state at the time of variation start and updating the selected variation pattern.

Even if it is decided to execute the fusion presentation, the order of starting the fluctuation is changed by selecting the synchronous fluctuation pattern, but even in that case, the winning judgment and the updating of the fluctuation pattern are performed again in the game state when the fluctuation starts, so that the correct fluctuation starting order can be recognized. For a reservation area in which a synchronous variation pattern or a fused presentation variation pattern is selected, the variation pattern is not reselected, and a variation start time or the like is calculated based on the selected synchronous variation pattern or fused presentation variation pattern.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement order is not interrupted and renumbered and the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is off (S1240: Yes), the process of S939 is executed.

By constructing in this way, when it is decided to execute the fusion performance in the fusion performance lottery processing (FIG. 123, S1220), the success/failure judgment is re-executed for each reservation area and the variation pattern is re-selected, so that the accurate variation start order can be re-determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the fusion effect lottery process (S1220), which is one process of the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 122, 926) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing this fusion effect lottery process (S1220).

In the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220), first, among the reservation areas of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110, it is determined whether there is a reservation area in which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1221). When it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is turned off in all of the reserved areas (S1221: No), it is determined whether there is a reserved area with a winning judgment result among the reserved areas of the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u of the main control device 110 (S1222).

In all reserved areas, when it is determined that the success/failure determination result is out (S1222: No), the variation pattern expected to be selected is a variation pattern in which the success/failure determination result is a hit (that is, the first prefetch update process (FIG. 122, S926). It is determined whether the variation pattern was selected in S934 processing) (S1223). When it is determined that the variation pattern expected to be selected is the winning variation pattern (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fusion effect can be executed (S1224). Here, in the present embodiment, the condition as to whether the fusion effect can be executed is that there are two or more holds corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the number of reservations of the first special symbol includes the number of reservations newly generated this time.

Thus, by setting two or more reserved balls for each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern as a condition, one can be set as a reservation for executing the fusion performance variation pattern and the other can be set as a reservation for executing the synchronous variation pattern, and the execution start of the fusion performance can be synchronized between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern expected to be selected is an outlier variation pattern (S1223: No), the variation pattern expected to be selected is a super reach in which the success/failure determination result is out. It is determined (S1225). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern expected to be selected is the super reach (S1225: Yes), the process of S1224 is executed.

When it is determined that the fusion effect can be executed (S1224: Yes), the value of the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is obtained (S1226). It is determined whether or not the acquired counter value is the counter value set as a win (S1227). In this embodiment, the fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 has a counter value of "0 to 99", and the counter value of "0 to 19" is set as a winning counter value.

When it is determined that the obtained counter value is the counter value set for winning (S1227: No), the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON for the reservation area where the fusion effect is executed (S1228). Here, regarding the reservation area for executing the fusion effect, the first special symbol is a reservation area corresponding to the reservation newly generated this time. On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, among the reserved areas of the stored second special symbols, the reserved area whose fluctuation start order is the last is set as the reserved area for executing the fusion effect.

The adjustment performance flag 203u10 is set to ON for the reservation area before the reservation area for which the fusion performance execution flag 203u11 is set to ON, among the reservation areas corresponding to the special pattern whose variation start time is earlier, by comparing the fluctuation start times of the first special pattern and the second special pattern in the reservation area for which the fusion performance execution flag 203u11 is set to ON (S1229).

A difference between the change start times of the reservation areas for which the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is set to ON is calculated. A synchronous variation pattern indicating a time obtained by adding the calculated difference of the variation start time to the variation time of the variation pattern expected to be selected in the reservation area where the adjustment effect flag 203u10 is set to ON is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 (S1330).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fusion effect execution flag 203u11 is on (S1221: Yes), if it is determined that there is a winning pending area (S1222), if the selected variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern other than the super reach (S1223: No and S1225: No), the fusion effect is not executable (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is 2 below) (S1224: No), and if it is determined that the value of the acquired fusion effect lottery counter 203v10 is an outlier counter value (S1227: No), this process ends.

In this embodiment, when the fusion performance execution flag 203u11 is set to ON in any of the reservation areas (that is, the execution of the fusion performance is already decided), the processing of whether or not to execute the fusion performance is not performed, so the continuous execution of the fusion performance can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting tired of the fusion performance due to frequent occurrence of the fusion performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when there is a holding area with a winning judgment result in any of the holding areas (excluding the holding area corresponding to the newly generated holding), the fusion performance is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the execution start time of the fusion effect from being shifted due to the resumption timing of the temporarily stopped special symbol or the like due to the big winning game.

Further, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern expected to be selected is the winning variation pattern or the losing super reach, it is determined by lottery whether to execute the fusion performance, so that the fusion performance variation pattern becomes a variation pattern that is likely to be selected when the success/failure determination result is a win, and the player can have a high expectation for the winning when the fusion performance is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the fusion effect will not be executed, and can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the fusion performance is determined by satisfying a predetermined condition, and furthermore, by obtaining a counter value and conducting a lottery, so that frequent execution of the fusion performance can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the fusion performance early.

Further, in this embodiment, as a condition for executing the fusion performance, the number of held balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be two or more, respectively, so that it is possible to set a synchronous variation pattern to match the timing of executing the fusion performance, and it is possible to easily match the timing of executing the fusion performance between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) is configured to be executed when the game ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. However, it may be configured to be executed at another timing. The timing of executing the fusion effect lottery process (FIG. 123, S1220) may be appropriately set, but specifically, for example, an RTC may be provided so that it is executed at a predetermined set time.

By constructing in this way, the fusion performance is executed by lottery at predetermined time intervals, and by adjusting the execution start time and the lottery probability, a game that keeps the player from getting bored can be provided. In addition, by informing the player of the time for drawing lots for the fusion performance in advance by the third pattern display device 81 or the like, the player can play the game expecting the time, and the player can enjoy playing the game for a long time.

Although the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is two or more as a condition for executing the fusion performance, it is not limited to this and may be three or more. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the fusion effect, and to entertain the player more.

In addition, in this embodiment, by setting one of the holding balls to the synchronous variation pattern, the timing of executing the fusion effect is synchronized, but not limited to this, the variation time of the special symbol during variation may be extended or shortened for synchronization.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fusion performance is configured to synchronize the fluctuation start times of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, but the fluctuation start times are not limited to this, and the fluctuation of the special pattern that starts the fluctuation is not synchronized. You may comprise so that a fusion production may be performed at the timing which became the start. Such a configuration eliminates the need for processing for synchronizing the fluctuation start times, and the control load on main controller 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to start execution of the fusion effect at a synchronized timing, it is configured to synchronize with the synchronous variation pattern, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to delay the timing of starting variation. By configuring in this way, control processing for synchronization can be reduced, and the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the fusion presentation of the present embodiment is configured so as to display the variation modes related to the first special pattern and the second special pattern, respectively, so that the player can play the game with high expectation that either one of the special patterns will bring a big hit. In addition, the effects of both special symbols can be seen in an easy-to-understand manner, and an easy-to-understand game effect can be provided to the player.

The second look-ahead update process (not shown), which is one process of the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), is the same as the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 122, S926) except that it is a process related to the second special symbol. Detailed description is omitted.

In the present embodiment, when it is predicted that the winning variation pattern or the losing super reach variation pattern will be selected, the configuration is such that the fusion effect is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this and may be as follows. When the winning variation pattern or the losing super reach is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) of the first embodiment, and the voice ramp control device 113 receives the first variation pattern command, the display control device 114 is controlled to expand the area of the display area for displaying the winning variation pattern or the losing super reach variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 117 (b).

With this configuration, the player can easily recognize the display area to which attention should be paid, and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the display area is enlarged when the variation pattern is likely to be selected in the event of a big win, the variation mode becomes easy to see, and it is possible to prevent the trouble of overlooking the variation mode of winning by paying attention to the variation of the other special pattern. In this embodiment, when the winning variation pattern or the losing super reach variation pattern is displayed in both display areas, and when the variation starts at the same time, control is performed to prohibit expansion of the display area. In addition, when the timing of start of variation is different, by changing the size of the enlarged display area first to the normal size (equal area of the display area), it is possible to recognize that the variation pattern which is easily selected in the case of a big win is selected in both. Therefore, when the display area is changed to the normal display area after the display area is enlarged and before the fluctuation is stopped, the player can play the game with a feeling of expectation for a larger jackpot (expectation for obtaining two consecutive wins) and increase interest in the game.

Based on the time stored in the change start time storage area 203u5, the change start order of each reservation area in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is renumbered. With this configuration, the player can rearrange the reserved pattern display in the order of starting the variation by operating the frame button 22 even during the variable probability chance game, and the player can recognize the correct order of starting the variation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable probability chance game is executed, it is configured so that it can be executed when there is no hit such as a variable probability big win in the reserved area. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the players from being confused by other big wins when the variable probability chance game is started.

In the present embodiment, the synchronous variation pattern is selected for the reservation stored immediately before the reservation area for executing the fusion performance, so that the player can recognize that the fusion performance is started by the performance of the synchronization variation pattern, and can be prevented from overlooking the fusion performance. Therefore, the player can prepare in advance for viewing the fusion effect.

In this embodiment, since the odd chance game is executed in the high-probability game state, the game can be set so as to be more advantageous to the player in the constitution in which the first special pattern and the second special pattern are separately drawn. Therefore, the player can enjoy more enjoyment in the high-probability game state compared to a gaming machine in which one special symbol is sequentially displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the fusion performance based on the selection of a variation pattern of a big win or a variation pattern of a super-reach that results in a loss in one of the special symbols. For example, when a big win is determined, it may be configured such that a fusion effect is executed, and the type of the big win is determined by a fluctuation mode of the fusion effect. Specifically, based on the determination of the 15R normal jackpot in the first special symbol, the fusion effect is executed, and in the throwing effect shown in FIG. 117(a), if the red group in the left display area Dm1 where the first special pattern is displayed wins, the 15R normal jackpot wins, and on the other hand, if the white group in the right display area Dm2 where the second special symbol is displayed wins, the 15R variable big win is announced, and the red group wins. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the fusion effect. In addition, not only the expectation for the big win but also the expectation for the probability variable big win can be given to the player. In such a constitution, jackpots with different numbers of rounds are set, and for example, a constitution may be adopted in which either a 15R jackpot or a 5R jackpot wins, or a constitution may be adopted in which either one of a different amount of profit given to other players is awarded.

In addition, in the second look-ahead update process (not shown) which is one process of the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 129, S926) only differs in that it is changed to the process related to the second special symbol, and the same process is executed, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the 19th embodiment, the variation start timings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are synchronized to start the fusion effect, but in the modification of the 19th embodiment, the variation start timings are not particularly synchronized. Concretely, first, in the fusion performance of the special symbols which starts to fluctuate, the fusion performance is executed first, and when the fusion performance of the special symbols to be started thereafter is started, the fusion performance is started so as to interrupt the fusion performance which has been started first, and the winning/failure determination result is notified by the variable display mode related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the fusion effect, the player in the red corner displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the player in the blue corner displayed in the right display area Dm2 compete for a boxing match. In the first look-ahead update process (not shown) or the second look-ahead update process (not shown) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the suspension determined as winning is established in either one, it is decided to execute the fusion performance. Next, the suspension for executing the fusion effect is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol (one is the suspension notified as winning). Here, if the discriminated winning type is the 15R probability variable big win, the player is notified that the 15R probability variable big win is granted if the player in the display area corresponding to the special pattern (for example, the player in the red corner in the case of the first special pattern) wins.

In the variable display mode in which the fluctuation start is earlier among the suspensions determined to execute the fusion performance, first, until the other special pattern starts to fluctuate, the characters ``I want a challenger!'' are displayed, and the fusion performance is started in a state where a boxing player is displayed. On the other hand, when the variation of the special symbol that executes the fusion effect that starts later is started, the boxing player is also displayed, and the effect of starting the boxing match is executed. Then, in accordance with the fluctuation end time of the winning special symbol, the boxing player corresponding to the winning special symbol wins.

As a result, the control load of the main controller 110 can be reduced because the process for executing the process for synchronizing the fluctuation start time is not required in order to execute the fusion performance between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

In addition, all the variation modes performed by the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used as the display mode of the fusion effect. In such a constitution, if the boxing matches are out of line with each other, the boxing match is displayed, and when the combined performance variation pattern determined as winning is selected, the player corresponding to the special pattern wins. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize the lottery result of the first special symbol and the second special symbol more easily.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 selects the fusion effect, but the main controller 110 may determine the variation time, output a signal indicating the variation time, and a signal indicating the result of the determination of suitability to the audio lamp control device 113, determine whether the sound lamp control device 113 is in a state where the fusion effect can be executed, and display the fusion effect based on the variation time and the result of the suitability determination. By configuring in this way, it becomes unnecessary for main controller 110 to execute a lottery as to whether or not to execute the fusion effect, and the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the fusion effect by looking at the state of the number of pending games. Specifically, when the reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are equally stored, the fusion effect is executed. Furthermore, if the combination performance is executed based on the fact that the variation patterns of the same variation time are alternately stored for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, respectively, the execution and the end of the fusion performance are easily matched between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 130. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the variation patterns are determined by lottery and the respective lottery games are executed regardless of the mutual win/loss determination results for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th embodiment, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed, when the game state is a high probability game state (probability variable game state), when it is predicted that one of the special symbols will trigger a transition to a low probability game state (hereinafter referred to as a normal jackpot) will be won (when it is determined in advance before the fluctuation starts), the time until the jackpot starts is extended, and the other is extended during that time. A game is executed with a performance as to whether or not a player can win a probability variable jackpot in the special pattern of .

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The nineteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that when a normal jackpot is won in a first special pattern or a second special pattern in a high-probability game state, the occurrence of the jackpot is delayed, and in the meantime, when the other special pattern wins the jackpot, the jackpot is extended so as to be executed after the normal jackpot.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a description will be given of an effect display mode in the probability variable chance game as to whether or not the high probability game state displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment can be extended. When it is determined by variation change processing (FIG. 130, S1250) to be described later that a normal jackpot is won in a first special symbol (left display area Dm1) during a high probability game state, a countdown performance command is set, and a performance display mode indicating the start of a variable probability chance game is displayed in the left display area Dm1. In this embodiment, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 124, a balloon is displayed in the left display area Dm1, and is variably displayed as if it is inflated with the lapse of time. In addition, when the balloon bursts, it is indicated by characters that the high probability game state (probability variation) ends.

When the effect display mode indicating the variable chance game is displayed, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has been won with the special symbol of the side where the balloon is displayed. The game is played with the expectation that the probability variable jackpot can be won before the jackpot game is started. With such a configuration, a player can play not only a big win but also a game to determine whether or not a probability variable big win can be won in a short period of time, and can play a game with a different target from the normal time.

The variable display of the first special symbol is displayed small at the center side position of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. By constructing in this way, it can be seen that the first special symbol is variably displayed according to the completion of the reserved symbol display, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the lottery game is being executed. In addition, every time the display of reserved patterns is completed, the player can recognize that the start of the normal jackpot is approaching, and each time the displayed first special pattern stops fluctuating, the player can enjoy a feeling of throbbing, so that the taste of the game can be increased.

When the normal big win is determined by the first special pattern without winning the probability variable big win by the second special pattern, the performance display mode of bursting the balloon is displayed as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 124, and the stop pattern of the special pattern showing the normal big win is displayed. In addition, although not shown, when a variable probability big win is won in the second special symbol, a stop symbol of a special symbol indicating a normal big win is displayed without bursting the balloon. As a result, the player can recognize that after the normal big win, the probability variable big win is started with the second special pattern because the special pattern showing the normal big win is stopped and displayed without breaking the balloon. Therefore, the player plays the game in the expectation that the balloon will not burst, and can be more interested in the game.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the balloon is not broken to notify the winning of the probability variable jackpot with the second special symbol, but not limited to this, for example, the player may be notified by displaying characters such as "the probability variation continues!" Further, the presentation is not limited to the presentation of whether or not the balloon will burst, and other presentation display modes may be used.

Next, the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a diagram schematically showing part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. A first variation change flag 203v11 and a second variation change flag 203v12 are added to the other memory area 203v.

The first variation change flag 203v11 is a flag indicating that the winning of the normal jackpot in the first special symbol is predicted (determined prior to the start of variation) when the game state is a high probability game state (probability variable game state). The first fluctuation change flag 203v11 is set to ON in the process of S1254 of the fluctuation change process (FIG. 130, S1250) which is one process of the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 129, S926) to be described later. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the start of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot. It should be noted that it is set to off in the initialized state when the power is turned on. The flag is also backed up by the backup that accompanies the power-off, and is loaded in the start-up process (FIG. 34) to return to the state before the power-off.

In addition, the second variation change flag 203v12 is a flag indicating that it is predicted that the normal jackpot is won in the second special symbol (determined prior to the start of variation) when the game state is a high probability game state (probability variable game state). The second fluctuation change flag 203v12 is set to ON in the same manner as the first fluctuation change flag 203v11 in the fluctuation change process (not shown) of the second look-ahead update process (not shown), and is set to OFF when the jackpot game associated with the normal jackpot is started. Since it is only different from the first variation change flag 203v11 in that it relates to the second special symbol, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, part of the special hit variation pattern table 202d and the special loss variation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described.

The upper diagram in FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the special per variation pattern table 202d for time saving/probability variation of the special per variation pattern table 202d. A per variation change pattern and a per extension variation pattern are added to the special per variation pattern table 202d for time saving/probability variation in the first embodiment.

The winning variation change pattern is a variation pattern that is selected on the condition that, when the game state is the high-probability gaming state and a normal jackpot is won, the result of winning/failure determination is winning. The variation time is set to 180 seconds, which is longer than the other variation times. Therefore, it takes time until the stop symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed, and during that time, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to perform a plurality of win/fail determinations with the other special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the other special symbol will not lead to a probability variable big win during that time. In addition, even if it is a normal jackpot instead of a probability variable jackpot, it is possible to award more jackpots to the player, and the player can enjoy the game more.

The winning extension variation pattern is a variation pattern to be selected when winning a normal big win or a probability variable big win with one special pattern when it is already predicted that a normal big win will be won with the other special pattern in a high-probability game state. This extended variation pattern has a variation time of 300 seconds, which is longer than the other variation patterns. In addition, the time until the normal jackpot won with the other special symbol during the variable probability chance game is fixed and stopped is 240 seconds at maximum in the variation of the reserved special symbol. This is because, when the normal jackpot is the 4th reserved special symbol, the reserves 1 to 3 are variably displayed in a 20-second deviation change change pattern to be described later, and the normal jackpot has a fluctuation time of 180 seconds.

By constructing in this manner, in a high-probability game state, when one special pattern wins a normal big win and then another special pattern wins a big win, the big win always starts the one normal big win game after the one normal big win game. Therefore, when the hit in the other special symbol is the probability variable jackpot, the normal jackpot is executed, and the state shifts to the low probability game state. After that, it is possible to shift to the high probability game state again by the probability variable jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high-probability gaming state for a longer period of time.

The lower figure in FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a special deviation variation pattern table 202e for time saving/probability variation of the special deviation variation pattern table 202e. The time-saving/probable-variable special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the present embodiment has a deviation variation change pattern and a deviation extension variation pattern added to the time-saving/probability-variation special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the first embodiment.

The loss variation change pattern is a variation pattern to be selected when, when it is predicted that a normal jackpot win is won in a high-probability game state, the holding stored in the reserve area corresponding to the special pattern that wins the normal jackpot is changed under the condition that the result of winning/failure judgment is a loss. This outlier variation change pattern is configured with a variation time of 20 seconds, which is relatively long compared to other variation patterns. Therefore, when the reservation that is predicted to win the normal jackpot is established, if there are many reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol, this loss variation change pattern is executed for the reservation. Therefore, the variation change pattern is executed a maximum of 3 times, delaying the start of the normal jackpot by 60 seconds at maximum. Therefore, the delayed time can increase the possibility of winning a big win with the other special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more chances to win a big win.

The loss extension variation pattern is a variation pattern selected when the win/loss determination result of one special symbol is a failure when it is predicted that the other special symbol wins a normal jackpot in a high-probability game state. This deviated extension variation pattern has a variation time of 3 seconds, which is relatively shorter than the other variation patterns. Therefore, one lottery cycle can be shortened, and more lottery games can be executed with one special symbol. Therefore, more lottery games can be played in a short period of time during the variable probability chance game, and the player can be given more chances to win a big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, in the nineteenth embodiment, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 127, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment, with the addition of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 (FIG. 128, S390) instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 18, S310). The processes of S301 to S309 in the nineteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 128, in the 19th embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (S390), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 127, S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (S390). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Also, in the high-probability gaming state, when it is predicted that the second special symbol will usually result in a big hit, the winning extension variation pattern or the loss extension variation pattern is selected based on the result of the success/failure determination. On the other hand, in the high-probability game state with the first special symbol, when it is predicted that a normal jackpot will be achieved, a hit variation change pattern or a loss variation change pattern is selected based on the success/failure determination result.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (FIG. 128, S390), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S821). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S821: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S822). In this embodiment, although not shown, a special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set for the first special symbol, and a special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol is set for the second special symbol. When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. In addition, when the game state is in the high probability game state or the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (upper diagram in FIG. 126) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S823).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S821: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S824). In this embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is configured to have a special deviation variation pattern table 202e dedicated to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is dedicated to the second special symbol. When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is in the high probability game state or the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability special deviation variation pattern table 202e (Fig. 126 lower figure) is set.

It is determined whether or not the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (that is, it is predicted that the second special symbol will be a normal jackpot during the high-probability gaming state) (S825). When it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is on (S825: Yes), the extension variation pattern of the selected variation pattern table is selected, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the extension variation pattern to the audio lamp control device 113 is generated (S826).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (S825: No), it is determined whether or not the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to on (that is, it is predicted that a normal jackpot will occur during the high probability game state with the first special symbol) (S827). When it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 is set to ON (S827: Yes), a variation change pattern in the selected variation pattern table is selected, and a first variation pattern command for notifying the variation change pattern to the audio lamp control device 113 is generated (S828).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 is off (S827: No), based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S829).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, a variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated (S830). A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S831). Measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S832).

In this way, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is predicted to be a normal jackpot during the high-probability gaming state, a variable probability chance game is executed. During the probability variable chance game, when it is predicted that the second special symbol will usually bring a big hit, the failure extension variation pattern is selected for the variation of the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol, so that the lottery game is played in a short time of 3 seconds, and the cycle for starting the lottery game can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to execute more lottery games in the first special symbol, and to provide the player with more chances to win a lottery game that will result in a big win. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that the player will win a big win.

In addition, in the second special pattern, the normal jackpot to shift to the low-probability game state is won, so if the probability-variable jackpot can be won in the first special pattern, the probability-variable jackpot is executed after the normal jackpot in the second special pattern according to the winning extension variation pattern, so the game state shifted to the low-probability game state can be shifted again to the high-probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play for a longer period of time in a high-probability game state. Therefore, the player can be provided with an opportunity to win more jackpots.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the variation time of 300 seconds is used as the winning extension variation pattern, but it is not limited to this, and the variation time may be set based on the calculation of the time until the normal jackpot of the second special symbol is started. By constructing in this way, the time until the first special symbol jackpot starts can be shortened, and the player can be prevented from watching the effect of a uselessly long fluctuation time.

In addition, when it is predicted that the first special symbol will usually result in a big hit, the loss variation change pattern is selected for the suspension of the first special symbol that has been suspended until then. By configuring in this way, the same variation pattern as usual is displayed even during the variable probability chance game, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game. Also, since the number of variation patterns can be reduced, the capacity of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the start of the normal jackpot is delayed by selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. However, the start of variation may be delayed by a predetermined time. Specifically, in a high-probability game state, when it is predicted that a normal jackpot will be won, the time for delaying the start of variation is determined by lottery, and the start of variation may be delayed during that time. By constructing in this way, the player can play more lottery games with the other special pattern while the variation of the special pattern is stopped (delayed), and can concentrate on the game because he wants to win a probability variable big win. In addition, in the variable probability chance game, the start of variation of one of the special symbols is stopped (delayed), and it is possible to indicate to the player that a more special game is being played.

Also in the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the same process as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 is executed with only the difference regarding the second special symbol, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 129, the first prefetch update process (S926), which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) in the nineteenth embodiment, a change change process (FIG. 130, S926) and S1130 to S1131 are added to the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment. The processes from S931 to S932 in the nineteenth embodiment are the same as the processes from S931 to S932 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S932, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the normal jackpot (S932: No), the fluctuation change process (FIG. 130, S1250) is executed. The variation changing process (FIG. 130, S1250) will be described later, but when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, if the variable probability chance game is not in progress, it is a process for setting the variable probability chance game.

The process of S933 of the nineteenth embodiment is the same as the process of S933 of the first embodiment. When the processing of S933 ends, it is determined whether the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (that is, whether the second special symbol is predicted to be a normal jackpot) (S1130). When it is determined that the second variable variable change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1130: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted probability variable jackpot will be a win even in the normal game state (S1131). When it is determined that the win is achieved even in the normal game state (S1131: Yes), a countdown effect avoidance command is generated (S1132).

This countdown effect avoidance command is a command for keeping the balloons displayed in the variable probability game to be displayed without bursting. A balloon is displayed in a second special pattern (right display area Dm2), and a probability variable chance game is performed to determine whether a probability variable big win can be obtained in a first special pattern (left display area Dm1), and when a probability variable big win is predicted in the first special pattern, the balloon is switched to a performance display mode in which the balloon is not broken in order to notify that the probability variable chance game can be obtained. Thereby, the player can recognize that a variable probability big win has been obtained in the variable probability chance game.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (S1130: No), or if it is determined that it is out in the normal game state (S1131: No), the process of S1132 is skipped and the process of S934 is executed.

In this way, in the process of S1131, by determining whether or not a win is possible even in the normal game state, there is a possibility that the first special symbol jackpot is executed after the second special symbol jackpot during the probability variable chance game. In that case, a lottery may not be achieved by lottery in a low-probability game state, but in such a case, the countdown performance avoidance command is not set, so that the player is not informed that the probability variable big win has been won with the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent incorrect information from being reported to the player.

Since the processing from S934 to S939 in the nineteenth embodiment is the same as the processing from S934 to S939 in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

Thus, in the first look-ahead updating process (FIG. 129, S926) executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, it is configured to set whether or not the suspension of the probability variable big win in the probability variable chance game is established, so that the performance can be changed based on the establishment of the suspension, and the player can be prevented from being notified of wrong information.

Also, the setting of the countdown effect avoidance command may be configured so that the sound lamp control device 113 that has received the winning command sets the command based on the winning command. With this configuration, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the variation change process (S1250), which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the change change process (S1250).

In the variation change process (FIG. 130, S1250), first, it is determined whether the game state is a high probability game state (probability variation game state) (S1251). Whether or not the game state is the high probability game state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag 203m of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 is set to ON.

When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is off (S1251: No), the variation pattern is predicted based on the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter from the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state at the start of variation, and stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the corresponding reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1252).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is on (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is set to on (that is, whether the probability variation chance game is in progress) (S1253). When it is determined that the first fluctuation change flag 203v11 or the second fluctuation change flag 203v12 is set to ON (S1253: Yes), the process of S1252 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation change flag 203v11 or the second variation change flag 203v12 is off (that is, the variable probability chance game is not in progress) (S1253: No), the first variation change change flag 203v11 is set to on (S1254). The winning variation change pattern is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reservation area of the corresponding rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1255).

The time until the variation of the set winning variation change pattern ends is calculated (S1256). The time until the variation of this winning variation change pattern ends is the value obtained by adding the result obtained by multiplying the remaining variation time of the currently varying first special symbol by the number of suspensions of the first special symbol (the number not including the suspension that becomes a normal winning this time) by 20 seconds, which is the variation time of the off variation change pattern, and further adding 180 seconds, which is the variation time of the winning variation change pattern.

A countdown effect command is set based on the time calculated in the process of S1256 (S1257). When the countdown performance command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 so that the performance display mode in which the balloon bursts is displayed after the calculated time. By constructing in this way, even if the second special pattern does not hold the variable probability big win in the variable probability chance game, the main controller 110 does not need to re-notify the command to execute the performance of popping the balloon at the end of the variable probability chance game, and the control load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 129, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the process of S1131, it is determined whether the hit is determined even in the normal game state (low probability game state) (that is, whether it is a jackpot random number in the low probability game state). (not having a common value). By configuring in this way, in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 129, S926), it is possible to generate a countdown avoidance command by determining whether it is a random number that is determined to be hit in a low-probability gaming state. Therefore, the control processing amount of main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the normal jackpot is won in the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the high-probability gaming state, the start is delayed, and an effect is performed in which the balloon notifying that the delay is broken is executed. By configuring in this way, the remaining time of the high-probability game state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently while discerning the time.

In addition, after the normal jackpot is delayed and the countdown performance is started, the number of execution times of the lottery game of the other special symbol may be counted, and when the countdown is 0 or the balloon is broken, the number of times may be reported to the player. By constructing in this way, it is possible to evaluate how much the player could effectively utilize the high-probability game state to play the game. Further, each reference value (for example, 0 to 10 times, 11 to 20 times, etc.) is set for the number of lotteries executed with the other special symbol after the start of the countdown performance, and the rank corresponding to each reference value may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily evaluate the game in the high-probability game state based on the displayed rank.

In the present embodiment, the normal jackpot is delayed during the high-probability gaming state, and the countdown effect (in this embodiment, whether the balloon is broken or not) is executed. Specifically, if the normal jackpot is delayed in the first special symbol, the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured so as to notify the player by displaying characters such as ``Let the second special symbol start to fluctuate more!'' or ``Aim for the right starting port (second starting port 63b)!

Next, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the nineteenth embodiment, the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b are alternately formed by the sorting device 630. FIG. However, in the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment, the first starting port 63a is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second starting port 63b is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. FIG. With such a configuration, a game ball can be made to win a prize in both starting ports by operating the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a player to reach the upper center position of the variable display device unit 80 and shoot the game ball so that the game ball is sorted to the left side and the right side of the variable display device unit 80 and flows down. In addition, if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is adjusted and the game ball is shot with such strength that the game ball reaches the upper left side of the variable display device 80, the game ball can easily flow down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (the amount of the game ball flowing down to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 increases), so that the game ball can easily enter the first start port 63a (or can reduce the win of the second start port 63b). In addition, if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to shoot the game ball with such strength that the game ball reaches the upper right portion of the variable display device 80 (or the return rubber 69), the game ball can easily flow down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (the amount of the game ball flowing down to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 increases). can be).

In the nineteenth embodiment, in the process of S1257 of the variation change process (FIG. 130, S1250) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the countdown effect command is set to execute the notification as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the modified example of the 19th embodiment, the main controller 110 does not set the countdown effect command, and outputs the determination result of the hit/fail determination condition established and the information of the selected variation pattern as the winning command. In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, it is determined whether or not the suspension of selecting the winning variation change pattern is established, and the control for setting the notification mode as shown in FIG. 124 is performed. In addition, as a notification mode, a special symbol different from the special symbol in which the variation change pattern is selected (for example, if the variation change pattern is selected in the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is notified to the player to preferentially start the variation. As a specific notification mode, for example, the characters "Aim for the left start opening (first start opening 63a)!" are displayed in the right display area Dm2.

By executing a lottery as to whether or not to set the notification mode, it is possible to set whether or not to notify the player, thereby suppressing an excessive advantage for the player. The lottery may be based on a set value of a setting means that can be set by the game parlor, or may be drawn with a predetermined probability by obtaining a random value, or may be drawn based on the past state of the game machine's ball output (the number of big wins, the number of difference balls, the number of fluctuations from the current big win, etc.). By doing so, the profit given to the player can be adjusted based on the state of the gaming machine and the profit the player is getting. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a profit within the presumed profit range.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to inform that the normal jackpot for shifting from the high-probability game state to the normal game state is won, but it is not limited to this, and when a jackpot with a small number of rounds is determined, it may be notified, or when a win that does not give time saving is won, it may be notified. In addition, not limited to winning, it may be configured to notify in advance based on the fact that it is determined that the player is to be shifted from an advantageous state to a disadvantageous state.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 140. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, a case has been explained in which the variation patterns are determined by lottery and respective lottery games are executed for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, regardless of the mutual win/loss determination result.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment, when the reserved balls judged to be a big win overlap in the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is determined whether the big win is a normal big win or a variable probability big win, and control is executed so as to start the normal big win before the variable probability big win.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The twentieth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that, when a first special pattern and a second special pattern are held to become a jackpot, if one is a normal jackpot and the other is a variable probability jackpot, the variable probability jackpot is the one that starts the jackpot game later than the normal jackpot.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the notification effect during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. The upper diagram in FIG. 131 shows one of the rounds during the jackpot game. Every time each round is started, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 131, the third pattern display device 81 displays the characters "Press the button repeatedly!" This is an effect for informing the player in advance whether or not there is a winning ball among the reserved balls currently stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b by repeatedly hitting the button.

When the player operates (presses down in this embodiment) the frame button 22, a predetermined lottery is executed, the lottery is won, and if the winning ball is stored, the characters "one more big win" are displayed, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated and the predetermined lottery is not won, or even if the lottery is won, the winning ball is not stored in the reserved balls, the character "Unfortunately!!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 131(b).

By operating the frame button 22, the player can know in advance whether or not another big win can be obtained early. Also, a player who does not want to know in advance does not operate the frame button 22 so that the information on whether or not there is a hit in the reserved ball is not displayed, so that the player can select a game according to his/her preference.

This notification effect is displayed each time a round is started. It should be noted that once it is reported that there is a hit in the reserved ball, it will not be reported from the next round. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game with anticipation that there will be a hit in the reserved balls until the final round, and can be prevented from becoming bored during the big win game.

Next, the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132(a). In this rearrangement pending storage area 203u, an overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is added to the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the first embodiment.

The overlapping adjustment flag 203u12 is a flag indicating that the special pattern of the reserved ball which becomes a probability variable big hit is a reserved ball for which an extended variation pattern or a shortened variation pattern is selected so that a big winning game is started later than the special pattern of the reserved ball which is a normal big hit when the reserved balls to be hit are overlapped in the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

The overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON for the reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u determined to select the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern in the process of S1280 of the first overlap per process (FIG. 136, S1270), which will be described later. On the other hand, the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to OFF by being overwritten with new data at the start of the next fluctuation after the holding ball is digested, the holding area is shifted to the changing data storage area where the changing data is stored, and then the fluctuation ends. Note that the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is backed up when the power is turned off, and is restored to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This flag is set to OFF when the gaming machine is initialized. Although the description and illustration of the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 are omitted this time, in the second overlap hit process (not shown), which is one process of the second look-ahead update process (not shown), the difference is that the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 of the reservation area for the first overlap hit process and the second special symbol is set to on, but is set to on.

The other memory area 223m set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132(b). FIG. 132(b) is a diagram schematically showing part of the other memory area 223m. A confirmation notification flag 223m1 and a confirmation notification counter 223m2 are added to the other memory area 223m in the first embodiment.

The fixed notification flag 223m1 is a flag indicating that it has been notified that there is a retained ball that will become a hit in the retained balls in the notification effect during the big win. Specifically, in the jackpot during effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, after the confirmation display for notifying that there is a held ball that will be a hit among the held balls, it is set to ON in the processing of S1581. In addition, it is set to OFF when the jackpot ends.

The determination notification counter 223m2 is a storage area for storing a counter value that is incremented by 1 each time the effect process (FIG. 140, S1570) is executed during the big hit. The fixed notification counter is set to the initial value "0" when the power is turned on, incremented to the upper limit value "255", and then set to the initial value "0" when 1 is added. This fixed notification counter is a counter value for determining whether or not to notify whether or not there is a retained ball that will be a hit in the retained balls in the notification effect during the big win. Incidentally, the winning counter value is set for each big winning round. In this embodiment, a value of "0 to 1" is set as a win counter value for 1R to 10R, and a value of "0 to 9" is set as a win counter value for 11R to 15R.

By constructing in this manner, a lottery is drawn each time the player operates the frame button 22, so that the timing of notification can be changed for each big win, and the player can be prevented from feeling bored. In addition, if the lottery is not won, the notification is not executed even if there is a hit among the reserved balls, so that a state can be created in which the notification is not always performed, the player can be surprised by a big win later, and the player can continue to have expectations even if the notification is not made. A lottery is drawn each time the frame switch 22 is operated, so that the more the frame switch 22 is operated, the higher the probability of being notified, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game by operating the frame switch 22.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the round progresses and the lottery probability increases five times after the 11th round, it becomes easy to win the lottery even when the lottery is not won until the 11th round, and the player can be prevented from giving up if he or she does not win (is not notified). Therefore, the player can participate in the notification effect with the expectation that it will be notified after 11R.

In this embodiment, the winning count value is configured to be variable between 1R to 10R and 11R to 15R, but the configuration is not limited to this, and may be changed for each round, or the winning probability may be determined by lottery at the start of each round. By configuring in this way, the player is notified of the winning of the hold at a timing unexpected by the player, and the interest in the game can be further increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, in the twentieth embodiment, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 133, S203) of the nineteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 18, S310) is replaced with the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 10 (FIG. 134, S410). The processing of S301 to S309 in the twentieth embodiment is the same as the processing of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 134, in the twentieth embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S410), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 133, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S410). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, when the result of judging whether or not the special symbol that starts to fluctuate is winning, if the reserved ball of the second special symbol wins, the extension variation pattern or the shortening variation pattern is selected so that the normal jackpot game is started first.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S840). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S840: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S841). In this embodiment, although not shown, a special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set for the first special symbol, and a special winning variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol is set for the second special symbol. When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S842).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S840: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S843). In this embodiment, although not shown, the first special symbol is configured to have a special deviation variation pattern table 202e dedicated to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is dedicated to the second special symbol. When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is in the high probability game state or the time saving (the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

It is determined whether or not the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u corresponding to the pending to start fluctuation is set to ON (S844). When it is determined that the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S844), a variation pattern stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the rearrangement reservation storage area is selected, and the first variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern.

Here, the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u becomes the set extended variation pattern or shortened variation pattern in the first overlap per process (FIG. 136, S1270), which will be described later. In addition, the extended variation pattern and the shortened variation pattern are variation patterns that are stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the main symbol is variably displayed during the set variation time, and the success/failure determination result is notified based on the lapse of the set variation time.

The shortened variation pattern is a variation pattern for controlling (adjusting) so as to start the normal jackpot of the first special pattern which starts to fluctuate this time before the probability variable jackpot stored in the reserve of the second special pattern. On the other hand, the extended variation pattern is a variation pattern for controlling (adjusting) so as to start the probability variable big win of the first special symbol to start varying this time after the normal big win stored in the reservation of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S844: No), based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S846). Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, a variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated (S847). A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S848). Measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S849).

By constructing in this way, if the lottery game of the first special pattern to be started to fluctuate is a probability variable big win, adjustment can be made so that the big win game is started after the normal big win of the second special pattern. On the other hand, if the lottery game of the first special symbol to start fluctuation is a normal big win, adjustment can be made so that the big win game is started before the probability variable big win of the second special symbol. Therefore, even when the normal big win and the variable probability big win overlap with the first special pattern and the second special pattern among the reserved balls, the variable probability big win is executed after the normal big win is executed, so that the high probability game state can be maintained for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to award more jackpots to the player.

In the present embodiment, the variation time of the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is determined in the first overlapping per process (FIG. 136, S1270) executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 63a. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to calculate and determine the variation time in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (FIG. 134, S410).

Further, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the variable time, the variable probability big win is executed later than the normal big win, but the variable probability big win may be started later by delaying the start of the variation of the variable probability big win by a predetermined time. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize that the big win will be executed further by delaying the start of the fluctuation, and can recognize the subsequent big win at an early stage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the extension variation pattern and the shortening variation pattern are newly set, but a variation pattern in which the normal jackpot is displayed first may be selected from the existing variation pattern table. In such a configuration, a variation pattern with a short variation time and a variation pattern with a long variation time may be set in advance in an existing variation pattern table.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, the first prefetch update process (S926), which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first read-ahead update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment, each process of S1260 to S1261 and the first duplication hit process (FIG. 136, S1270) are added to the first read-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment.

In the process of S1260, it is determined whether or not the reserved area corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the reserved area of the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u (S1260). In this determination, it may be determined whether or not a reservation for a big hit is stored in the reservations stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. When it is determined that there is a hold for a big hit in the hold of the second special symbol (S1260: Yes), the first overlap winning process (FIG. 136, S1270) is executed.

The details of the first overlapping winning process (FIG. 136, S1270) will be described later, but when the holding of winning in the holding of the first special symbol and the second special symbol overlaps, the process for selecting the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern for the winning variation pattern of the first special symbol is executed so that the start of the normal jackpot precedes the start of the probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is all out (S1260: No), or after the execution of the first overlap winning process (FIG. 135, S1270), if the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is not set to ON, the variation pattern is predicted (predetermined) based on the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter C3 from the special winning variation pattern table corresponding to the game state at the start of variation for the newly stored suspension. , is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 (S1261).

The processes of S931 to S933 and S935 to S939 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) in the twentieth embodiment are the same as the processes of S931 to S933 and S935 to S939 of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S926) in the first embodiment.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, the first duplication hit process (S1270), which is one process of the first prefetch update process (FIG. 135, S926) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this first overlap winning process (S1270). The first overlap winning process (FIG. 136, S1270) in the twentieth embodiment is a process for determining whether or not a winning hold is stored in the holding corresponding to the second special symbol, and if a winning hold is stored, it is a process for selecting an extended variation pattern or a shortened variation pattern as the variation pattern of the first special symbol so that the start of the normal jackpot is executed before the start of the probability variable jackpot.

In the first duplication hit process (FIG. 136, S1270), first, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved area for which the duplicate adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON in any of the reserved areas of the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u. If the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is set to ON (S1271: Yes), this process ends. In this way, when the big hits are already overlapped between the first special pattern and the second special pattern and there is a reservation in which the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is selected, the process is configured not to perform the process for the overlap again. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the control load of main controller 110 from being excessively increased. In addition, by not performing control such that further jackpots are awarded to the player in a state in which three or more jackpots are reserved, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively enhanced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the overlap adjustment flag 203u12 is off (S1271: No), it is determined whether the probability variation hit of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stored in the reservation area of the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is a hit that is determined as a hit even in a low probability game state (normal game state) (S1272). In the normal game state, if it is determined to be out (S1272: No), this process is terminated. In this way, by discriminating whether or not the variable probability big win is a win even in the normal game state, when the variable probability big win is delayed from the actual variable start time, even if the variable probability big win starts to fluctuate in the high probability game state and the variable probability big win starts to fluctuate in the low probability game state, only the big win can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from being spoiled.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a hit is determined even in the normal game state (S1272: Yes), it is determined whether the prediction variable probability flag 203u6 in the reservation area of the newly stored rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is on (that is, whether the newly stored reservation is a variable probability big hit) (S1273). When it is determined that the newly stored reservation is a probability variable jackpot (S1273: Yes), it is determined whether the hit in the reservation area corresponding to the second special symbol is a normal jackpot (S1274). When it is determined that the hit in the reservation area corresponding to the second special pattern is the normal jackpot (S1274: Yes), the time until the normal jackpot in the reservation area of the second special pattern stops fluctuating is calculated (S1275).

The time until the fluctuation of the normal jackpot of the second special pattern stops is calculated by adding the remaining fluctuation time of the second special pattern currently fluctuating and the holding fluctuation time of the second special pattern stored prior to the second special pattern of the normal jackpot.

After the time until the fluctuation stops calculated in the processing of S1275, the fluctuation time is calculated so that the holding of the newly stored first special symbol that becomes the probability variable jackpot will stop fluctuating, the extended fluctuation pattern composed of the fluctuation time is set (selected), and stored in the fluctuation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the corresponding holding area (S1276). Here, the variation time of the extended variation pattern is calculated by adding the variation time of the retention of the first special symbol stored earlier than the retention of the newly stored probability variation big hit of the first special symbol to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol currently varying, to calculate the variation start time of the probability variation big hit of the newly stored first special symbol. Then, the variation time is determined by adding 3 seconds to the result of subtracting the variation start time from the time calculated in the process of S1275. If the fluctuation start time is later than the time calculated in the process of S1275, an extended fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit in the hold of the second special symbol is the probability variable jackpot (S1274: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the read-ahead probability variable flag 203u6 of the newly stored reservation area is off (S1273: No), it is determined whether the hit of the reservation area corresponding to the second special symbol is a probability variable jackpot (S1277). When it is determined that the holding of the second special symbol is a variable probability big hit (S1277: Yes), the time until the variable probability big winning in the holding area of the second special symbol stops fluctuating is calculated (S1278). Note that this time is calculated by the same method as the processing of S1275.

It is determined whether or not the normal big win of the newly stored first special pattern can be started earlier than the probability variable big win stored in the reserved second special pattern (S1279). Here, whether it is possible or not is decided whether or not it can be started before the probability variable big hit of the second special pattern when the fluctuation time of each reserved area corresponding to the first special pattern is constituted by the shortened fluctuation time of 1 second.

When it is determined that the normal jackpot of the newly stored first special pattern can be started earlier than the probability variable jackpot stored in the reservation of the second special pattern (S1279: Yes), the shortened variation pattern is stored in the variation pattern type storage area of the newly stored reservation area and the reservation area corresponding to the first special pattern previously stored. The shortened variation pattern is a variation pattern composed of variation patterns of 1 second.

The overlapping adjustment flag 203u12 of the reserved area storing the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is set to ON (S1281). Each reservation area is renumbered in order of the fluctuation start time (S1282).

By constructing in this way, when the first special pattern and the second special pattern overlap the big win, the variable time can be adjusted so that the probability variable big win is started later than the normal big win. Therefore, although the game state is shifted or maintained to a low-probability game state (ordinary game state) after the normal jackpot is executed, the game state can be shifted to a high-probability game state (variable-probability game state) by executing the variable-probability big win. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game in a high-probability game state for a long time. Also, more jackpots can be awarded to the player.

In addition, when the jackpots overlapping the first special pattern and the second special pattern are the probability variable jackpots for both or the normal jackpots for both, the extended fluctuation pattern or the shortened fluctuation pattern is not selected (selection is prohibited), so that the player can enjoy the game with the normal fluctuation pattern.

In addition, after the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern is selected, the variation start time of each reservation area is updated, and the variation start order is renumbered again in order of the variation start time, so even if the variation start order changes due to the extended variation pattern or the shortened variation pattern, the update can be performed in the correct variation start order. Therefore, winning commands can be generated based on the correct order of start of variation, and reserved symbol displays can be rearranged in the correct order of start of variation even when an extended variation pattern or a shortened variation pattern is selected.

In the present embodiment, the extended variation pattern is determined based on the calculation of the time required for the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, to stop varying, but is not limited to this, and may be configured such that, assuming the maximum variation time when the normal variation pattern is combined with the longest variation pattern, a variation pattern with a longer variation time than that is set in advance as the extended variation pattern and selected.

In addition, all the steps up to the holding of the probability variable jackpot of the newly stored first special pattern are constituted by the shortened variation pattern of 1 second, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be calculated and appropriately set so as to be shorter than the time until the normal jackpot of the second special pattern stops fluctuating.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to set an extended variation pattern or a shortened variation pattern for adjusting the variation time, but not limited to this, it may be configured to adjust by delaying the start of variation or invalidating the suspension of deviation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the control load for main controller 110 to adjust the fluctuation time.

In the second look-ahead update process (not shown), which is one process of the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) executed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 63b, the same process as the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 135, S926) is executed, although the difference is that it is a process for the second special symbol held ball, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 137, the large opening opening/closing process (S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twentieth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this large opening opening/closing process (S103). The large opening opening/closing process ( FIG. 137 , S103 ) of the twentieth embodiment controls opening/closing of the first variable winning device 65 .

In the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 137, S103), first, it is determined whether or not the big winning game is started (S131). Whether the start of the jackpot game is determined by whether the start of the jackpot is set in the processing of S608 in the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204) or the processing of S808 in the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207).

When it is determined that the jackpot game is started (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the value of the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5 of each reservation area stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is recalculated in consideration of the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol or second special symbol, starting after the big win (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the value of the variation start time storage area 203u5 of each reservation area stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is recalculated starting after the big win (S134).

Based on the variable start time recalculated in the process of S133 or S134 and stored in the variable start time storage area 203u5, a rearrangement data command is generated for each reservation area (S135).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being played (S136: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S137). When it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S137: Yes), a process of opening the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time to start a new round (S137: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is met (S140). When it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), the process of closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S142). If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S142: Yes), an ending command is set (generated) (S143).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is over (S144). When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S144: Yes), the jackpot game end is set (S145). It is determined whether or not it was a variable probability jackpot (S146). Whether or not it was a variable probability big win is determined whether the result of the lottery that triggered the execution of the big win game is a 15R variable probability big win or a 2R probability variable big win.

When it is determined that the probability variable jackpot was won (S146: Yes), the probability variable flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S144: No), or if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not set (S146: No), this process is terminated.

Thus, when the jackpot game starts, the fluctuation start time in each reservation area is updated after the jackpot game as a starting point. Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the jackpot game, by generating the rearrangement data command based on the updated variation start time, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can also update the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and rearrange the reserved symbol display in the order of starting the fluctuation after the jackpot game.

Further, it is possible to discriminate whether the first special pattern or the second special pattern is temporarily stopped and, if it is temporarily stopped, to calculate the fluctuation start time after the elapse of the remaining fluctuation time as a starting point for holding the special pattern, thereby calculating the more accurate fluctuation start time and generating the rearrangement data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can rearrange the pending symbol display in a more accurate order of starting fluctuation based on the fluctuation start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1400). The main processing (FIG. 138, S1400) of the twentieth embodiment is the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment, with the addition of a jackpot middle effect processing (FIG. 140, S1570), and the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) is changed to the command determination processing (FIG. 139, S1414). The processes of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, and S1415 to S1419 in the twentieth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1410, S1411 to S1413, and S1415 to S1419 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1413 is completed, the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 139, the command determination process (S1414), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 138, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1414). In the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment, each process from S1565 to S1566 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) in the first embodiment. The processing from S1501 to S1519 of the command determination processing (FIG. 139, S1414) in the twentieth embodiment is the same as the processing from S1501 to S1519 of the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) in the first embodiment.

In the processing of S1517 of the command determination processing (FIG. 139, S1414) of the twentieth embodiment, when it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation restart command has not been received (S1517), it is determined whether the round number command output from the main controller 110 has been received during the jackpot game (S1565). When it is determined that the number-of-rounds command has been received (S1565: Yes), based on the received number-of-rounds command, the number of jackpot rounds and the effective round time are set (S1566). It should be noted that the round effective time is set to 5 seconds, during which time the notification effect during the jackpot game is executed.

Next, return to the main process (S1400) in FIG. 138 and continue the description. In the main process of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 138, S1400), after the process of S1410 is executed, or when it is determined that the time is less than 1 ms in the process of S1401 (S1401: No), the effect process during the jackpot (FIG. 140, S1570) is executed.

With reference to Drawing 140, in a 20th embodiment, production processing (Drawing 140 and S1570) during a jackpot which is one processing of the main processing (Drawing 138 and S1400) performed by MPU221 of sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the effect processing during the jackpot (FIG. 140, S1570). In the twentieth embodiment of the big win performance process (FIG. 140, S1570), in the notification performance during the big win game, a lottery is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, and the processing of informing the player whether or not there is a big hit reserved ball among the reserved balls is executed.

In the jackpot middle effect process (FIG. 140, S1570), first, the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is read, and "1" is added to the value to update the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 (S1571). Next, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1572). Whether or not it is the round valid time is determined whether it is the round valid time (5 seconds from the start of the round in this embodiment) set in the process of S1566 of the command determination process (FIG. 139, S1414). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid time (S1572: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during the round valid time (S1572: Yes), it is determined whether the confirmation notification flag 223m1 is set to ON (that is, confirmation notification has already been given) (S1573). If it is determined that the confirmation notification flag 223m1 is ON (S1573: Yes), this process is terminated.

When it is determined that the confirmation notification flag 223m1 is off (S1573: No), a confirmation effect command for display is generated (set). The confirmation effect command for display is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display a background screen or the like for the notification effect on the third pattern display device 81 .

A display button operation display command is generated (set) (S1575). This display button operation display command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the characters "Press the button repeatedly!" With this configuration, the player can start operating the frame button 22 upon recognizing that the notification effect has started. Therefore, the player can participate in the notification performance in an easy-to-understand manner.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576). Here, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (depressed) once. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1576: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1576: Yes), the value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 is obtained (S1577). The value of the confirmation notification counter 223m2 acquired with the hit probability based on the number of rounds is determined (S1578). Here, when the number of rounds is 1R to 10R, "0 to 1" is set as the hit determination value, and when the number of rounds is 11R to 15R, "0 to 9" is set as the hit determination value.

It is determined whether the winning determination result of the acquired confirmation notification counter 223m2 is winning (S1579). When it is determined that the result of the win/loss determination is a hit (S1580), it is determined whether there is a hit pending in any of the pending areas of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u (S1580). When it is determined that there is a winning hold (S1580: Yes), a display confirmation notification command for instructing confirmation notification display is generated (set) (S1581). The confirmation notification flag 223m1 is set to ON (S1582). Here, the confirmation notification command for display is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display characters such as "One more big win!!" on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. The player can recognize from this display that there is a jackpot among the pending games. Therefore, the player can operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of this display. Therefore, it is possible to play the game without getting tired of the game even when the jackpot is won.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the success/failure determination result is out (S1579: No), or when it is determined that all of the reserved areas are out (S1580: No), a display non-confirmation notification command for instructing non-confirmation notification display is generated (set) (S1583). Here, the non-determined notification command for display is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the characters "Sorry!!" on the third pattern display device 81, as shown in FIG. When the character "I'm sorry!!" is displayed, the player can recognize that the notification was not given due to the fact that the reserved ball did not hit or the number of repeated hits was insufficient. Since the notification performance is executed every round until the fixed notification display is performed, the player can participate in the notification performance in the next round as well, expecting that there may actually be a hit in the reserved balls even if ``I'm sorry!!'' is displayed in one round.

In this way, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol overlap the big win, the variation pattern is adjusted so that the probability variable big win is started later than the normal big win. Furthermore, during the big win, by executing the performance of whether or not there is a big win among the held balls, when the big win of the held balls is notified, even if the executed big win is a normal big win, the player can play the game with expectation that the held big win is a definite variable big win. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to continue playing games with high expectations even during a big win.

In addition, the shortening variation pattern is selected in order to start the normal jackpot earlier than the probability variable jackpot because the first special symbol and the second special symbol overlap the jackpot. As a result, the player can participate in the notification performance expecting that the probability variable jackpot should be stored in the hold when the normal jackpot is started via the shortening variation pattern.

In addition, even when the reservation of a big hit is stored, the information performance is not notified unless the lottery for whether or not to perform the notification is won, so that the player can be made to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times and participate in the information performance for a longer period of time.

Also, since the lottery for whether or not to inform is executed each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the timing of each notification (the number of operations, etc.) is not constant, and the player can be given unexpectedness.

In addition, since the lottery probability of whether or not to report is changed depending on the round, the easiness of being notified can be changed depending on the round, and the round in which the player expects to be notified more can be set. In this embodiment, since the hit probability is set to be high after the 11th round, even if the notification effect continues until the 11th round, if there is a hit on hold after the 11th round, the fixed effect can be easily displayed. Therefore, the player can continue to participate in the notification performance with the expectation that the notification will be made after the 11th round, even if the notification is not made for many rounds.

In the present embodiment, when the normal jackpot or the probability variable jackpot has already been established in one special pattern, when the other special pattern is established later, by adjusting the fluctuation time of the hit, the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot is started later than the jackpot game of the normal jackpot. By adjusting the pattern variation time, the variable probability big win may be controlled to start after the normal big win. By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time can be adjusted more efficiently. Also, even if there is only a short time before the start of the probability variable jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected so that the normal jackpot is started first.

Further, in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), when it is determined that the probability variable jackpot will be achieved, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time may be forcibly selected as the variation pattern. By constructing in this manner, the start of the variable probability big win is delayed, and during that time, the player can get more big wins by playing the game expecting that the holding of the normal big win will be established with the other special pattern.

Also, the configuration described in the modified example of the nineteenth embodiment may be combined to make the sound lamp control device 113 perform notification.

In this embodiment, the frame button 22 can be operated many times during the valid time of the round, and the lottery is executed each time. Further, instead of executing the notification effect every round, it may be configured to execute only one specific round. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not this specific round is to be the round in which the notification effect is performed by lottery during the big win. By configuring in this way, the round in which the notification effect is executed becomes random, and when the notification effect is executed, the player can participate in the notification effect feeling more fresh. In addition, when the notification effect is executed, it is possible to have more expectation that there will be a hit in the reserved area.

In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts a big win, the lottery game determined to be the other winning that is starting to fluctuate is explained about the case where the result of determination is maintained even after one of the big winning games. In such a constitution, when the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are respectively determined by the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the normal jackpot is first started, and until the jackpot is finished, the control is executed so that the probability variable jackpot does not start. By constructing in this way, when the normal jackpot starts, the special symbols that become the probability variable jackpot start to fluctuate and can be prevented from being invalidated.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 149. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment (see FIGS. 64 to 72) described above, the variation pattern of special symbols is determined regardless of the number of held balls at the start of variation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are controlled to select variation patterns based on the number of held balls at the start of variation.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in the following points. The twenty-first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment in that when the first special symbol or the second special symbol can start to fluctuate, the number of held balls of the corresponding special symbol is discriminated and a variation pattern is selected based on the value.

Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the eighth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the secondary permutation reserved storage area 223k of the twenty-first embodiment, a permutation order change flag 223k9 is added to each of the reserved areas 1 to 8 in comparison with the secondary permutation reserved storage area 223k of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 9(b)).

The rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is a flag indicating that, when the reserved patterns are rearranged and the reserved pattern display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed in the order of start of fluctuation, the order of start of fluctuation of the reserved pattern display is changed. This rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON by the process of S1895 of the subordinate pending rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871), which will be described later. On the other hand, the reservation area is shifted by the cancellation of the reservation, the special pattern corresponding to the reservation can start to change, and is set to OFF when shifting from the reservation area 1 of the data storage area under change to the data storage area during change.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (222d) set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described.

The normal time special out variation pattern table 202e in the 21st embodiment is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and when the special symbol variation starts, the winning judgment result is out, and the game state is a low probability game state (normal probability game state). The MPU 201 of the main controller 110, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) or the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710), from the normal time special outlier variation pattern table 202e, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol to start varying (if the first special symbol starts to vary, the number of retained balls of the first special symbol), the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter CS 3, a variation pattern is determined.

The normal-time special deviation fluctuation pattern table 222d in the twenty-first embodiment is set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and has the same contents as the normal-time special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e of the main controller 110. The normal-time special-out variation pattern table 222d is used to preliminarily determine (predict) the variation pattern to be selected at the start of variation for the data of each reservation area stored in the secondary sorting reservation storage area 223k based on the winning command output from the main controller 110 in the sub-reordering reservation storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, which will be described later. Specifically, the normal special outlier variation pattern table 222d is a variation pattern table that is selected when the game state at the start of variation is a low probability game state and the win/loss determination result determined at that time is out. A variation pattern is discriminated in advance based on a variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern determination counter CS3, and the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special pattern (if the first special pattern is reserved, the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern) stored in each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k based on the winning command, and stored in a variation pattern type storage area 223k3 of the secondary rearranged reserved storage area 223k.

The normal special deviation variation pattern table 202e (222d) is configured (each counter value is set) such that the type of variation pattern (variation time) selected when the number of held balls is ``0'', ``1 to 2'', and ``3'' is different. When the number of held balls is "0", a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of held balls is other. Specifically, it is configured such that the variation pattern to be the reach is more likely to be selected than the case of other numbers of held balls. When the number of held balls is ``1 to 2'', a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is set to be more easily selected than when the number of held balls is ``0'', while a variation pattern with a relatively shorter variation time is set to be more easily selected than when the number of held balls is ``3''. When the number of held balls is "3", a variation pattern with a relatively shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than in the case of other numbers of held balls. Although not shown, the normal-time special-out variation pattern table 202e (222d) is set to a dedicated normal-time special-out variation pattern table 202e (222d) for respectively selecting the variation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

By configuring in this way, when the number of reserved balls is small, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected, and game balls enter the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b during that time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state (a state in which a lottery game is not performed) in which there are no reserve balls and the first special symbol or the second special symbol does not change. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored due to the occurrence of a state where the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped.

In addition, when the number of held balls is "3", which is close to the upper limit of "4", a variation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, so that the holding cycle is accelerated, and when the number of held balls reaches the upper limit of "4", it is possible to suppress the game balls from entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b and overflowing as invalid balls that are not held balls. Therefore, the player can shorten the time during which the number of held balls reaches the upper limit of "4" and stop shooting the game balls, and the game can be played efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the time saving/probable variable special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the time saving/probable variable special deviation fluctuation pattern table 222d set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.

The time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202e differs from the above-described normal time special deviation variation pattern table 202e in that it is selected when the gaming state is a time reduction gaming state or a high probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state).

The time-saving/probability-variable special-outside variation pattern table 222d is configured such that when the number of held balls is '0', a variation pattern with a relatively longer variation time is easily selected than when the number of held balls is '1 to 3'. In addition, this time-shortening/probability-variable special deviation variation pattern table is configured to facilitate selection of a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time even when the number of held balls is '1 to 2', compared to the normal time special deviation variation pattern. Therefore, when the time-saving game state or the high-probability game state is established, it is possible to speed up the digestion cycle of the reserved balls. Therefore, in a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state, by setting the success/failure determination probability of the normal pattern to a high probability, the wings 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 are easily opened, and the opening time and the number of opening times are increased, so that the game ball is easily entered into the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, but the reserved ball is digested in an early cycle, so that the game can be played at a good tempo.

In addition, the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 222d set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the same as the time saving/probability variation special deviation variation pattern table 202e of the main control unit 110. It is the same configuration. In addition, it is used to determine the variation pattern in advance in the same way, except that it is the variation pattern selected for the time-saving gaming state or the high-probability gaming state with respect to the normal time special deviation variation pattern table 222d. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

In addition, in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d and the special winning variation pattern table 202d for time saving and probability variation set in the ROM 201 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 113 are set as the normal special winning variation pattern table 222c and the special winning variation pattern table 222c for time saving and probability variation. That is, when the hit/fail determination result is hit, the variation pattern is selected based on each counter value regardless of the number of held balls.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1400). The main processing of the twenty-first embodiment (FIG. 144, S1400) is different from the main processing of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 68, S1400) in that pending number display update processing 5 (FIG. 149, S1840) and pending sorting processing 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) are added. The processes of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, and S1414 to S1419 in the twenty-first embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405, S1407 to S1412, and S1414 to S1419 in the eighth embodiment. When the processing of S1412 is completed, pending rearrangement processing 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 145, pending sorting process 4 (S1850), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment, will be described. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing this reservation sorting process 4 (S1850). Suspended rearrangement processing 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) in the twenty-first embodiment is performed each time it is executed, based on the data of each reserved area stored in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and the number of current reserved balls. This is a process for updating the variation start order and the like by updating the selected variation pattern.

In the pending sorting process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) of the twenty-first embodiment, first, the pending sorting order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed. This reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) will be described later, but based on the data of each reservation area stored in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and the number of current reservation balls, It is a process for selecting and updating again the variation pattern selected at the start of variation.

After the pending rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is executed, it is determined whether or not it is a rearrangement possible period (S1852). In the rearrangement possible period, a game state other than a jackpot game or a state of no reservation established at different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which one or more first special symbols and second special symbols are not reserved) is set in the rearrangement possible period.

If it is determined that it is the sortable period (S1852: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1853). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third pattern display device 81 displays the characters ``Perhaps rearrangement is possible!'' to inform the player of the period during which the frame button 22 can be operated. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may naturally be configured to control so as to light a dedicated lamp or the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing the rearrangement possible period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and can operate the frame switch 22 at an appropriate timing. In addition, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and when the frame button 22 is operated, if the rearrangement is possible, the rearrangement display may be performed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1854). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated (S1854: Yes), the rearrangement flags 223k7 of all the reservation areas in which the pending data of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k are stored are set to ON (S1855).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the sortable period (S1852: No), or if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1854: No), this process ends.

With this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, only the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be rearranged.

The player can know the actual order of starting the variable display, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (special symbol to start the variable display). Therefore, the game can be played while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of this pachinko machine, since the game balls are easily won by alternating the first start port 63a and the second start port 64a by the distribution device 630, the first special pattern and the second special pattern are equally played, and the game can be played efficiently.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute control for rearranging and displaying reserved pattern displays in order of start of fluctuation based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, but it is not limited to this, and may naturally be configured to be executed each time a new reserved pattern is stored. By configuring in this way, the player can always accurately recognize the order to start the variable display by the reserved symbol display rearranged in the variable start order.

In the present embodiment, the rearrangement possible period is a game state other than during the jackpot game or a state without holding established at different start ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no one or more first special symbols and second special symbols).

In addition, when the jackpot game is set as the rearrangement possible period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped fluctuation display during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the fluctuation start time is calculated based on the determined fluctuation time (variation display mode) of the reserved first special pattern or the second special pattern and the remaining fluctuation time during the temporary stop, the rearrangement order is determined, and rearrangement is performed based on the rearrangement order. By constructing in this way, even if a new reserved pattern display is displayed during a jackpot game, the reserved pattern display and the display mode already displayed before the reserved pattern display are combined, rearranged in an accurate variation start order, and a player can be notified of the correct variation start order even in a jackpot game machine.

In this embodiment, the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u of the main controller 110 and the slave rearrangement reserve storage area 223k of the sound lamp controller 113 are configured to store rearranged data. Not limited to that, the main control device 110 is configured to notify various data necessary for sorting by the winning command of the sound ramp control device 113 (results of success or failure, jackpot types, variation pattern types, etc.), and the sound ramp control device 113 alone may be configured to perform sorting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the pending rearrangement order determination process 2 (S1851), which is one process of the pending rearrangement process 4 (FIG. 145, S1850) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment, will be described. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing this pending rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851).

In the pending rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) in the twenty-first embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1861). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1861: Yes), each counter value stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, variation pattern determination counter C4) is read (S1862). Each data read out in the process of S1862 is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the subordinate rearrangement reserved storage area 223k (the area with the lowest number among the reserved areas in which no data is stored) (S1863). On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1861: No), the processing of S1862 to S1863 is skipped and the processing of S1864 is executed.

Among the reserved areas of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k, each data such as the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation start time is an unupdated reserved area, and the fluctuation start time is calculated in order from the reserved area with the earliest fluctuation start time, and stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 of the reserved area (S1864). When all the reserved areas are unupdated reserved areas, the fluctuation start time is discriminated from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special pattern or the second special pattern which is currently fluctuating, and recalculated from the reserved area with the earlier fluctuation start time and stored.

In the process of S1864, it is determined whether or not the game state when the special symbol corresponding to the reservation area whose fluctuation start time is recalculated can start to fluctuate is a high probability game state (probability variable game state) (S1864). When it is determined that the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the high probability game state (S1865: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the success/failure determination result storage area 223k1 is determined, and the determination result is stored in the success/failure determination result storage area 223k1 (S1866). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the low probability game state (normal game state) (S1865: No), the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the success/failure determination result storage area 223k1 of the reserve area of the secondary sorting reserve storage area 223k is determined based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability time, and the determination result is stored in the success/failure determination result storage area 223k1 (S 1867).

Subordinate pending rearrangement storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) is executed. The secondary reservation rearrangement reservation storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) will be described later, but for each reservation area, based on the propriety determination result determined in advance based on the time of start of fluctuation, the variation pattern is determined in advance and updated. It is determined whether or not there is a reserved area in which the data such as the fluctuation start time and the fluctuation pattern have not been updated in the reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k (S1869). If it is determined that there is an unupdated reserved area (S1869: Yes), the process returns to S1864 and the same process is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no unupdated reservation area in the secondary rearrangement reservation area 223k (S1869: No), the change start order of each reservation area is renumbered based on the change start time and stored in the change order storage area 223k4 (S1870). The sub-retained rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) is executed. The secondary pending rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871) will be described later, but when the pending symbol display displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is rearranged and displayed in the fluctuation start order, when the order of the displayed pending symbol display is changed, it is a process for executing a notification process for informing the player that the rearrangement order has been changed.

With reference to FIG. 147, secondary pending rearrangement pending storage area update process 2 (S1868), which is one process of the secondary pending sorting order determination process (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment, will be described. FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the secondary pending rearrangement pending storage area update process 2 (S1868).

In the secondary pending rearrangement pending storage area update process 2 (FIG. 147, S1868) in the twenty-first embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the winning judgment result predicted in the processing of S1866 and S1867 of the pending rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) is a jackpot (S1881). When it is determined that the predicted success/failure determination result is a jackpot (S1881: Yes), it is determined whether the predicted jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S1882). Whether or not this probability variable jackpot is determined is determined based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type storage area 223k2 in the reservation area of the secondary sorting reservation storage area 223k.

When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S1882: Yes), the predictive variable probability flag 223k6 of the rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is set to ON (S1883). On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is the normal jackpot (S1882: No), the process of S1883 is skipped and the process of S1884 is executed.

A game state at the start of variation is determined, and a variation pattern to be selected at the start of variation is determined (predicted) in advance based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter CS3 from the special win variation pattern table 222c corresponding to the game state (S1884). On the other hand, if the predicted success/failure determination result is out (S1881: No), the game state at the start of the variation is discriminated, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter CS3 from the special loss variation pattern table 222d corresponding to the game state and the value of the variation pattern determination counter CS3 are selected. Based on the number of held balls), the variation pattern to be selected at the start of variation is determined (predicted) in advance (S1885). The predicted success or failure, stop type, and variation pattern are stored in the corresponding storage area of the rearrangement pending storage area (S1886).

In this way, in the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851), the fluctuation start time and the fluctuation pattern of the reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area are updated, so even if the change in the fluctuation start order of the reserved symbol display that is already rearranged and displayed in the fluctuation start order occurs due to the increase or decrease of the reserved balls or the establishment of a new reservation, the reserved symbol display can be displayed in the fluctuation start order based on the updated data each time. Therefore, the player can recognize the latest variable start order in the changing game state, and can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the main controller 110 does not execute control for rearranging the pending symbol display, but transmits the winning command, and executes the processing necessary for rearranging in the sound lamp controller 113, so the control load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to frequently update the data in the reservation area and always update to the latest variation order.

The fluctuation start time of each reserved area changes according to the previously stored fluctuation time of the same special symbol reserved. Here, since the variation pattern that determines the variation time changes depending on the number of held balls, it is changed by increasing the number of held balls while the ball is being held. However, since the fluctuation start time, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. are updated each time the number of held balls changes, the correct fluctuation start order can always be updated. Also, by changing the variation pattern to be selected according to the number of held balls, the number of held balls can be adjusted to an appropriate number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress troubles such as occurrence of a time during which no reserved balls are used and special symbol lottery is not performed, or occurrence of overflow due to the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit value.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of held balls, the data of the reserved area is always updated. Alternatively, the data in the reservation area may be updated only when the number of reservations increases. By configuring in this way, the frequency of updating the reservation area can be reduced, and the control load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, in the 21st embodiment, the slave hold rearrangement display notification process (S1871), which is one process of the hold rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 148 explains the sub-hold rearrangement display notification process (S1871).

In the secondary pending rearrangement display notification process (FIG. 148, S1871), first, it is determined whether or not there is an area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is ON in any of the reserved areas of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k (S1891). When it is determined that there is a reservation area with the sort flag 223k7 ON (S1891: Yes), it is determined whether there is a change in the change order of the reservation areas with the sort flag 223k7 set ON (S1892). Here, whether or not there is a change in the variation start order is determined by determining whether or not the order has been updated in a different order when performing renumbering in the processing of S1870.

If it is determined that the variation start order has been changed (S1892: Yes), it is determined whether the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1893). If it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is ON (S1893: Yes), a notification command is generated (set) to notify that the rearrangement order has been changed again (S1893). In this embodiment, as notification that the rearrangement order has been changed again, the characters "The rearrangement order has been changed again!"

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is OFF (S1893: No), the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1895). A notification command is generated (set) to notify that the rearrangement order has been changed (S1896). Here, in the upper display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, the characters "The sorting order has been changed!" In this way, it is configured to notify the player that the reserved symbol display has been rearranged.

By configuring in this way, a variation pattern which is preliminarily discriminated when selected at the start of variation of each reservation area is changed due to an increase or decrease in the number of reservations or the like, so that even when the order of variation start is changed, it is possible to inform the player that the rearrangement of the rearranged and displayed reserved pattern display has been changed in an appropriate and easy-to-understand notification mode. Therefore, the player can suppress confusion caused by sudden rearrangement of the reserved pattern display by identifying the reserved pattern display after knowing that the reserved pattern display has been rearranged.

In addition, when the rearrangement is changed again, different information is given, so that the player can easily recognize that the change this time has been changed again, thereby further suppressing the player's confusion.

In this embodiment, when the rearrangement order is changed again, it is notified by characters, but it is not limited to this, and it may be arranged so that the rearrangement order before change and the rearrangement order change are displayed side by side in the lower display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 respectively. In addition, the number of times of change may be represented by a number or the like, and the background of the reserved pattern display or the reserved pattern display area may be displayed in a color corresponding to the number of times of change (for example, blue for the first change, red for the second change, etc.). By configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize that the rearrangement order has been changed by changing the number of times and color.

Further, when the rearrangement order of the reserved areas for which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is changed, a dedicated flag indicating that fact may be set and set to ON. In this case, the flag may be set to OFF based on the execution of the process of notifying the rearrangement order.

In the present embodiment, the reserved pattern display is rearranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation by the player operating the frame button 22 during the valid time, but it is not limited to this, and the reserved pattern display may be always displayed in the order of start of fluctuation, and the order of start of fluctuation may be always changed each time it is changed.

Next, return to the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) and continue the description. In the twenty-first embodiment, in the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the pending number display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1871) is executed after the process of S1405 is executed.

With reference to FIG. 149, pending number display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 144, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first embodiment, will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing this pending number display update process 5 (S1871). In the pending number display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1871), the pending pattern display corresponding to the pending area in which the sort flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in the order of fluctuation start, and the pending pattern display corresponding to the pending area in which the sort flag 223k7 is set to OFF is displayed in the order in which the pending is established. In addition, for reserved patterns displayed in the order of start of variation, and for display of reserved patterns whose order of start of variation is changed, display of reserved patterns is blinked to notify that the order of variation start is changed.

In the pending number display update process 5 (FIG. 149, S1840), first, the pending symbol display corresponding to the pending area in which the secondary sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in the order of the fluctuation start, and the sorting flag 223k7 is set to OFF. A pending symbol display for display is displayed on the display control device 114 in the order in which the pending is established (S1921).

It is determined whether or not there is a reserved area in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON in any of the reserved areas of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k (S1922). When it is determined that there is a reserved area in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON (S1922: Yes), the reservation pattern corresponding to the reservation area in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is set to ON is flashed (S1923). A rearrangement order change notification sound command is set (S1924). Here, the rearrangement order change notification sound command outputs a sound effect indicating that the rearrangement has been performed (for example, a chime sound such as ping-pong). On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement order change flag 223k9 is off (S1922: No), this process ends.

In this way, when the rearrangement order is changed again, the part is displayed blinking, so that the player can easily recognize what has been changed again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to whether or not the displayed reserved symbol display has been changed again.

In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol display in which the rearrangement order change flag 223k7 is set to ON is repeatedly flashed and displayed, but not limited to this, after executing the process of blinking display, the rearrangement order change flag 223k7 may be set to OFF, and the flashing display is executed for a predetermined time and terminated.

In addition, although it is configured such that the re-changed reserved symbol display is blinked, the reserved symbol display whose rearrangement order has been changed may be notified by blinking display or the like. In addition, the notification mode for notifying that the rearrangement order has been changed is not limited to blinking display, and may be configured to notify that the rearrangement order has been changed in a notification mode such as rotating display of reserved symbol display. Also, the notification mode may be changed based on the number of times the order is changed. Specifically, if the number of times of change is 1, the reserved pattern display is shaken and displayed, and if the number of times of change is 2, the reserved pattern display is repeatedly enlarged and reduced, and the like.

Further, the notification sound notified by the rearrangement order change notification sound command may be a voice saying "The rearrangement order has been changed!". Also, based on the number of times of change, it may be configured to notify such as "The rearrangement order has been changed again!"

Thus, in the present embodiment, even if the variation pattern to be selected is determined by the number of reserved symbols at the start of variation, the MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 always determines and updates the variation pattern to be selected at the start of variation based on the state of the game, so that the correct variation start order of the reserved symbol display can always be notified.

In addition, in this embodiment, the data is updated each time for the holding area in which all the holding data are stored, but the holding area where the holding number at the start of the fluctuation is fixed (for example, among the number of holding balls with special symbols, the number of holding balls is stored up to 4, which is the upper limit value, for the first holding area). It may be configured to stop or prohibit updating. By configuring in this way, the control load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, among the reserved pattern displays displayed in the order of the start of variation, the reserved pattern display in which the order of start of variation is fixed (the reserved pattern display in which the order of start of fluctuation is not changed in the future) may be displayed in a display mode that informs that the order of start of variation is fixed (for example, the display color of the reserved pattern display is displayed in a specific color, or characters such as "HOLD" indicating that the order of fluctuation is fixed are displayed for the reserved pattern display that is fixed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where rearrangement control is performed in the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but as shown in the first embodiment, the main controller 110 may be configured to perform rearrangement processing. In this case, each data (fluctuation pattern, fluctuation start time, etc.) in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u may be updated for each timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). An update command may be generated based on the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u and output to the sound lamp control device 113 each time an update is performed.

Next, a modified example of the twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the twenty-first embodiment, each time the reservation rearrangement order determination process 2 (FIG. 146, S1851) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the dynamic display mode of each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation area 223k is updated based on the current number of reserved balls, thereby informing the player of the accurate variation start order at any time. However, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the variation patterns of various types of super reach are selected with the same value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of reservations. In addition, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, the value of the variation pattern determination counter CS3 for selecting each super reach is also configured to be constant regardless of the number of held balls. By configuring in this way, in the case of a missed super reach, the variation pattern can be determined in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) at the time of winning. Therefore, in the modification of the twenty-first embodiment, in the pending rearrangement order determination process (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, the change pattern stored in each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is determined, and if the change pattern is configured with a change pattern that does not change even if the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, it is set as a rearrangeable period. On the other hand, when a variation pattern in which the variation pattern is changed by increase or decrease of holding is stored, the rearrangement possible period is canceled (or a rearrangement prohibited period is set) so that the rearrangement is not executed. In addition, the variation pattern in which the variation pattern is not changed due to the increase or decrease of the hold is stored up to the upper limit, and consists of the variation pattern stored at the top, the winning variation pattern, and the variation pattern that becomes the losing super reach.

By constructing in this way, when the player can be notified of the correct variation start order, the player can be notified that the order can be rearranged, and the rearrangement can be executed by operating the frame button 22, thereby further suppressing the player's confusion.

Note that the configurations of the first to twenty-first embodiments may be combined as appropriate.

In addition to the slot machine and game machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown below.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is satisfied; and second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied; display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the establishment of the first success judgment condition; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success judgment means; Pending information storage means for storing pending information having at least information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the order of success/failure determination conditions in which the first true/failure determination condition and the second true/failure determination condition that have been satisfied are set until the information starts to be displayed dynamically; dynamic display start time information determination means for determining time information until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new hold information starts, based on the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the dynamic display mode for each piece of hold information previously stored, and storing the information in the hold information storage means; a rearrangement means for rearranging the reserved display modes displayed on the reserved display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each piece of dynamic display start time information stored in the reserved information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means when a condition is established.

According to the gaming machine A1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are met. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the fulfillment of the success/failure determination condition. When a first or second right/wrong judgment condition is established, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the right/wrong judgment condition established is started, pending information having at least the order of establishment of the right/wrong judgment conditions combining the established first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition and information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored in a hold information storage means. While discriminating the reserved information of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the reserved information storage means, the establishment order of the right/wrong judgment condition combining the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition for each piece of hold information is displayed by the hold display means as the display of the identifiable hold display mode. When the first or second propriety determination condition is established and new pending information is stored, time information until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new pending information is started is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means based on the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identifying information during dynamic display and the dynamic display mode of each pending information previously stored, and is stored in the pending information storage means. Triggered by establishment of a predetermined condition, the reserved display mode displayed on the reserved display means is rearranged by the rearranging means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each piece of dynamic display start time information stored in the reserved information storage means by the dynamic display start time determination means. As a result, for example, while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored, the hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display time of the first identification information during dynamic display is longer than the remaining dynamic display time of the second identification information during dynamic display, the start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information of the second lottery game is earlier than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. However, since the reserved display mode is displayed in order in the reserved display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the second lottery game newly stored suspension display mode is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the previously stored suspension information of the first lottery game. Then, although the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the propriety determination conditions may differ, the real dynamic display start order is rearranged and displayed by the rearrangement means, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, even when the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual success/failure determination conditions are established, the reservation display modes are rearranged in the dynamic display start order by the rearrangement means, so that the player's confusion can be suppressed.

A gaming machine A2 comprising a condition allocating means for assisting alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition in the gaming machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sorting means assists the alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition. As a result, the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are easily established evenly, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game are efficiently executed, so that many games can be played in a short time.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established and the pending information is stored in the pending information storing means, the sorting means determines the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established pending information and the previously stored pending information based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each pending information previously stored in the pending information storing means, associates the order with the pending information, and holds the pending information. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is stored in information storage means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established and the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored pending information and the previously stored pending information is determined based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each pending information previously stored in the pending information storing means, and the order is stored in the pending information storing means by the sorting means in association with each pending information. As a result, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established and the pending information is stored. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display modes can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when the dynamic display start order is changed, the reserved display modes can be rearranged in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player can be notified of the correct dynamic display start order.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines A1 to A3 has an operation means operable by a player, and the rearrangement means rearranges the reserved display modes on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it has operation means that can be operated by a player, and that the rearrangement means rearranges the reserved display modes on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the player operates the operation means, the reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to rearrange the reserved display mode at the timing intended by the player, and inform the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the rearrangement means rearranges the holding display modes displayed on the holding display means on the assumption that the predetermined condition is met when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is newly met.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established, the holding display mode displayed on the holding display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means assuming that the predetermined condition is established. Thus, when a new reserved display mode is displayed, the reserved display modes are rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

In the gaming machine A1 or A5, when the win/loss judgment between the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed by the privilege game executing means after executing the privilege game acquires lottery information for making a lottery whether or not to shift to a special game state in which it is easier to win than usual, based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, and when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is established and the pending information corresponding to the established judgment condition is stored, The game state lottery means stores the lottery information in the reservation information storage means in association with the reservation information, and the success/fail determination means determines in advance whether the game state of the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each reservation information is the special game state based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means until the first or second identification information corresponding to each reservation information stored in the reservation information storage means becomes capable of starting the dynamic display. When the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of reservation information stored in the reservation information storage unit becomes capable of starting dynamic display, the dynamic display mode determining unit officially executes a win-or-fail judgment based on the game state when the change can start, and the dynamic display mode determination unit until the first or second identification information corresponding to the reservation information stored in the reservation information storage unit becomes capable of starting dynamic display. The game machine B1 is characterized in that said success/failure determination means determines said dynamic display mode based on the determination result of prior determination stored in said retention information storage means, and, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in said suspension information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display, said dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of said success/failure determination means executed in that case.

According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the lottery information for lottery whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the winning judgment between the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game is more likely to win than in the normal time is acquired by the game state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second winning judgment condition. Also, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is satisfied and the reservation information corresponding to the established determination condition is stored, the lottery information is stored in the reservation information storage means by the game state lottery means in association with the reservation information. Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the pieces of reserved information stored in the reserved information storage means can be started, the game state lottery means judges whether the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each piece of reserved information is the special game state based on the dynamic display start time determined by the dynamic display start time determination means, and the advance judgment for making the win/deny decision in advance is executed by the win/fail judgment means. Then, the result is stored in the reservation storage means by the validity determination means in association with each reservation information. On the other hand, when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be started, the win/fail decision is formally executed by the win/fail decision means based on the game state in that case. Until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can be started, the dynamic display time is determined based on the result of preliminary determination by the right/fail determining means stored in the pending information storing means. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means becomes capable of starting the dynamic display, the dynamic display time determination means determines the dynamic display time based on the determination result of the propriety determination means executed in that case. As a result, even if the pending information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the game state at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the win/loss determination is performed. Therefore, it is possible to determine the dynamic display time in advance based on the correct result of the success/failure determination, and to determine the correct dynamic display start order even when a new success/failure determination condition is satisfied next time.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is satisfied; and second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied; display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; A gaming machine C1 comprising a technique executing means, a condition distribution means for assisting alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition, and a reserve storage means for storing the right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success/failure determination condition is established with the assistance of the condition allocation means.

According to the gaming machine C1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are established. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Alternating establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is assisted by the condition distribution means. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is met with the assistance of the condition sorting means, the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit is stored by the reservation storage means. As a result, the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are likely to be established evenly, the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be equally stored, and it is possible to prevent one of the right to perform the first lottery game and the right to perform the second lottery game from being biased and stored earlier to the upper limit number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game is stored up to the upper limit, but one of the rights exceeds the upper limit and becomes invalid.

The game machine of the gaming machine C1 has a game area, a first start opening that satisfies the first success/failure determination condition when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, and a second start opening that satisfies the second success/failure determination condition when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, and the condition distribution means assists the game balls to alternately enter the first start opening and the second start opening. A game machine C2 characterized by having a ball guiding part.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting hole, the first win-or-fail judgment condition is met, while when the game ball enters the second starting hole, the second win-fail judgment condition is met. The alternate entry of game balls into the first start hole and the second start hole is assisted by the game ball guide part of the condition distribution means. As a result, the player can easily enter the game balls alternately into the first start hole and the second start hole by letting the game balls flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be played in a shorter time.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C2, when the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established and the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means, the sorting means determines the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established pending information and the previously stored pending information based on the dynamic display start time corresponding to each pending information previously stored in the pending information storing means, associates the order with the pending information, and stores the order in the pending information storing means. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is a machine for storing.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the game ball received from the ball entry port of the condition distribution means is turned in the first direction up to a predetermined angle and guided by the game ball guide portion to the first start port via the first guide path, the game ball is received in the state of being rotated to the first direction by the predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated in the second direction opposite to the first direction by the predetermined angle, and the game ball is guided to the second start port via the second guide path. is induced by As a result, it is possible to alternately distribute and guide the game balls to the first start port and the second start port by using a common member, and the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact compared with the case of providing members for distributing to the first start port and the second start port.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C3, the game ball guide part of the condition sorting means includes a first passive part arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state of being rotated in the first direction up to a predetermined angle, and receiving the entering game ball and rotating in the second direction up to a predetermined angle, and a first passive part arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance and receiving the game ball when the game ball is rotated in the second direction up to the predetermined angle. a second passive part that rotates up to a predetermined angle through the ball entrance, and a rotation regulation that prevents the first passive part from rotating in the first direction after it receives a game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction and then before the game ball enters the ball entrance, or prevents the second passive part from rotating in the first direction after receiving the game ball entered from the ball entrance and then before the game ball enters the ball entrance. A gaming machine C4 characterized by having:

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in a state in which the game ball guide part of the condition distribution means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, the first passive part of the game ball guide part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the first passive part receives the entered game ball and is rotated to the second direction by the specified angle. In addition, the second passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entered into the entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition allocating means is rotated in the second direction up to a prescribed angle, and the second passive part receives the entered game ball and is rotated up to the prescribed angle in the first direction. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction and before the next game ball enters the ball entrance, the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction, or after the second passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction and before the game ball next enters the entrance, the rotation restricting part prevents the second passive part from rotating in the second direction. As a result, after the game ball guiding part rotates to guide the game ball to one guide path, it can be prevented from rotating in the other direction before the next game ball enters, so that the next entered game ball is also guided to the same guide path as the game ball entered before the game ball. Therefore, the game balls entering the ball entrance can be alternately guided to the first start opening and the second start opening more accurately, and the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be evenly stored.

The gaming machine C1 comprises a game area, and a common starting opening for satisfying the first or second winning/non-winning condition when a game ball flowing down the playing area enters the gaming area, and the condition distributing means alternately establishes the first winning/non-winning determining condition and the second winning/non-winning determining condition each time a game ball enters the common starting opening.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, each time a game ball flowing down the game area enters the common starting hole, the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are alternately distributed by the condition distributing means in a controlled manner. As a result, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately played at the common starting port, and the game area can be made compact.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, after rearranging and displaying the reserved display modes in the reserved display means by the rearrangement means, when the first or second right/wrong judgment condition is newly satisfied, the reserved display modes showing the newly satisfied first or second right/wrong judgment conditions are displayed on the reserved display means in the order in which they are satisfied while maintaining the display order of the rearranged and displayed reserved display modes. 1.

According to the game machine D1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5 and B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first or second right/wrong judgment condition is met after the rearrangement means rearranges and displays the reserved display modes on the reserved display means, the newly established reserved display modes showing the first or second right/wrong judgment conditions are displayed on the reserved display means in the order of establishment while maintaining the display order of the rearranged and displayed reserved display modes. As a result, even when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is established after execution of the rearranged display and the corresponding reserved display mode is displayed, the display order of the rearranged reserved display modes is maintained, so that the player can accurately recognize the order of starting the dynamic display at the time of rearrangement. Therefore, the player can identify whether the reserved display mode is rearranged or the display mode is not rearranged by whether the timing of display in the reserved display mode is before or after the rearrangement. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize which order the reserved display mode indicates.

In the game machine of the game machine D1, when the reserved display mode in which the sorting display has been executed and the reserved display mode in which the sorting display has not been executed are mixedly displayed on the reserved display means, the rearranging means rearranges all the reserved display modes displayed in the reserved display means in the order of starting the dynamic display when a predetermined condition triggering the execution of the rearranging means is newly established.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition triggering the execution of the sorting means is newly established in a state in which the sorted display mode already executed and the non-executed pending display mode are mixedly displayed on the pending display means, all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means are sorted by the sorting means in the order of starting the dynamic display. As a result, even if the reserved display modes after sorting and unsorted are displayed in a mixed manner, the correct order of starting the dynamic display can be identified by the suspended display mode after sorting by executing the sorting again.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the holding information storage means stores normal holding information having at least win/fail judgment information used for the win/fail judgment by the win/fail judging means and dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail determination condition, and a first or second identification corresponding to the normal hold information stored in the normal holding storage area. Before the information becomes dynamically displayable, based on the normal reserved information, a permutation determination result by the pertinence determination means, the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the dynamic display start time information by the dynamic display start time information determination means are determined in advance and stored as permutation information, and when the first or second pertinence determination condition is newly established, the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each permutation information stored ahead of the permutation reservation storage area is newly established based on the dynamic display start time information. The game machine E1 is characterized by having rearrangement order determination means for determining the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal reservation information stored in the normal reservation storage area and the normal reservation information previously stored in the normal reservation storage area is started, and storing the order in the rearrangement reservation storage area.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second right/wrong judgment condition, the normal hold information having at least the right/wrong judgment information used for the right/wrong judgment and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode is stored in the normal hold storage area of the hold information storage means. Before the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal reservation information stored in the normal reservation storage area becomes possible, the propriety determination result, the dynamic display mode and the dynamic display start time information are determined in advance based on the normal reservation information and stored as the rearrangement information in the rearrangement reservation storage area of the reservation information storage means. When the first or second propriety determination condition is newly met, the order of starting the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly met normal reserve information stored in the normal reserve storage area and the normal reserve information previously stored in the normal reserve storage area is determined based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sort information stored ahead of the sort reserve storage area, and the order is stored in the sort reserve storage area by a sort order determining means. As a result, the data for executing the lottery game and the data for determining the order of sorting can be processed separately, and the process of determining the order of sorting can be facilitated. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the processing for executing the rearrangement, etc., and there is an effect that the development of the game machine can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 has main control means for executing main control of the game, and subordinate control means for executing game control according to the subordinate control signal output by the main control means, the main control means having the pending information storage means, the sorting information being stored in the sorting pending storage area of the holding information storing means, and each rearrangement stored in the sorting pending storage area each time the sorting order is determined by the sorting order determining means based on the sorting information. A game machine E2, characterized in that it outputs a prize winning signal indicating an order to a slave control means, and the slave control means has a slave reservation information storage means having a secondary rearrangement reservation storage area for storing each rearrangement order indicated by the prize winning signal based on the prize winning signal, and the rearrangement means for executing rearrangement of the reservation display modes based on the rearrangement order stored in the slave rearrangement reservation storage area.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the game control is executed by the sub-control means according to the sub-control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. Rearrangement information is stored in a rearrangement reservation storage area of a main control means, and each time a rearrangement order is determined by a rearrangement order determination means based on the rearrangement information, a winning signal indicating each rearrangement order stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area is output to a slave control means by the main control means. Further, in the subordinate control means, each sorting order indicated by the prize winning signal is stored in the subordinate sorting pending storage area of the subordinate pending information storing means. Then, the rearrangement means of the slave control means rearranges the reserved display modes based on the rearrangement order stored in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area. As a result, the main control means does not need to rearrange the pending display modes even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 has main control means for executing main control of a game, and subordinate control means for executing game control according to a subordinate control signal output by the main control means, the main control means having the pending information storage means, each time sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storing means, a winning signal indicating each sorting information stored in the sorting pending storage area is output to the slave control means, A game characterized by comprising, based on a prize signal, a secondary pending information storage means having a secondary sorting pending storage area for storing each sorting information indicated by the prize winning signal, the sorting order determining means for determining a sorting order based on a dynamic display start time in each sorting information in the secondary sorting pending storage area, and storing the sorting order in the secondary sorting pending storage area, and the sorting means for executing the sorting of the pending display mode based on the sorting order stored in the secondary sorting pending storage area. Machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the game control is executed by the sub-control means according to the sub-control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. Each time the rearrangement information is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area of the main control means, the main control means outputs a winning signal indicating each piece of rearrangement information stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area to the slave control means. Further, in the slave control means, each sorting information indicated by the prize winning signal is stored in the slave sorting pending storage area of the slave pending information storing means. Then, the rearrangement order is determined based on the dynamic display start time in the rearrangement information stored in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area, and stored in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area by the rearrangement order determination means of the slave control means. Based on the stored sorting order, the sorting means of the slave control means sorts the pending display modes. Thereby, the main control means does not need to determine the rearrangement order, and the slave control means can determine the rearrangement order based on the winning signal, so that the control load of the main control means can be reduced. Therefore, the rearrangement of the pending display modes can be executed while suppressing the control load of the main control means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, the holding information storage means stores, on the basis of the satisfaction of the first or second right/wrong judging condition, a normal holding storage area for storing right/wrong determination information used for the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determining means and dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means, and first or second identification information corresponding to each information stored in the normal holding storage area. before dynamic display becomes possible, based on each piece of information, the result of determination by the validity determination means, the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the dynamic display start time information by the dynamic display start time information determination means are determined in advance and stored as sorting information, and the sorting means stores the sorting valid information in the sorting pending storage area for each of the pending display modes displayed at that time when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and stores the sorting valid information in the sorting pending storage area. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that rearrangement of the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means is executed based on each sorting information of the areas.

According to the game machine F1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, and E1 to E3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second right/wrong determination condition, the right/wrong determination information used for right/wrong determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode are stored in the normal reserved storage area of the reserved information storage means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information stored in the normal reservation storage area becomes dynamically displayable, based on the information, the result of right/wrong determination, the dynamic display mode and the dynamic display start time information are determined in advance and stored as rearrangement information in the rearrangement reservation storage area of the reservation information storage means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, sorting effective information is stored in a sorting reservation storage area by a sorting means for each reservation display mode displayed at that time, and the reservation display modes displayed on the reservation display means are rearranged based on each sorting information of the sorting reservation storage area. Therefore, it is possible to accurately rearrange the pending display modes displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the order of starting the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine F1, the rearranging means repeatedly updates and displays the reserved display mode displayed on the reserved display means at each predetermined update opportunity, and the reserved display modes of the rearrangement reservation storage area storing the rearrangement effective information are rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, while the reserved display modes of the rearrangement reservation storage area in which the rearrangement effective information is not stored are displayed in the first or second order. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the display is performed in the order in which the success/fail determination conditions are established.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is repeatedly updated and displayed by the rearranging means at every predetermined update opportunity. The pending display modes of the sorting pending display area in which the sorting valid information is stored are sorted in the order of starting dynamic display and displayed by the sorting means. On the other hand, the pending display mode in which the sorting validity information is not stored is displayed by the sorting means in the order in which the first or second propriety determination condition is satisfied. Therefore, the rearranged pending display modes can be displayed while maintaining the order in which they are rearranged accurately in the order in which the dynamic display is started. Therefore, the sorted and non-sorted pending display modes can be separately displayed, and even if a new pending display mode is displayed after the sorting is executed, the player can easily recognize the order in which the dynamic display of the sorted pending display modes is started.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, lottery information for determining whether or not a first lottery game and a second lottery game to be executed after the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game is shifted to a special game state in which winning is more likely than usual, is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second success judgment condition, and the first or second lottery information is obtained. game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information when a win/fail judgment condition is satisfied and holding information corresponding to the hold judgment condition is stored; and the win/fail judgment means stores the hold information in the hold information storage means when the first or second win/fail judgment condition is newly met and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means, the second corresponding to the newly stored hold information. The game state lottery means determines whether the game state is the special game state when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information can be started, executes a preliminary judgment for determining whether the game is won or not in advance, stores the result in the hold information storage means, and if the result of the win or fail judgment is the time to shift to the special game state, and if the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is started is earlier than the hold information stored first, the hold information that is newly stored. The game state lottery means respectively determines whether the game state at the time of starting the dynamic display is the special game state for the reserved information that is in the order after the dynamic display start order corresponding to the dynamic display start order, and executes a preliminary determination for determining whether the game state is the special game state in advance, and stores the result in the reserved information storage means. Each time new pending information is stored in the game machine G1, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance and stored in the pending information storage means based on the determination result of the preliminary determination stored in the pending information storage means, and when the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the propriety determination means executed in that case.

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the following effects are obtained. That is, the lottery information for lottery whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the winning judgment between the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game is more likely to win than the normal time is drawn by the game state lottery means on the basis of the establishment of the first or the second winning judgment condition. In addition, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is satisfied and the reservation information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is stored, the lottery result is stored in the reservation information storage means by the game state lottery means in association with the reservation information. When the first or second right/wrong determination condition is newly established and the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means, based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, the game state lottery means judges whether the game state is a special game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored pending information becomes capable of starting the dynamic display, and the right/fail determination means performs a preliminary determination to make a right/fail determination in advance, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. remembered. Then, if the result is a win to shift to a special game state, and if the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored reservation information is started is earlier than the previously stored reservation information, the game state lottery means judges whether the game state when the dynamic display is started is the special game state again for the reservation information in the subsequent order, and the success determination means executes the preliminary judgment for making the win/fail judgment in advance, and the result is stored in the hold information storage means. Until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means can be started, each time new hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination means and stored in the hold information storage means based on the determination result of the prior determination. On the other hand, when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can be started, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result of the propriety determination means executed in that case. Thus, even when the reservation information is newly stored and the order of starting the dynamic display is changed, and the validity judgment result of the previously stored reservation information is changed, the validity judgment result can be appropriately re-judged in advance. Therefore, the dynamic display mode can be determined again based on the latest propriety determination result, and the order in which the dynamic display starts can be correctly determined. Thus, the pending presentations can be reordered in the order in which the dynamic presentation begins.

Main control means for performing main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing game control based on a sub-control signal from the main control means, said main control means having a success/failure determination means for executing a first lottery game success/failure determination based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/fail determination means for executing a second lottery game success/failure determination based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition; first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating success/failure determination results of a technique in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are satisfied; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the success/failure determination results of a second lottery game by the success/failure determination means of the main control means in the order in which the second success/failure determination conditions are satisfied; and display control means capable of dynamically controlling display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means. In a gaming machine in which a privilege game that is advantageous to a player is awarded when the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means in a display mode indicating win, the main control means includes dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode in which the first or second identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined dynamic display time based on the determination result of the win/fail determination means, and the dynamic display mode determination means. display mode signal generation means for generating a display mode signal based on the dynamic display mode determined in step 1 and outputting the display mode signal to the sub-control means; and management signal generation means for generating, when one of the first and second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win and the other first or second identification information is being displayed dynamically, an interruption signal for instructing interruption of the dynamic display, and a restart signal for instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display based on the end of the privilege game based on the win. The display control means of the slave control means dynamically displays the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal on the first or second display means based on the reception of the display mode signal, the slave control means includes dynamic display time measurement means for measuring the dynamic display time based on the reception of the display mode signal, slave time management means for suspending the measurement by the dynamic display time measurement means based on the reception of the interruption signal, and the remainder of the suspended dynamic display mode on the reception of the restart signal. from the time measured by the dynamic display time measuring means, and according to the remaining dynamic display time, determine the dynamic redisplay mode, which is the dynamic display mode to be displayed during the remaining dynamic display time of the interrupted first or second identification information.

According to the gaming machine H1, game control is executed by the sub-control means according to the sub-control signal from the main control means that executes the main control of the game. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Further, in the sub-control means, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are established. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is provided. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Further, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information for a predetermined dynamic display time. A display mode signal is generated by the display mode signal generation means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and output to the slave control means. When one of the first and second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, and the other first or second identification information is dynamically displayed, an interruption signal instructing interruption of the dynamic display is generated by the management signal generating means. On the other hand, when the bonus game based on the win is completed, the management signal generation means generates a restart signal for instructing the restart of the interrupted dynamic display. Further, in the slave control means, the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal is displayed by the display control means on the first or second display means based on the reception of the display mode signal. Based on the reception of the display mode signal from the main control means, the dynamic display time is measured by the dynamic display time measuring means. Measurement by the dynamic display time measurement means is interrupted by the slave time management means based on the reception of the interruption signal from the main control means. On the other hand, based on the reception of the restart signal from the main control means, the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended dynamic display mode is determined from the time measured by the dynamic display time measuring means, and according to the remaining dynamic display time, the dynamic display mode, which is the dynamic display mode to be displayed during the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended first or second identification information, is determined by the passive redisplay mode determining means. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information interrupted during the privilege game is started, the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining time is determined, so that the player can be informed of the lottery result in an easy-to-understand manner in the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining dynamic display time. Further, even if the main control means does not select the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining dynamic display time and instruct the sub-control means, the sub-control means determines the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining dynamic display time, so that the control load of the main control means can be reduced. Therefore, even in a gaming machine that executes the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the main control means and perform various game effects.

In the game machine of the gaming machine H1, the passive redisplay mode determination means determines the short dynamic redisplay mode that is the dynamic redisplay mode configured with the dynamic display time within the reference time when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is less than or equal to the reference time, and determines the normal dynamic redisplay mode that is the dynamic redisplay mode configured with the dynamic display time longer than the reference time when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time. Technique H2.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the slave redisplay mode determination means determines the short dynamic redisplay mode, which is the dynamic redisplay mode configured with the dynamic display time within the reference time. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, the normal dynamic redisplay mode is determined by the passive redisplay determining means. Therefore, the dynamic redisplay mode can be determined according to the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even when the remaining dynamic display time becomes short, the determination result of the lottery game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by determining the dedicated dynamic re-display mode.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is satisfied; and second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied; display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on satisfaction of the first success judgment condition; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition; storage means and frequency determination means for determining the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination means, when the number of times determination means determines that the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are satisfied is different from a predetermined number of times or more, change the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever has been met more frequently, to the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever is fewer. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that a short dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode with a shorter dynamic display time than a dynamic display mode corresponding to a determination condition, is determined.

According to claim I1, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/fail determination result of the first lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/fail determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are met. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the reserve storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number of times, respectively. The frequency determination means determines the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are met. When the number-of-times determining means determines that the number of times each of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is met differs by a predetermined number or more, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition, which is met more frequently, to be a short dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode having a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition, which is met less often. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the success/failure judgment condition with the larger establishment frequency is performed in a short period of time, so that the difference in establishment frequency between the first success/failure judgment condition and the second success/failure judgment condition stored in the holding storage means can be adjusted to be small. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is satisfied; and second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied; display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on satisfaction of the first success judgment condition; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition; storage means and frequency determination means for determining the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are satisfied, and the dynamic display mode determination means, when the number of times determination means determines that the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are satisfied is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, changes the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever is met less frequently, to the first or second success/failure determination condition that is greater. A game machine I2 characterized in that a long dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode with a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the determination condition, is determined.

According to the gaming machine I2, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/fail determination result of the first lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the reserve storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number of times, respectively. The frequency determination means determines the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are satisfied. When the number-of-times determining means determines that the number of times each of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is met differs by a predetermined number of times or more, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition which is met less frequently to the long dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition which is met more times. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the success/failure judgment condition with the smaller establishment frequency becomes longer, and the number of establishment times of the success/failure judgment condition stored in the holding storage means becomes difficult to decrease, so that the difference in the establishment frequency between the first success/failure judgment condition and the second success/failure judgment condition stored in the holding storage means can be adjusted to be small. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the first or second success determination condition becomes newly possible, the frequency determination means determines the number of times the first success determination condition and the second success determination condition stored in the holding storage means are met, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result determined by the frequency determination means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second right/wrong judgment condition is newly enabled, the number of times the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the holding storage means are met is judged by the number of times judging means. Then, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result. Therefore, the dynamic display mode determination means can determine the dynamic display mode based on the latest information on the number of establishments stored in the reservation storage means in accordance with the timing of starting the dynamic display.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode regardless of the determination result of the number of times determination means when the determination result of the win/fail determination means is a hit, and determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result of the number of times determination means when the determination result of the win/fail determination means is a loss.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the win/fail determination means is hit, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means regardless of the determination result of the number of times determination means. On the other hand, when the determination result of the success/fail determination means is out, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the determination result of the number of times determination means. Therefore, in the case of a hit, the normal dynamic display mode indicating the win can be determined to make the player fully expect whether or not it will be a privilege game, and in the case of a loss, the dynamic display mode for adjusting the number of establishments stored in the holding storage means can be determined to prevent the performance of the game from being spoiled.

A game machine I5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines I1 to I4, the difference equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times is determined to be a difference of two times or more.

According to the game machine described in the game machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine described in any one of the game machines I1 to I4, when it is determined that there is a difference of two times or more, the dynamic display mode for adjusting the number of establishments stored in the holding storage means is determined, so it is possible to prevent the short dynamic display mode or the long dynamic display mode from being frequently determined and making the game performance difficult to understand.

In any one of the gaming machines I1, I3 to I5, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the short dynamic display mode when the number of times the first or second success/failure determination condition, which is stored in the holding storage means and which has the greater number of times of satisfaction, is met a predetermined number of times or more, and when the number of times determination means determines that there is a difference of a predetermined number or more.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1, I3 to I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times the first or second right/wrong determination condition, whichever is greater, stored in the holding storage means is met more than a predetermined number of times and the number of times determination means determines that there is a difference of more than a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the short dynamic display mode. Therefore, when the number of establishment times equal to or more than the predetermined number is not stored, the short dynamic display mode is not determined even if the number determination means has a difference equal to or more than the predetermined number of times, so that frequent determination of the short dynamic display mode and monotonous presentation of the game can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines I2 to I5, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the long dynamic display mode when the number of times the first or second success/failure determination condition is satisfied stored in the holding storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, and when the number of times determination means determines that there is a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of establishments of the first or second adequacy determination condition, whichever is larger, stored in the holding storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, and the number of times determination means determines that there is a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the long dynamic display mode. Therefore, when the number of establishment times equal to or more than the predetermined number is not stored, the long dynamic display mode is not determined even if the number determination means has a difference equal to or more than the predetermined number of times, so that the long dynamic display mode is frequently determined and the performance of the game is prevented from becoming monotonous.

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7, the dynamic display mode determining means predetermines each of the dynamic display modes before dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserved storage means can be started, and determines one of the plurality of long dynamic display modes based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination condition stored in the reserved storage means that has a greater number of fulfillment times among the predetermined dynamic display modes. A gaming machine I8 characterized in that it determines a display mode.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, before dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition stored in the reserved storage means becomes possible, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination means. One long dynamic display mode among a plurality of long dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success/fail judgment condition stored in the reserved storage means with the larger number of establishment times among the dynamic display modes determined in advance. Therefore, by determining the long-term dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display mode determined in advance corresponding to the propriety determination condition with the smaller number of times of establishment stored in the reserve storage means, the long-term dynamic display mode more suitable for reducing the difference in the number of times of mutual establishment can be determined.

In any one of gaming machines I2 to I5, I7, or I8, the dynamic display mode determination means predetermines the dynamic display modes before dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserved storage means can be started, and among the predetermined dynamic display modes, the long dynamic display is performed based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination condition stored in the reserved storage means that has been met more times. A gaming machine I9 characterized in that it determines the dynamic display time of a mode.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7 or I8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display modes are determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination means before dynamic display of the identification information can be started even though the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition stored in the reserved storage means are met. The dynamic display time of the long dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination condition in the one of the pre-determined dynamic display modes with the larger number of establishment times stored in the reservation storage means. Therefore, since the long dynamic display mode is determined in accordance with the dynamic display time of the determined dynamic display mode with the larger number of times of establishment, it is possible to further reduce the difference in the number of times of establishment.

A first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is established; second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are established; and display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively; dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the first success judgment condition; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition; Storage means, continuous satisfaction monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first success judgment condition and the second success judgment condition has been satisfied continuously, and the dynamic display mode determining means, when the continuous success monitoring means determines that one of the first success judgment condition and the second success judgment condition has been successively met, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success judgment condition which has been successively met corresponds to the other first or second success judgment condition. A gaming machine I10 characterized in that a short dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode with a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode, is determined.

According to the gaming machine I10, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/fail determination result of the first lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/fail determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the reserve storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number of times, respectively. Then, whether or not one of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is continuously met is determined by the continuous satisfaction monitoring means. When the continuous satisfaction monitoring means determines that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is successively met, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition that is successively satisfied to be a short dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode having a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second success/failure determination condition. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the success/failure judgment condition which is successively satisfied is performed in a short time, so that the difference in the number of establishment times between the first success/failure judgment condition and the second success/failure judgment condition stored in the holding storage means can be adjusted to be small. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is satisfied; and second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied; display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on satisfaction of the first success judgment condition; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition; The storage means, continuous satisfaction monitoring means for determining whether or not one of the first success judgment condition and the second success judgment condition has been successively met, and the dynamic display mode determination means, when the continuous success monitoring means determines that either the first success judgment condition or the second success judgment condition has been successively met, display the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success judgment condition, whichever has not been successively met, to the first or second success judgment condition which has been successively met. A gaming machine I11 characterized in that a long dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode with a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the determination condition, is determined.

According to the gaming machine I11, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/fail determination result of the first lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the reserve storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number of times, respectively. Then, whether or not one of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is continuously met is determined by the continuous satisfaction monitoring means. When the continuous satisfaction monitoring means determines that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is successively satisfied, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition which is not continuously satisfied to be a long dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition which is continuously satisfied. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the success/failure judgment condition which is not successively established is lengthened, and the number of times the success/failure judgment condition is satisfied stored in the holding storage means is difficult to decrease, so that the difference in the number of establishment times between the first success/failure judgment condition and the second success/failure judgment condition stored in the holding storage means can be adjusted to be small. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

A gaming machine I12 characterized by having a condition allocating means for assisting alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition in any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11.

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the condition sorting means assists so that the first yes/no judgment condition and the second yes/no judgment condition are satisfied alternately. Therefore, the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition are established substantially evenly, and the number of establishments of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition can be easily stored in the holding storage means up to the upper limit number of times.

The gaming machine I10 or I12 has frequency determination means for determining the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the holding storage means are met, the dynamic display mode determination means prevents the continuous success monitoring means from determining that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition has been successively met, and the number of times determination means determines that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition have each been met a predetermined number of times or more. A game machine I13 characterized in that, when it is determined that there is a difference, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever is met more frequently, is determined to be the short dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I10 or I12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are met is determined by the frequency determination means. When the continuous satisfaction monitoring means does not determine that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is satisfied continuously, and the number of times determination means determines that the number of times each of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is satisfied is different from a predetermined number of times or more, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever is met more frequently, to be the short dynamic display mode. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, even when the condition is not established continuously, if there is a difference of a predetermined number or more in the number of establishments, the lottery game corresponding to the success/failure determination condition with the larger number of establishments is performed in a short time, so that the difference in the number of establishments between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means can be adjusted to be small. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

The game machine I11 or I12 has a frequency determination means for determining the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are met, the dynamic display mode determination means does not determine that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is continuously met, and the number of times determination means has a difference of a predetermined number of times or more between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition. A game machine I14 characterized in that the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever has the smaller number of times of establishment, is determined to be the long dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I11 or I12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are met is determined by the frequency determination means. When the continuous satisfaction monitoring means does not determine that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is satisfied continuously, and the number of times determination means determines that the number of times each of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is satisfied is different from a predetermined number of times or more, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever is met more frequently, to be the short dynamic display mode. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this way, even when the condition is not established continuously, if there is a difference of a predetermined number or more in the number of times of establishment, the lottery game corresponding to the success/failure determination condition with the smaller number of times of establishment becomes longer, and the number of times of establishment of the success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means is difficult to decrease, so that the difference in the number of establishment times between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means can be adjusted to be small. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

The game machine J1 is characterized by having a rearrangement notification means for notifying an executed notification mode indicating that the rearrangement is executed when the rearrangement means executes the rearrangement of the reserved display modes displayed at that time when the predetermined condition is established in any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, and G1.

According to the game machine J1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, and G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the holding display mode displayed at that time is rearranged with the establishment of a predetermined condition as a trigger, the executed notification mode indicating that the rearrangement is executed is notified by the rearrangement notification means. In this way, the player can identify whether the currently displayed pending display mode indicates the order of establishment or the order of starting the dynamic display from the executed notification mode, so that there is an effect that the player's confusion in the game can be suppressed.

In the game machine J1, the rearrangement notification means displays, as the executed notification mode, the execution of the rearrangement on the holding display means in an identifiable display mode.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the executed notification mode, the rearrangement notification means displays in a display mode in which it is identifiable that the rearrangement has been executed on the pending display means. Therefore, by notifying the execution completion notification mode to the same suspension display means as the suspension display mode, the execution completion notification mode can be displayed closer to the suspension display mode, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the execution completion notification mode.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the rearrangement notification means notifies the reserved display mode displayed when the rearrangement is executed by the rearrangement means in the executed notification mode indicating that the rearrangement has been executed, while notifying the reserved display mode displayed after the rearrangement is executed by the rearrangement means in the unexecuted notification mode indicating that the rearrangement has not been executed.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rearrangement notification means notifies the suspended display mode displayed when the rearrangement is executed by the rearrangement means. On the other hand, for the pending display mode displayed after the sorting is executed by the sorting means, the sorting notifying means notifies the non-execution notification mode indicating that the sorting has not been executed. Therefore, the player can distinguish whether the rearrangement has been executed or the rearrangement has not been executed, and the player can more easily recognize the order of the reserved display modes, thereby preventing confusion in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, when the predetermined condition is established, there is rearrangement identification means for individually identifying the pending display modes rearranged by the rearrangement means in an order different from the fulfillment order, and the rearrangement notification means notifies, as the executed notification mode, in a display mode indicating that the pending display modes are displayed in a rearrangement order different from the establishment order based on the information identified by the rearrangement identification means. A gaming machine J4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is established, the pending display modes rearranged by the rearrangement means in an order different from the establishment order are individually identified by the rearrangement identification means. As the executed notification mode, the rearrangement notification means reports a display mode indicating a pending display mode displayed in a rearrangement order different from the establishment order based on the information identified by the rearrangement identification means. As a result, the player can easily recognize the pending display modes in which the variation start order is different from the establishment order, and can more easily recognize the order in which the pending display modes are displayed.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the holding display means has a winning order holding display area for displaying the holding display modes in the winning order holding display area, and a start order holding display area for displaying the holding display modes in the order in which the dynamic display is started separately from the winning order holding display area. The game machine J5 characterized in that the reserved display mode is displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display rearranged by the rearrangement means in the start order reserved display area while maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it is displayed by the order of establishment reservation display area of the reservation display means in the order in which the reservation display modes are established. In addition to the establishment order reservation display area, the reservation display modes are displayed in the start order reservation display area of the reservation display means in the order in which the dynamic display is started. While the reserved display mode is displayed in the order of establishment reserved display area, the display of the reserved display mode in the order of establishment reserved display area is maintained and the reserved display modes are displayed in the order rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of start reserved display area, ignited by the establishment of a predetermined condition. As a result, the player can simultaneously identify the pending display mode before rearrangement and after rearrangement is executed, and can easily determine how the rearrangement is executed.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, J1 to J5, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win, temporary stopping means for temporarily stopping the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed, and re-dynamically displaying the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped first or second identification information again after the end of the privilege game. display start means, and based on the first or second identification information being displayed in a display mode indicating a win, the dynamic display start time information determination means re-determines the time information until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means starts, and the time information until the start of dynamic display starting from the end of the privilege game, and stores the information in the hold information storage means.

According to the gaming machine K1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, and J1 to J5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means when the first or second identification information is displayed in the display mode indicating the win. After the end of the privilege game, the dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped first or second identification information is dynamically displayed again by the re-dynamic display starting means. Based on the fact that the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win, the time information until the dynamic display start of the first or second identification information corresponding to the reservation information stored in the reservation information display means is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the reservation information storage means. In this way, when the privilege game is started, the time information until the start of the dynamic display is re-determined as the time information starting from the end of the privilege game, so that even when a predetermined condition is established during the privilege game, the reserved display modes can be rearranged in the order of starting the dynamic display accurately.

In the gaming machine K1, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating winning, the dynamic display start time information determining means determines time information from the end of the privilege game to the start of dynamic display based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily suspended identification information and the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored suspension information for the pending information stored in the pending information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that, for the pending information stored in the pending information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information displayed in the display mode indicating the win, the time from the end of the privilege game to the start of the dynamic display is re-determined based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored pending information.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win, the dynamic display start time information determination means redetermines the time information until the start of dynamic display starting from the end of the privilege game for the pending information stored in the pending information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored pending information. On the other hand, with respect to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information displayed in the display mode indicating the winning, based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored pending information, the dynamic display start time information determining means re-determines the time from the end of the privilege game to the start of the dynamic display. Therefore, the time information until the start of dynamic display is determined by distinguishing between the hold information corresponding to the temporarily stopped identification information and the hold information that is not temporarily stopped, so that more accurate time information until the start of dynamic display can be determined.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the holding information storage means stores the normal holding information having at least the winning judgment information used for the winning judgment by the winning judgment means and the dynamic display determining information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the satisfaction of the first or second winning judgment condition, and the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal waiting information stored in the normal waiting storage area is stored based on the normal waiting information before the dynamic display becomes possible. a success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means, a dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the time information by the dynamic display start time information determination means are determined in advance and stored as sorting information, and the time information stored as the sorting information is updated and stored by the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win; The game machine K3 is characterized by having a rearrangement order determining means for determining, when a propriety determination condition is newly established, based on the time information corresponding to each rearrangement information stored ahead of the rearrangement reservation storage area, the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established normal reservation information stored in the normal reservation storage area and the normal reservation information previously stored in the normal reservation storage area is started, and storing the order in the rearrangement reservation storage area. .

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second right/wrong determination condition, the normal hold information having at least the right/wrong determination information used for the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means and the dynamic display determination information used for determination of the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored in the normal hold storage area of the hold information storage means. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal reservation information stored in the normal reservation storage area becomes dynamically displayable, based on the normal reservation information, the success judgment result by the success judgment means, the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the time information by the dynamic display start time information determination means are determined in advance and stored as the rearrangement information in the rearrangement reservation storage area of the reservation information storage means. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating winning, the time information stored as the sorting information is updated to the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the sorting reserve storage area. When the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established, the order of starting the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established normal reservation information stored in the normal reservation storage area and the normal reservation information previously stored in the normal reservation storage area is determined by a rearrangement order determination means based on the time information corresponding to each piece of rearrangement information stored ahead of the rearrangement reservation storage area, and the order is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area. As a result, the data for executing the lottery game and the data for determining the order of sorting can be processed separately, and the process of determining the order of sorting can be easily performed. Further, even when the privilege game starts, the time information is updated with the time information starting from the end of the privilege game, so that the rearrangement can be easily executed even during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine K3, the rearrangement order determination means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied during the privilege game, the first identification information and the second identification information respectively corresponding to the newly established normal reservation information stored in the normal reservation storage area and the normal reservation information previously stored in the normal reservation storage area based on the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time determination means corresponding to each rearrangement information previously stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area. A gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the order in which the dynamic display is started is determined with the end of the privilege game as a starting point, and the order is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is met during the privilege game, based on the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time determining means corresponding to each sorting information previously stored in the sorting reservation storage area, the order in which the dynamic display starts is rearranged starting from the end of the privilege game of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the newly established normal holding information stored in the normal holding storage area and the normal holding information previously stored in the normal holding storage area. The order is determined by the order determination means, and the order is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area.

Therefore, even for the first or second right/wrong determination condition established during a privilege game, the order of starting more accurate dynamic display can be determined, and the reserved display modes can be rearranged in the order of starting accurate dynamic display. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed even when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied during the privilege game.

Main control means for executing the main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing the game control according to instructions from the main control means, the main control means executes the success/failure determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, and the first success/fail determination based on the result of the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. The determination signal includes a success/failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success/failure determination signal based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means, and the subordinate control means includes first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game based on the first success/failure determination signal, and second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game based on the second success/failure determination signal. and a display means, wherein a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is awarded when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a hit and the first or second identification information indicating win is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means, the main control means determines a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the hit/fail determination condition that has been established based on the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, and based on the establishment of the second win/fail judgment condition, the hit/fail judgment condition that has been established. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the first or second determination condition, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is started when the first or second determination condition is satisfied, with the success determination information related to the determination by the determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as main reserved information, the order information in which the success determination condition corresponding to the main reserved information is satisfied and the success determination condition satisfied. main holding information storage means for identifiably storing whether is a first right/wrong judgment condition or a second right/wrong judgment condition; and main holding information signal generating means for generating a main holding information signal for notifying a slave control means of information concerning the stored main holding information based on the fact that the main holding information is stored in the main holding information storing means; Information storage means, while discriminating sub-reservation information of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the sub-reservation information storage means, a suspension display means for displaying in a suspension display mode in which the order of establishment of the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition for each sub-suspension information is identifiable; Display mode determining means, and when secondary pending information is newly stored in the secondary pending information storage means, based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determining means for each piece of secondary pending information previously stored in the secondary pending information storage means, time information until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information is started is determined and dynamically stored in the secondary pending information storage means. A gaming machine L1 comprising: display start time information determination means; and rearrangement means for rearranging the suspension display modes displayed on the suspension display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each of the time information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means when a predetermined condition is established.

According to the game machine L1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination information related to the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means by the right/wrong determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are set as the main reserved information, the order information of whether the right/wrong determination condition corresponding to the main reserved information is satisfied and whether the satisfied right/wrong judgment condition is the first right/wrong judgment condition or the second right/wrong judgment condition. It is stored in the main reservation information storage means in such a way that it can be identified as being a negative judgment condition. In the main control means, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information on the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the subsidiary control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. While distinguishing sub-holding information of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the sub-holding information storage means, the establishment order of the right/wrong judgment condition combining the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition for each sub-hold information is displayed by the holding display means as the display of the identifiable holding display mode. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is discriminated by the slave display mode determination means based on the slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. When new secondary pending information is stored in the secondary pending information storage means, time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information can be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determining means for each piece of secondary pending information previously stored in the secondary pending information storage means, and stored in the secondary pending information storage means. Then, in the slave control means, when a predetermined condition is established, the suspension display mode displayed on the suspension display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information during dynamic display is a longer dynamic display mode than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information during dynamic display, the start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information of the second lottery game is earlier than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. However, since the reserved display mode is displayed in order in the reserved display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the second lottery game newly stored suspension display mode is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the previously stored suspension information of the first lottery game. Then, although the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the propriety determination conditions may differ, the real dynamic display start order is rearranged and displayed by the rearrangement means, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, even when the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual success/failure determination conditions are established, the reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means in the dynamic display start order, so that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be suppressed.

Main control means for executing the main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing the game control according to instructions from the main control means, the main control means executes the success/failure determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, and the first success/fail determination based on the result of the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. The determination signal includes a success/failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success/failure determination signal based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means, and the subordinate control means includes first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game based on the first success/failure determination signal, and second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game based on the second success/failure determination signal. and a display means, wherein a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is awarded when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win and the first or second identification information indicating the win is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means. Establishment signal generating means for generating a notifying establishment signal and outputting to the slave control means in the order in which the first or second success judgment conditions are satisfied; Dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the success judgment condition established based on the establishment of the first success judgment condition, and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the success judgment condition established based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition;
When the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination information related to the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main reserved information to determine whether the right/wrong determination condition satisfied order information corresponding to the main reserved information and whether the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is the first right/wrong determination condition or the second right/wrong determination condition. main holding information storage means for identifiably storing; and main holding information signal generating means for generating a main holding information signal for notifying the sub control means of information relating to the main holding information stored in the main holding information storage means based on the fact that the main holding information is stored in the main holding information storage means. a sub-holding number storage means for distinguishing between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition indicated by the establishment signal, and storing the order in which the success/failure determination conditions that combine the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are met as sub-reserved number information so as to be identifiable; holding display means for displaying, in a holding display manner, the order in which the success/failure determination conditions, which are a combination of the first right/failure determination condition and the second right/failure determination condition, are identifiable for each case; a secondary pending information storage means for storing, as secondary pending information, information relating to the main pending information indicated by the main pending information signal, based on the reception of the main pending information signal; When new secondary pending information is stored in the secondary pending information storage means, time information until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information is started is determined based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determination means for each piece of secondary pending information previously stored in the secondary pending information storage means, and dynamic display start time information is stored in the secondary pending information storage means. and a rearrangement means for rearranging the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on the time information stored in the secondary pending information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determining means when a predetermined condition is established.

According to the game machine L2 description, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, based on the satisfaction of the first or second success judgment condition, the first success judgment condition and the second success judgment condition are distinguished from each other, and a success signal for notifying that the first or second success judgment condition has been met is generated by the establishment signal generating means and output to the subordinate control means in the order in which the first or second success judgment conditions are met. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination information related to the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means by the right/wrong determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are set as the main reserved information, the order information of whether the right/wrong determination condition corresponding to the main reserved information is satisfied and whether the satisfied right/wrong judgment condition is the first right/wrong judgment condition or the second right/wrong judgment condition. It is stored in the main reservation information storage means in such a way that it can be identified as being a negative judgment condition. In the main control means, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information on the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored. Then, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the success/failure determination condition that triggered generation of the success/failure determination condition can be displayed dynamically based on the reception of the success/failure signal, the slave control means stores the information about the number of times the success/failure signal is received as the slave retention number information so that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition can be distinguished from each other, and the succession order of the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition can be identified. remembered. In the slave control means, based on the sub-reservation number information stored in the sub-reservation number storage means, while distinguishing the sub-reservation number information between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition, the establishment order of the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition for each sub-reservation number information is displayed in a identifiable suspension display mode by the reservation display means. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the slave control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is discriminated by the subordinate display mode discrimination means based on the sub-suspension information stored in the sub-suspension information storage means. In the slave control means, when new secondary pending information is stored in the secondary pending information storage means, the dynamic display start time information determining means determines time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information can be dynamically displayed based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determining means for each piece of secondary pending information previously stored in the secondary pending information storage means, and is stored in the secondary pending information storage means. Then, in the slave control means, when a predetermined condition is established, the suspension display mode displayed on the suspension display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information during dynamic display is a longer dynamic display mode than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information during dynamic display, the start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information of the second lottery game is earlier than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. However, since the reserved display mode is displayed in order in the reserved display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the second lottery game newly stored suspension display mode is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the previously stored suspension information of the first lottery game. Then, although the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the propriety determination conditions may differ, the real dynamic display start order is rearranged and displayed by the rearrangement means, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, even when the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual success/failure determination conditions are established, the reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means in the dynamic display start order, so that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

A gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it has a condition sorting means for assisting alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition in the gaming machine L1 or L2.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sorting means assists the alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition. As a result, the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are easily established evenly, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game are efficiently executed, so that many games can be played in a short time.

In any one of game machines L1 to L3, when receiving the main hold information signal and sub hold information is stored in the sub hold information storage means, the rearrangement means determines the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established sub hold information and the previously stored sub hold information based on the time information corresponding to each of the sub hold information previously stored in the sub hold information storage means, associates the order with the sub hold information, and associates the order with the sub hold information storage means. A game machine L4 characterized in that it is stored in the game machine L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a main hold information signal is received and sub-hold information is stored in the sub-hold information storage means, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information to be newly stored and the hold information previously stored is determined based on the time information corresponding to each of the sub-hold information previously stored in the sub-hold information storage means, and the order is stored in the sub-hold information storage means by the sorting means in association with each sub-hold information. As a result, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the secondary hold information is stored. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display modes can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when the dynamic display start order is changed, the reserved display modes can be rearranged in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player can be notified of the correct dynamic display start order.

A game machine L5 characterized in that any one of the game machines L1 to L4 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and the rearrangement means rearranges the reserved display modes on the assumption that the predetermined condition is established when the operation means is operated.

According to the game described in the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the player operates the operation means, the reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to rearrange the reserved display mode at the timing intended by the player, and inform the player of the correct dynamic display start order at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order.

5. The gaming machine L6 according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the rearrangement means rearranges the holding display modes displayed on the holding display means assuming that the predetermined condition is met when the establishment signal or the main holding information signal is received.

According to the game described in the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the establishment signal or the main holding information signal is received from the main control means, the holding display mode displayed on the holding display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means assuming that the predetermined condition is established. Thus, when a new reserved display mode is displayed, the reserved display modes are rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

The main control means acquires the lottery information for lottery whether or not the success judgment between the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the privilege game is executed is shifted to a special game state in which the winning is more likely than usual, based on the establishment of the first or second success judgment condition. Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the sub-reserved information stored in the sub-reserved information storage means becomes possible, the sub-control means determines whether the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the sub-reserved information becomes dynamically displayable is the special game state based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, and performs a win-or-fail judgment in advance according to the lottery information. and stores the results in the secondary hold information storage means in association with each of the secondary hold information, and the secondary display mode determination means of the slave control means determines the dynamic display mode based on the preliminary determination results stored in the secondary hold information storage means and the dynamic display decision information until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means becomes possible. A game machine L7 according to any one of 1 to 6.

According to the game machine described in the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the lottery information for lottery whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the winning judgment of the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after executing the privilege game is more likely to win than in the normal time is acquired by the game state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or the second winning judgment condition. Also, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is established and the main reservation information corresponding to the established judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is stored in the main reservation information storage means by the game state lottery means in association with the main reservation information. In the slave control means, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means can be started, based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means, the game state lottery means determines whether or not the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to each slave hold information becomes dynamically displayable is a special game state according to the lottery information, and a preliminary determination is executed by the advance determination means to determine whether the game is successful or not in advance. Then, the results are stored in the sub-holding storage means by the sub-prior determination means in association with each sub-holding information. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the subordinate hold information stored in the subordinate hold information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display, the dynamic display mode is determined by the subordinate display determination means of the slave control means based on the determination result of the preliminary determination stored in the subordinate hold information storage means by the pre-engagement determination means and the dynamic display determination information. As a result, even if the secondary hold information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the game state at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the win/loss determination is performed. Therefore, it is possible to determine the dynamic display time information in advance based on the correct success/failure determination result, and to determine the dynamic display start order even when a new success/failure determination condition is satisfied next time.

A first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is established; second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are established; and display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively; In a gaming machine having a technique execution means, a condition distribution means for assisting alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition, a reservation storage means for storing the right to perform the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number of times when the first or second success/failure determination condition is established with the assistance of the condition allocation means, and the condition allocation means establish either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition next. The gaming machine M1 is characterized by comprising establishment condition identifying means for identifying whether the condition is in a state of assisting, and identification result notifying means for notifying the player of information indicating the identification result based on the identification result of the establishment identifying means.

According to the gaming machine M1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Alternating establishment of the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition is assisted by the condition sorting means. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is met with the assistance of the condition sorting means, the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit is stored by the reservation storage means. Further, the establishment condition identifying means identifies which of the first yes/no judgment condition and the second yes/no judgment condition is to be established next by the condition allocating means. Based on the identification result of the establishment condition identification means, information indicating the identification result is notified to the player by the identification result notification means. As a result, the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are likely to be established evenly, the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be equally stored, and it is possible to prevent one of the right to perform the first lottery game and the right to perform the second lottery game from being biased and stored earlier to the upper limit number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game is stored up to the upper limit, but one of the rights exceeds the upper limit and becomes invalid. In addition, since the state of the sorting means is notified by the identification result reporting means which state is the success/failure determination condition to be assisted to be established next, even if the reported success/failure determination condition to be assisted to be established next is established, if the success/failure determination condition is overflowed, the player can play the game so that the success/failure determination condition is not established, and the overflow can be suppressed.

The gaming machine M1 has a game area, a first start opening that satisfies the first success/failure determination condition when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, and a second start opening that satisfies the second success/failure determination condition when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area. 2. The gaming machine M2 according to claim 1, characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine M1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first starting hole, the first win-or-fail judgment condition is satisfied, while when the game ball enters the second starting hole, the second win-or-fail judgment condition is satisfied. The alternate entry of game balls into the first start hole and the second start hole is assisted by the game ball guide part of the condition distribution means. As a result, the player can easily enter the game balls alternately into the first start hole and the second start hole by causing the game balls to flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently, so that many lottery games can be played in a shorter time.

In the gaming machine M2, the condition distribution means has a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, a first guideway that guides a game ball that has entered the ball entrance to the first starting hole via the game ball guide section, and a second guideway that guides the game ball to the second start hole via the game ball guide section. After the game ball is guided to the first guide path by rotating to a predetermined angle, the game ball entered from the ball entrance is received while being rotated in the first direction, and is rotated to the second direction opposite to the first direction by a predetermined angle to guide the game ball to the second guide path.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the game ball received from the ball entry port of the condition distribution means is turned in the first direction up to a predetermined angle and guided by the game ball guide portion to the first start port via the first guide path, the game ball is received in the state of being rotated to the first direction by the predetermined angle in the first direction, and is rotated in the second direction opposite to the first direction by the predetermined angle, and the game ball is guided to the second start port via the second guide path. is induced by As a result, it is possible to alternately distribute and guide the game balls to the first start port and the second start port by using a common member, and the structure for distributing the game balls can be made compact compared with the case of providing members for distributing to the first start port and the second start port.

In the gaming machine M3, the game ball guide part of the condition sorting means is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in the state of being rotated in the first direction up to a predetermined angle, and is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance to rotate in the second direction up to a predetermined angle. a second passive part that rotates, and a rotation restricting part that prevents the first passive part from rotating in the first direction after it receives a game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction and before the game ball next enters the ball entrance, or from rotating in the second direction after the second passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction and before the game ball next enters the ball entrance. A gaming machine M4 characterized by:

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, the following effects are produced. That is, in a state in which the game ball guide part of the condition distribution means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction, the first passive part of the game ball guide part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the first passive part receives the entered game ball and is rotated to the second direction by the specified angle. In addition, the second passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entered into the entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition allocating means is rotated in the second direction up to a prescribed angle, and the second passive part receives the entered game ball and is rotated up to the prescribed angle in the first direction. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction and before the next game ball enters the ball entrance, the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction, or after the second passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction and before the game ball next enters the entrance, the rotation restricting part prevents the second passive part from rotating in the second direction. As a result, after the game ball guiding part rotates to guide the game ball to one guide path, it can be prevented from rotating in the other direction before the next game ball enters, so that the next entered game ball is also guided to the same guide path as the game ball entered before the game ball. Therefore, the game balls entering the ball entrance can be alternately guided to the first start opening and the second start opening more accurately, and the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be evenly stored.

In any one of the game machines M2 to M4, the establishment condition identifying means identifies a starting opening to assist the next ball entry by the condition distributing means based on the entry of the game ball into the first or second starting opening.

According to the game machine described in the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of the game machines M2 to M4, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the entry of the game ball into the first or second start hole, the establishment condition identification means identifies the start hole to which the condition sorting means assists the next ball entry. Therefore, the player can recognize the start hole to be distributed next, and can play the game while suppressing invalid balls due to overflow.

The establishment condition identifying means detects a state in which the game ball guide section rotates, and based on the detection result, the game ball guide section identifies a start opening assisted so that the game ball enters the next guide path.

According to the game machine described in the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine M3 or M4, the following effects are obtained. That is, the game ball guide section of the condition allocating means detects the rotated state, and based on the detection result, the game ball guide section identifies the start opening assisted so that the game ball enters the game ball by the guide path for guiding the next game ball by the establishment condition identification means. Therefore, the state of the condition sorting means can be accurately identified and reported, and the player can report more accurate information and play the game so as to suppress the overflow.

Main control means for executing the main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing the game control according to instructions from the main control means, the main control means executes the success/failure determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, and the first success/fail determination based on the result of the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. The determination signal includes a success/failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success/failure determination signal based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means, and the subordinate control means includes first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game based on the first success/failure determination signal, and second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game based on the second success/failure determination signal. and a display means, wherein a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is awarded when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a hit and the first or second identification information indicating win is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means, the main control means determines a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the hit/fail determination condition that has been established based on the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, and based on the establishment of the second win/fail judgment condition, the hit/fail judgment condition that has been established. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the first or second determination condition, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is started when the first or second determination condition is satisfied, with the success determination information related to the determination by the determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as main reserved information, the order information in which the success determination condition corresponding to the main reserved information is satisfied and the success determination condition satisfied. is the first right/wrong determination condition or the second right/wrong determination condition, and when new main pending information is stored in the main pending information storage means, the first or second display means is dynamically displayed on the first or second display means. and a main holding information signal generating means for generating a main holding information signal for notifying a slave control means of information relating to the stored main holding information and time information corresponding to the main holding information based on the fact that new main holding information is stored in the main holding information storing means, the slave control means, based on the reception of the main holding information signal, sending information concerning the information indicated by the main holding information signal to the sub holding information. a subordinate pending information storage means for storing subordinate pending information storage means for storing as subordinate pending information storage means, a subordinate pending information stored in the subordinate pending information storage means as a first yes/no judging condition and a second yes/no judging condition, while distinguishing the subordinate pending information, the first yes/no judging condition and the second yes/no judging condition are displayed in a holding display mode in which the order in which the success/failure judgment conditions are met can be identified for each subordinate holding information; and rearrangement means for rearranging the reserved display modes displayed on the reserved display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each piece of time information determined by the time information determination means.

According to the gaming machine N1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination information related to the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means by the right/wrong determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are set as the main reserved information, the order information of whether the right/wrong determination condition corresponding to the main reserved information is satisfied and whether the satisfied right/wrong judgment condition is the first right/wrong judgment condition or the second right/wrong judgment condition. It is stored in the main pending information storage means so as to be identifiable as being a negative judgment condition. In the main control means, when new main pending information is stored in the main pending information storage means, time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new main pending information can be dynamically displayed is determined by the main dynamic display start time information determining means based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the dynamic display determination information for each piece of main pending information previously stored in the main pending information storage means, and is stored in the secondary pending information storage means. In the main control means, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information on the stored main hold information and time information corresponding to the main hold information based on the main hold information storage means being stored. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the subsidiary control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. While distinguishing the sub-retaining information of the first relevance determination condition and the second relevance determination condition stored in the sub-reservation information storage means, the holding display means performs display in a reserving display mode in which the order in which the success/failure determination conditions are met for each sub-reservation information is identifiable. Then, in the sub-control means, the sub-reservation information stored in the sub-reservation information storage means serves as a trigger to determine the active display start time information indicated by the sub-reservation information stored in the sub-reservation information storage means. Based on each piece of time information determined by, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is rearranged by the rearranging means in the order in which the dynamic display is started. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information during dynamic display is a longer dynamic display mode than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information during dynamic display, the start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information of the second lottery game is earlier than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. However, since the reserved display mode is displayed in order in the reserved display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the second lottery game newly stored suspension display mode is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the previously stored suspension information of the first lottery game. Then, although the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the propriety determination conditions may differ, the real dynamic display start order is rearranged and displayed by the rearrangement means, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, even when the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual success/failure determination conditions are established, the reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means in the dynamic display start order, so that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be suppressed.

Main control means for executing the main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing the game control according to instructions from the main control means, the main control means executes the success/failure determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, and the first success/fail determination based on the result of the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. The determination signal includes a success/failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success/failure determination signal based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means, and the subordinate control means includes first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game based on the first success/failure determination signal, and second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game based on the second success/failure determination signal. and a display means, wherein a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is awarded when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a hit and the first or second identification information indicating win is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means, the main control means determines a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the hit/fail determination condition that has been established based on the establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition, and based on the establishment of the second win/fail judgment condition, the hit/fail judgment condition that has been established. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the first or second determination condition, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is started when the first or second determination condition is satisfied, with the success determination information related to the determination by the determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as main reserved information, the order information in which the success determination condition corresponding to the main reserved information is satisfied and the success determination condition satisfied. main holding information storage means capable of identifiably storing whether is the first right/wrong judgment condition or the second right/wrong judgment condition, and capable of retaining the memory even when the power is turned off; and main holding information signal generating means for generating a main holding information signal for notifying a slave control means of information relating to the stored main holding information based on the fact that the main holding information is stored in the main holding information storing means, and the slave control means, based on the reception of the main holding information signal, the main holding information indicated by the main holding information signal. secondary pending information storage means for storing as secondary pending information; secondary pending information storage means for distinguishing the secondary pending information of the first right/fail judgment condition and the second right/fail judgment condition stored in the secondary pending information storage means, and displaying in a hold display mode in which the order of establishment of the right/failure determination conditions combining the first right/fail determination condition and the second right/fail determination condition for each sub hold information is identifiable; and when new secondary pending information is stored in said secondary pending information storage means, based on the remaining dynamic display mode of said first or second identification information dynamically displayed on said first or second display means and said dynamic display mode determined by said passive display mode determining means for each piece of secondary pending information previously stored in said secondary pending information storage means, time information until said first or second identification information corresponding to said new secondary pending information starts to be dynamically displayed is determined. dynamic display start time information determining means for storing in the sub-suspended information storage means; and rearrangement means for rearranging the suspension display modes displayed on the suspension display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each of the time information stored in the sub-suspension information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means when a predetermined condition is established.

According to the gaming machine N2, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination information related to the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means by the right/wrong determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are set as the main reserved information, the order information of whether the right/wrong determination condition corresponding to the main reserved information is satisfied and whether the satisfied right/wrong judgment condition is the first right/wrong judgment condition or the second right/wrong judgment condition. It is stored in the main pending information storage means so as to be identifiable as a negative judgment condition. In the main control means, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information on the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the subsidiary control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. While distinguishing sub-holding information of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the sub-holding information storage means, the establishment order of the right/wrong judgment condition combining the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition for each sub-hold information is displayed by the holding display means as the display of the identifiable holding display mode. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is discriminated by the slave display mode determination means based on the slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. When new secondary pending information is stored in the secondary pending information storage means, time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information can be dynamically displayed is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determining means for each piece of secondary pending information previously stored in the secondary pending information storage means, and stored in the secondary pending information storage means. Then, in the slave control means, when a predetermined condition is established, the suspension display mode displayed on the suspension display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information during dynamic display is a longer dynamic display mode than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information during dynamic display, the start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information of the second lottery game is earlier than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. However, since the reserved display mode is displayed in order in the reserved display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the second lottery game newly stored suspension display mode is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the previously stored suspension information of the first lottery game. Then, although the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the propriety determination conditions may differ, the real dynamic display start order is rearranged and displayed by the rearrangement means, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, even when the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual success/failure determination conditions are established, the reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means in the dynamic display start order, so that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

Main control means for executing the main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing the game control according to instructions from the main control means, the main control means executes the success/failure determination of the first lottery game based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, and the first success/fail determination based on the result of the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. The determination signal includes a success/failure determination signal generation means for generating a second success/failure determination signal based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means, and the subordinate control means includes first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game based on the first success/failure determination signal, and second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game based on the second success/failure determination signal. and a display means, wherein a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is awarded when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win and the first or second identification information indicating the win is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means. establishment signal generation means for generating a establishment signal to notify and outputting to the slave control means in the order in which the first or second success judgment conditions are satisfied; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the success judgment conditions established based on the establishment of the first success judgment conditions, and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the success judgment conditions established based on the establishment of the second success judgment conditions; a main pending information storage means for identifiably storing, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the right/failure determination condition is started, the right/failure determination information related to the right/failure determination by the right/failure determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as main reserved information; a master holding information signal generating means for generating a main holding information signal for notifying a sub control means of information relating to the stored main holding information, based on the fact that the main holding information is stored in the main holding information, the sub control means, based on the reception of the establishment signal, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the suitability judgment condition that triggered the generation of the establishment signal becomes dynamically displayable, the information about the number of times the establishment signal is received, the first suitability judgment condition indicated by the establishment signal and the second suitability judgment condition. a sub-reservation number storage means for distinguishing between the success/failure determination conditions and storing, as sub-reservation number information, the order in which the success/failure determination conditions in which the first success/failure determination conditions and the second success/failure determination conditions are combined is identifiable; and based on the sub-reservation number information stored in the sub-reservation number storage means, the first success/failure determination conditions and the second success/failure determination conditions are differentiated from each other, and the first success/failure determination conditions and the second success/failure determination conditions are stored for each sub-reservation number information. a sub-reserved information storage means for storing, as sub-reserved information, information relating to the main reserving information indicated by the main reserving information signal based on the reception of the main reserving information signal; a subsidiary display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means based on the sub-reserving information stored in the sub-reserving information storage means; dynamic display start time information determining means for determining time information until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information starts, based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the dynamic display mode determined by the passive display mode determining means for each piece of secondary pending information previously stored in the secondary pending information storage means, and storing the information in the secondary pending information storing means; a rearranging means for rearranging the reserved display modes displayed on the reserved display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on the time information stored in the secondary reserved information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means.

According to the game machine N3, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, based on the satisfaction of the first or second success judgment condition, the first success judgment condition and the second success judgment condition are distinguished from each other, and a success signal for notifying that the first or second success judgment condition has been met is generated by the establishment signal generating means and output to the subordinate control means in the order in which the first or second success judgment conditions are met. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination information related to the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means by the right/wrong determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are set as the main reserved information, the order information of whether the right/wrong determination condition corresponding to the main reserved information is satisfied and whether the satisfied right/wrong judgment condition is the first right/wrong judgment condition or the second right/wrong judgment condition. It is stored in the main reservation information storage means in such a way that it can be identified as being a negative judgment condition. In the main control means, the main hold information signal generation means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information on the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored. Then, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the success/failure determination condition that triggered generation of the success/failure determination condition can be displayed dynamically based on the reception of the success/failure signal, the slave control means stores the information about the number of times the success/failure signal is received as the slave retention number information so that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition can be distinguished from each other, and the succession order of the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition can be identified. remembered. In the slave control means, based on the sub-reservation number information stored in the sub-reservation number storage means, while distinguishing the sub-reservation number information between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition, the establishment order of the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition for each sub-reservation number information is displayed in a identifiable suspension display mode by the reservation display means. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the slave control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is discriminated by the subordinate display mode discrimination means based on the sub-suspension information stored in the sub-suspension information storage means. In the slave control means, when new secondary pending information is stored in the secondary pending information storage means, the dynamic display start time information determining means determines time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information can be dynamically displayed based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determining means for each piece of secondary pending information previously stored in the secondary pending information storage means, and is stored in the secondary pending information storage means. Then, in the slave control means, when a predetermined condition is established, the suspension display mode displayed on the suspension display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information during dynamic display is a longer dynamic display mode than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information during dynamic display, the start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information of the second lottery game is earlier than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. However, since the pending display mode is displayed in order in the pending display mode showing the order in which the success/failure determination conditions including the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are met, the suspension display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the pending display mode showing the order after the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. Then, although the actual start order of the dynamic display and the order of establishment of the propriety judgment conditions may differ, the rearrangement means rearranges and displays them in the actual start order of the dynamic display, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, even when the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the conditions for judging whether or not the match is actually established, the reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display, so that confusion of the player can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be suppressed.

In the game machine N1, the main hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold data even when the power is turned off, and the main control means includes main initial control execution means for executing main initial control processing, which is the initial setting of the game machine, when the game machine is powered on, and return data signal generation means for generating a return data signal based on the main hold information and time information stored in the main hold information storage means and outputting it to the sub control means as one process of the main initial control processing. and wherein the secondary control means comprises secondary initial control executing means for executing secondary initial control processing, which is the initial setting of the gaming machine, when the game machine is powered on, and secondary hold information returning means for storing information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means as secondary hold information storage means as secondary return hold information in the secondary initial control processing executed by the secondary initial control executing means, based on the return data signal from the main control means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the data is retained in the main hold information storage means of the main control means even when the power is turned off. In the main control means, when the game machine is powered on, the main initial control process, which is the initial setting of the game machine, is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, a return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation means based on the main hold information and the time information stored in the main hold information storage means, and output to the slave control means. In the secondary control means, when the game machine is powered on, the secondary initial control process, which is the initial setting of the game machine, is executed by the secondary initial control execution means. In the secondary initial control process executed by the secondary initial control execution means, information indicated by the return data signal is stored as secondary return hold information by the hold information return means following the return hold information storage means based on the return data signal from the main control means. As a result, when the power is turned on again to the game machine after the power cutoff occurs, the data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, and the secondary return hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means. Therefore, the data stored in the secondary hold information storage means can be restored to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power-off, it is possible to display the suspended display mode that was displayed immediately before the power-off to the player. Since the slave return hold information is stored as information based on the main hold information and the time information, the hold display modes can be rearranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation even when a predetermined condition is established after power failure.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to the N3, the ownership information memory means is composed to be able to hold data even when the power is cut off, and in the preceding control means, if the power is turned on the game machine, the main initial control execution means to execute the main initial control process, which is the initial setting of the gaming machine, and the initial control processing. In response to the obtained control means, based on the main reserved information recognized in the lock information memory means, there is a return data signal that generates a return data signal and outputs to the subordinate control means, and the underlying control means is executed when the power is turned on the game machine. In the first -time control execution means and within the early control process executed by the initial control execution means, based on the return data signal from the lord control means, the information indicated by the return data signal is a reserved information that is characterized by the reservation information that is remarked by the reserved information memory Machine N5.

According to the game machine described in the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of the game machines N1 to N3, the following effects are obtained. That is, the data is retained in the main hold information storage means of the main control means even when the power is turned off. In the main control means, when the game machine is powered on, the main initial control process, which is the initial setting of the game machine, is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, a return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation means based on the main hold information stored in the main hold information storage means and output to the slave control means. In the secondary control means, when the game machine is powered on, the secondary initial control process, which is the initial setting of the game machine, is executed by the secondary initial control execution means. In the secondary initial control process executed by the secondary initial control execution means, information indicated by the return data signal is stored as secondary return hold information by the hold information return means following the return hold information storage means based on the return data signal from the main control means. As a result, when the power is turned on again to the game machine after the power cutoff occurs, the data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, and the secondary return hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to restore the data stored in the slave hold information storage means to the state immediately before the power was cut off. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power-off, it is possible to display the suspended display mode that was displayed immediately before the power-off to the player.

In the game machine N4 or N5, the secondary hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored data even when the power is turned off, and the secondary hold information returning means compares the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means with the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means, and if it is determined that they match, the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means is maintained, and if it is determined that they do not match, the return data signal is sent to the secondary hold information storage means. is stored as slave return hold information.

According to the game described in the gaming machine N6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4 or N5. In other words, the data is retained in the slave holding information storage means of the slave control means even when the power is turned off. In the slave control means, the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means and the information stored in the slave hold information storage means are collated by the slave hold information return means. As a result, when it is determined that they match, the subsidiary hold information stored in the subsidiary hold information storage means is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave return hold information. Therefore, the data in the pending information storage means can be updated according to more correct data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the correct pending display mode when the power is restored from the power-off.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the secondary hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored data even when the power is turned off, and the secondary hold information return means collates the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means with the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means. A gaming machine N7 characterized in that it is displayed in a holding display mode shown in FIG.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects of the game machine N4 or N5, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the data is retained in the slave holding information storage means of the slave control means even when the power is turned off. In the slave control means, the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means and the information stored in the slave hold information storage means are collated by the slave hold information return means. As a result, when it is determined that they match, the subsidiary hold information stored in the subsidiary hold information storage means is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the slave hold information storage means is initialized and a hold display mode indicating a temporary hold display mode is displayed. Therefore, by displaying the provisional pending display mode, the store clerk or the like can recognize that there is an abnormality in the data stored in the secondary pending information storage means. Further, it is possible to prevent the display of the pending display mode based on wrong information to the player, and to prevent the player from being confused.

In any one of the game machines N5 to N7, the game machine N8 is characterized in that the dynamic display start time information determination means determines time information corresponding to the stored secondary return hold information based on the fact that the secondary return hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means, and stores the time information in the secondary hold information storage means.

According to the game machine described in the game machine N8, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of the game machines N5 to N7, the following effects are obtained. That is, in the slave control means, time information corresponding to the stored slave return suspension information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means based on the fact that the slave return suspension information is stored in the slave suspension information storage means, and is stored in the slave suspension information storage means. Therefore, after the power is restored from the power-off, it is possible to rearrange and display the hold display modes corresponding to the stored sub-return hold information in the order in which the fluctuation starts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by notifying the player of the order in which the variation starts even after the power is cut off.

In any one of the game machines N4 to N8, the rearrangement means determines that the predetermined condition is met when the slave return hold information is stored in the slave hold information storage means, and rearranges and displays the hold display modes.

According to the game machine N9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines N4 to N8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the slave return suspension information is stored in the slave suspension information storage means, the slave control means determines that a predetermined condition is met, and rearranges the suspension display modes in the order of starting dynamic display and displays them by the rearrangement means. Therefore, by returning from power-off and rearranging the reserved display modes in the order of starting the dynamic display, the order of starting the dynamic display can be immediately recognized when the game is restarted, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is satisfied; and second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied; display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success determination condition from a group of dynamic display modes, based on the establishment of the first success determination condition, and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success determination condition from a group of dynamic display modes, based on the establishment of the second success determination means; and the dynamic display of the first identification information. A gaming machine O1, characterized by comprising a notification destination determining means for determining which of the second identification information is to be visually notified to the player based on the result of determination by the success/failure determining means, and visual notification means for notifying the player to visually recognize the identification information determined by the notification destination determining means.

According to the gaming machine O1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the met success/failure determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second right/wrong determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from the dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes. Which of the dynamically displayed first identification information and the second identification information is to be notified to the player is determined by the notification destination determining means based on the success/failure determination result. The identification information determined by the notification destination determination means is notified by the visual notification means so that the player can visually recognize the identification information. As a result, the identification information to be visually recognized is determined based on the result of the judgment, so that the player can easily determine the identification information to be visually recognized, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, player confusion can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine O1, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode based on the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means, the dynamic display mode group includes high-expectation dynamic display modes that are more likely to be determined when the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means is a win than in the case of a loss, and the notification destination determination means determines the high-expectation-level dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display mode determination means determining the high-expectation-level dynamic display mode. A gaming machine O2 characterized in that the first or second identification information whose display mode is dynamically displayed is determined as the notification destination.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means. The dynamic display mode group includes a high-expectation dynamic display mode that is more likely to be determined when the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means is a hit than when the result is a failure. Based on the determination of the high-expectation dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means, the first or second identification information for which the high-expectation dynamic display mode is to be dynamically displayed is determined as the notification destination by the notification destination determination means. Therefore, by notifying the player to view the high-expectation dynamic display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine O1 or O2 further comprises dynamic display delay means for delaying the start of dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode is completed, based on the determination by the dynamic display mode determining means that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the dynamic display mode determination means determines that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the dynamic display delay means delays the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display in the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode is completed. This can prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting while the high-expectation dynamic display mode is being dynamically displayed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

The gaming machine O1 or O2 further comprises dynamic display extension means for extending the dynamic display time of the first identification information or the second identification information dynamically displayed in the selected high-expectation dynamic display mode until dynamic display of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed in the selected high-expectation dynamic display mode is completed, based on the dynamic display mode determination means determining one of the first identification information and the second identification information to be dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the dynamic display mode determination means determines that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the dynamic display time of the other identification information is extended by the dynamic display extension means until the dynamic display in the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode is completed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting while the high-expectation dynamic display mode is being dynamically displayed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized by comprising audio output means for outputting a preset sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode, and volume varying means for muting the audio corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information based on the fact that the identification information to be notified by the notification destination determination means is determined to be either the first identification information or the second identification information, or setting the volume to a volume smaller than that in normal times.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the voice output means outputs a preset voice corresponding to the dynamic display mode. When the identification information to be notified by the notification destination determining means is determined to be one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information is muted or set to a volume lower than normal by the volume varying means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from concentrating more on the identification information determined by the notification destination determination means and overlooking the dynamically displayed dynamic display mode.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is satisfied; and second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied; display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; In a game machine having a technique execution means, based on the establishment of the first success judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is determined based on the success judgment result by the success judgment means from a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high-expectation dynamic display mode that is more likely to be determined when the success determination result by the success determination means is a hit than when it is a failure, and based on the establishment of the second success determination means, the established success or failure. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the determination condition based on the result of the success/failure determination of the success/failure determination means from the group of dynamic display modes; and overlap determination means for determining whether or not the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined for identification information different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode when the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the establishment of the first or second success/failure determination condition is the high-expectation dynamic display mode. and dynamic display delay means for delaying the start of the dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode corresponding to either the first identification information or the second identification information when the duplication determination means determines that the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined for the different identification information.

According to the gaming machine O6, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are met. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the establishment of the first right/wrong determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established right/wrong determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high-expectation dynamic display mode which is more likely to be determined when the right/wrong determination result by the right/wrong determination means is hit than when the right/wrong determination means fails. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second right/wrong determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition from the dynamic display mode group. When the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the establishment of the first or second propriety determination condition is the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the duplication determination means determines whether or not the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined for the identification information different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode. When the overlap determining means determines that the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined for different identification information, the start of the high-expectation dynamic display mode corresponding to either the first identification information or the second identification information is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Thus, even when the high-expectation dynamic display modes are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, the start of one of the high-expectation dynamic display modes is delayed, so that the dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display modes can be prevented from being started at the same time. Therefore, the player can play the game while concentrating on the high-expectation dynamic display mode dynamically displayed first. As a result, player confusion can be suppressed.

In the game machine O6, the dynamic display delay means delays the start of the dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode for the identification information whose start of dynamic display is delayed longer than the end of the high-expectation dynamic display mode in which the identification information whose start of dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display delay means delays the start of dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode in the identification information whose start of dynamic display is delayed longer than the end of the high-expectation dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display of the identification information whose start is not delayed is dynamically displayed. Thus, after the dynamic display of one high-expectation dynamic display mode is terminated, the delayed dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode is started, so that the player can play the game while concentrating on each high-expectation dynamic display mode. Therefore, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

A gaming machine O8 characterized in that the gaming machine O6 or O7 further comprises visual notifying means for notifying a player to visually recognize identification information different from the identification information whose start of dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means.

According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O6 or O7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the visual notifying means notifies the player to visually recognize the identification information different from the identification information whose start of the dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Therefore, the player can easily determine which dynamic display of the identification information should be focused on. Therefore, player confusion can be suppressed.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is satisfied; and second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied; display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; a technique execution means, wherein, when the first or second success determination condition is satisfied, pending information storage means for storing pending information having at least right/failure determination information of right/failure determination by the right/fail determination means executed when dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established right/fail determination condition is allowed to start until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established right/fail determination condition is started; and the hold information is newly stored in the hold information storage means. prior to the start of dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the pieces of pending information stored in the pending information storage means, prior to judging the validity of the pending information in advance; prior notification determining means for determining whether or not to notify that the result of the preliminary determination was a win based on the fact that the result of the prior determination is a win; A game machine P1, characterized by comprising a pre-reading notification means for notifying a negative determination result.

According to the gaming machine P1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. When the first or second right/wrong judgment condition is established, pending information having at least the right/wrong judgment information of the right/wrong judgment by the right/wrong judgment means executed when the first or second identification information corresponding to the right/wrong judgment condition established becomes dynamically displayable is stored in the hold information storage means until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the right/wrong judgment condition established is started. Based on the fact that the pending information is newly stored in the pending information storing means, before the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the pending information stored in the pending information storing means can be started, the propriety determination of the pending information is carried out in advance by the advance propriety judging means. Based on the result of the winning judgment by the prior winning judgment means, the prior notification determining means determines whether or not to notify that the result of the prior judgment is winning. When the prior notification determination means determines to notify that the result of the prior determination is a win, the player is notified of the result of the determination by the prior determination means by the pre-reading notification means. As a result, before the result of the success/failure determination is notified by the identification information, the result of the success/failure determination can be notified to the player more quickly, and the expectation for the big win can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

The gaming machine P1 has dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the satisfaction of the first success judgment condition, and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the establishment of the second success judgment means, wherein the reserved information storage means stores the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition when the first or the second success judgment condition is established. Until the start of dynamic display, pending information having at least information about the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored, and when the first or second propriety determination condition is satisfied and new pending information is stored, based on the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the dynamic display mode for each piece of pending information previously stored, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new pending information starts dynamic display is determined, and the pending information storage means dynamic display start time information determining means stored in a dynamic display start time information determining means and lottery information for selecting whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the winning judgment of the first lottery game and the second lottery game to be executed after the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game is more likely to win than usual, based on the establishment of the first or second winning judgment condition, and when the first or second winning judgment condition is established and the holding information corresponding to the established judgment condition is stored in the holding information. and a game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the pending information storage means in association with the lottery information, and the prior success/failure determination means determines whether or not the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each of the pending information is the special game state based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means, and performs a win/fail determination in advance.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the fulfillment of the success/failure determination condition. When the first or second right/wrong judgment condition is met, the hold information storage means stores the hold information having at least the information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the right/wrong determination condition that is met is started. When the first or second propriety determination condition is established and new pending information is stored, time information until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new pending information is started is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means based on the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identifying information during dynamic display and the dynamic display mode of each pending information previously stored, and is stored in the pending information storage means. Lottery information for making a lottery whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a winning judgment between a first lottery game and a second lottery game executed after a privilege game execution means executes a privilege game is more likely to win than in a normal time is acquired by a game state lottery means on the basis of establishment of a first or second winning judgment condition. Also, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is satisfied and the reservation information corresponding to the established determination condition is stored, the lottery information is stored in the reservation information storage means by the game state lottery means in association with the reservation information. Based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means, whether or not the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each piece of reservation information is a special game state is determined from the lottery information, and the prior success/failure determination is performed in advance by the prior success/failure determination means. As a result, the game state at the start of the variation is determined in advance, and based on the result, the winning/losing determination is performed in advance, so that a more accurate prior winning/losing determination can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of accurate information in advance, and to suppress the confusion of the player.

In the gaming machine P2, after the prior notification determination means determines that the result of the preliminary determination is a win, if the result of the win/loss determination executed based on the established win/fail determination condition is a win, the dynamic display mode determination means sets the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail determination condition before the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information notified of the win by the notification determination means starts dynamic display. A game machine P3, characterized in that it determines a long extended dynamic display mode.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P2, the following effects are produced. That is, after the advance notification determination means determines to notify that the result of the preliminary determination is a win, if the result of the win/loss determination executed based on the established win/fail determination condition is a win, the dynamic display mode determination means sets the dynamic display mode of the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established win/fail determination condition to the extended dynamic display mode in which the first or second identification information corresponding to the hold information notified of the win by the notification determination means is longer than the start of the dynamic display. Determined by the determining means. Here, after the result of pre-determination is notified by the pre-reading informing means that the result is winning, the lottery game based on the success/failure determination condition established after that may stop and display the identification information earlier than the notified lottery game and win, and the game state is changed, the result of pre-determination may be changed. Then, as a result of the change in the result of the preliminary determination, even though the pre-reading informing means announced the winning, there may be a problem that the winning does not occur. However, since the extended dynamic display mode is determined, the identification information corresponding to the hold information previously notified of the winning is dynamically displayed first. Therefore, since the dynamic display is started in the same game state as the game state determined when the preliminary determination is performed, the result of the preliminary determination and the determination at the start of the dynamic display can be matched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the first lottery game determination by the success determination means; a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the result of the success determination of the second lottery game by the success determination means; and the first identification. display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; and a privilege game execution means for providing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the success determination result by the success determination means is a win and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means in a display mode indicating win, and when the first or second success determination condition is satisfied, Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the validity determination condition starts, pending information storage means for storing pending information having at least the validity determination information related to the validity determination of the first validity determination condition or the second validity determination condition, and by dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in a dynamic display mode related to each other, triggered by the fact that the pending information of the first validity determination condition and the second validity determination condition are respectively stored in the pending information storage means. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by comprising dynamic display mode determination means for determining a combined dynamic display mode for notifying the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game and the second lottery game.

According to the gaming machine described in the gaming machine Q1, the success determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success determination means based on the establishment of the first success determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. When the first or second right/wrong judgment condition is met, the hold information storage means stores hold information having at least right/wrong judgment information related to right/wrong judgment of the first right/wrong judgment condition or the second right/wrong judgment that is met until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the right/wrong judgment condition that is met is started. Triggered by the fact that the reservation information of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is stored in the retention information storage means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the fusion dynamic display mode for notifying the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game machine and the second lottery game by dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in a dynamic display mode related to each other. As a result, it is possible to easily determine the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game and the second lottery game at once by the integrated dynamic display mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's confusion that the player cannot identify the determination result by dynamically displaying the win/loss determination result of the first lottery game and the second lottery game independently.

In the gaming machine Q1, there is provided fusion determination means for determining whether or not a fusion dynamic condition for dynamically displaying the fusion dynamic display mode is satisfied when the suspension information of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are stored in the suspension information storage means, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines the fusion dynamic display mode when the fusion determination means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied, while the fusion determination means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that, when discriminated, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the success judgment condition met based on the satisfaction of the first success judgment condition and the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the success judgment condition met based on the establishment of the second success judgment means are determined as independent dynamic display modes.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the fusion determining means determines whether or not the fusion dynamic condition for dynamically displaying the fusion dynamic display mode is established, triggered by the fact that the reservation information of the first propriety judgment condition and the second propriety judgment condition are respectively stored in the holding information storage means. When the fusion determination means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is established, the fusion dynamic display mode is determined by the fusion dynamic display mode determination means. On the other hand, when the fusion determination means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is not satisfied, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the success judgment condition established based on the satisfaction of the first success judgment condition and the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the success judgment condition established based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition are determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as independent dynamic display modes. Thus, even when the dynamic display mode cannot be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display modes of the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed, thereby preventing the trouble of interrupting the lottery game until the dynamic display mode of the fusion dynamic display becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute a dynamic display that matches the state of the game for the player.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the fused dynamic display mode is composed of a first fused dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and a second fused dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines the first fused dynamic display mode and the second fused dynamic display mode in synchronization with each other.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first merged dynamic display mode corresponding to the first identification information and the second merged dynamic display mode corresponding to the second identification information constitute the merged dynamic display mode. The first merged dynamic display mode and the second merged dynamic display mode are synchronously determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. As a result, the first merged dynamic display mode and the second merged dynamic display mode are determined synchronously, so that the first merged dynamic display mode and the second merged dynamic display mode can be easily started at the same timing. Therefore, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed in a dynamic display mode in which they are related to each other, it is possible to prevent the mutual dynamic display from deviating from what was set. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically display a fused dynamic display mode that is easier for the player to understand, and to further suppress the player's confusion.

In the gaming machine Q3, when the fusion determining means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is satisfied, the game machine Q4 has a synchronization adjustment means for assisting the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode based on the hold information corresponding to the first suitability determination condition and the second suitability determination condition stored in the reserve information storage means at a timing synchronized with each other.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the fusion determination means determines that the fusion dynamic condition is established, the synchronization adjustment means assists the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the first fusion dynamic display mode and the second fusion dynamic display mode based on the reservation information corresponding to the first suitability determination condition and the second suitability determination condition stored in the reservation information storage means at the synchronized timing. Thereby, the dynamic display mode determining means can more easily determine the first merged dynamic display mode and the second merged dynamic display mode at synchronized timing. Therefore, by dynamically displaying the first dynamic display mode and the second dynamic display mode at the synchronized timing, the player can easily recognize that the dynamic displays relating to the first lottery game and the second lottery game are started at the same time. Therefore, the player's confusion can be further suppressed.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the first lottery game determination by the success determination means; a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the result of the success determination of the second lottery game by the success determination means; and the first identification. display control means capable of dynamically controlling display of the information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively; and privilege game execution means for providing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means is a win and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means in a display mode indicating win, and the privilege is provided based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail determination condition. A game state determining means for determining whether a game state after a privilege game imparted by a game executing means is shifted to a normal game state or a special game state more advantageous to a player than the normal game state, a lottery monitoring means for determining establishment of the first or second win/fail determination condition determined by the game state determining means to shift to the normal game state when the win or failure is determined by the win/fail determination means when the special game state is in progress, and the lottery monitoring means satisfies the condition by the lottery monitoring means. and a bonus delay means for delaying the start of a bonus game corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition determined to satisfy the first or second success/failure determination condition when it is determined that the condition is met.

According to the gaming machine R1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the establishment of the first or second right/wrong judgment condition, a game state determination means determines whether the game state after the privilege game imparted by the privilege game execution means is shifted to a normal game state or a special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. When the game is in the special game state, the win is determined by the win/fail determination means, and establishment of the first or second win/fail determination condition determined by the game state determination means to shift to the normal game state is determined by the lottery monitoring means. When the lottery monitoring means determines that the first or second success/failure determination condition satisfying the condition is established, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition determined to satisfy the condition is delayed by the privilege game delay means. As a result, even if the player wins the prize when shifting to the normal game state, the game is executed in the special game state until the privilege game is executed, so that the player can play the game in the special game state for a longer time. Therefore, more profit can be awarded to the player.

In the gaming machine R1, when either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed and a privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means with the other identification information, a privilege game carryover means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information until the other privilege game is completed; A game machine R2 characterized by comprising a win-or-fail judgment maintaining means for maintaining a win-or-fail judgment result determined in a game state at the start of dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed and a privilege game is executed with the other identification information by the privilege game executing means, the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information is carried over by the privilege game carryover means until the other privilege game is finished. Then, the right/wrong determination result of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the privilege game ends is maintained by the right/wrong determination result determined in the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game.

Thus, during the special game state, while delaying the start of the privilege game that is a win to shift to the normal game state, the determination in the special game state is maintained for the lottery game whose dynamic display is started, so that even if the privilege game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new win while the privilege game is delayed.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success determination condition is determined according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition from a dynamic display mode group including at least a normal dynamic display mode and an extended dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the normal dynamic display mode, and based on the establishment of the second success determination means, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success determination condition is determined from the dynamic display mode group. dynamic display mode determining means for determining according to the establishment of a dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode determining means, and the privilege delaying means delays the start of the privilege game by causing the dynamic display mode determining means to determine the extended dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the satisfaction of the first right/wrong determination condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group including at least the normal dynamic display mode and the extended dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the normal dynamic display mode. Based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition from the group of dynamic display modes according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. By causing the dynamic display mode determination means to determine the extended dynamic display mode, the start of the privilege game is delayed by the privilege delay means. Therefore, the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed even while the start of the privilege game is delayed, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored during the delay.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, when the first or second success determination condition is established, pending information storing means for storing pending information having at least success judgment information related to the success/failure determination of the established first or second success judgment condition and game state information related to the game state determined by the game state determining means before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the established success judgment condition is established; pre-judgment means for judging the win-or-fail judgment result corresponding to the pending information and the determined game state from the win-fail judgment information and the game state information before the dynamic display start condition is established; the lottery monitoring means judges, based on the judgment result of the advance judgment means, whether the first or second win-fail judgment condition satisfying the condition is established; The game machine R4 is characterized in that the extended dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in accordance with establishment of the dynamic display start condition for the same determination condition stored in the retention information storage means prior to the determined success determination condition based on the fact that the information is stored in the suspension information storage means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, when the first or second right/wrong judgment condition is met, the hold information storing means stores hold information having at least right/wrong judgment information related to right/wrong judgment of the first or second right/wrong judgment condition established and a game state related to the game state determined by the game state determination means before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the right/wrong judgment condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the hold information is newly stored in the hold information storage means, the game state determined as the result of the winning move corresponding to the hold information is judged by the advance judgment means from the win/fail judgment information and the game state information before the dynamic display start condition is established. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, the lottery monitoring means determines whether or not the first or second success/failure determination condition is established. Based on the fact that the holding information corresponding to the first or second right/wrong judgment condition judged to meet the condition by the lottery monitoring means is stored in the holding information storage means, the privilege delay means determines the extended dynamic display mode by the dynamic display form determination means according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition for the same right/wrong judgment condition stored in the hold information storage means prior to the judged right/wrong judgment condition. As a result, even when the reservation information to be dynamically displayed is stored earlier than the reservation information to be dynamically displayed when the reservation information to shift to the normal game state is stored in the reservation information storage means, the extended dynamic display mode is determined as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the reservation information stored ahead, so that the start of the privilege game corresponding to the reservation information to shift to the normal game state can be delayed. Therefore, even when the success/failure determination condition for making the transition to the normal game state during the special game state is established and the reservation information is stored in the reservation information storage means, the player can be made to play the game in the special game state for a longer time.

In the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the privilege delaying means, in a state in which the holding information corresponding to one of the first or second winning judgment conditions determined to satisfy the conditions by the lottery monitoring means is stored in the holding information storing means, when the other winning judgment condition determined to be determined to the special game state by the winning judgment result is hit by the prior judging means and the other winning judgment condition is newly established, the other winning judgment is made to shift to the newly established special game state. The game machine R5 is characterized in that the start of the privilege game corresponding to the hold information of the condition is delayed from the start of the privilege game corresponding to the hold information which is a hit to shift to the normal game state stored in the hold information storage means.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the hold information corresponding to one of the first and second win/fail judgment conditions determined to satisfy the conditions by the lottery monitoring means is stored in the hold information storage means, and the other win/fail determination condition determined by the advance judgment means to determine the win/fail determination result and the special game state is newly established, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the hold information of the win/fail judgment conditions which is the hit to shift to the newly established special game state shifts to the normal game state stored in the hold information storage means. The privilege delay means delays the start of the privilege game corresponding to the hold information which is the winning prize. As a result, after the privilege game corresponding to the win to shift to the normal game state is executed, the privilege game corresponding to the win to shift to the special game state is executed, so that the player can play in the special game state even after two privilege games are executed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in a more advantageous game state, and to prevent the expectation of a big win from being hindered.

Main control means for executing the main control of the game, and sub-control means for executing the game control according to instructions from the main control means, the main control means executes the first lottery game's success/failure determination based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the second lottery game's success/failure determination based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, and the first success/failure determination based on the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. A signal has success/failure determination signal generating means for generating a second success/failure determination signal based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means, and the subordinate control means includes first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game based on the first success/failure determination signal, and second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game based on the second success/failure determination signal. , and when the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means is a hit, and the first or second identification information indicating the win is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is awarded, and the main control means, when the success/failure determination means determines that the result is a win, changes the game state after the privilege game to a first jackpot for shifting to the first game state, or a second game that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a win type determination means for determining whether a second jackpot is to be made to shift to a state; a prior determination means for determining, based on the satisfaction of the first or second success determination condition, whether the win is the first big win or the second big win for the success determination condition that has been satisfied before a dynamic display start condition that is a condition for starting a dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the success determination condition that has been satisfied is satisfied; a prior determination signal generating means for generating a prior determination signal for notification to means and outputting it to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means stores the prior determination information based on the reception of the prior determination signal until a dynamic display start condition of the win/fail determination condition corresponding to the prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination signal is satisfied; advance notification determination means for determining whether or not to notify the player of the game state transition information related to the advance determination information determined to result in the first jackpot based on the fact that the slave monitoring means determines that the advance determination information indicating the first jackpot is stored; and notification for notifying the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information when it is determined by the advance notification determination means to notify the player. A game machine S1 characterized by having a knowing means.

According to the gaming machine S1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, when the win is determined by the win/fail determining means, the winning type determining means determines whether the game state after the privilege game is the first big win for shifting to the first game state or the second big win for shifting to the second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Based on the establishment of the first or the second success/failure determination condition, whether the first big win or the second big win for the established success/failure determination condition is determined by the preliminary determination means before the dynamic display start condition, which is the condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition, is established. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, a prior determination signal for notifying the slave control means of prior determination information regarding the determination result is generated by the prior determination signal generation means and output to the slave control means. Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the preliminary determination signal, the preliminary determination information is stored in the slave pending information storage means until the dynamic display start condition of the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the preliminary determination information is satisfied. Based on the preliminary determination information stored in the secondary reservation information storage means, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the preliminary determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be won is stored. Based on the fact that the slave monitoring means determines that the advance judgment information indicating the first big win is stored, the advance notification determination means determines whether or not to inform the player of the game state transition information related to the advance judgment information judged to be the first big win. As a result, when it is determined to notify the player, the notifying means notifies the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information. Thus, by notifying the game state shift notification mode, if the current game state is the second game state, the player can determine that the remaining time of the second game state is short and play the game by effectively using the remaining time. Therefore, more profit can be awarded to the player.

In the gaming machine S1, the preliminary determination signal generating means of the main control means generates the preliminary determination signal capable of identifying a win-or-fail judgment condition corresponding to the determination result of the preliminary determination means, and the gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the game state transition notification mode is configured in a notification mode capable of identifying whether the win-or-fail judgment condition corresponding to the prior determination information is the first win-or-fail judgment condition or the second win-or-fail judgment condition.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effects of the game machine S1, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the prior determination signal generation means generates a prior determination signal capable of identifying the yes/no determination condition corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means. The game state transition notification mode is constituted by a notification mode in which it can be identified whether the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the prior determination notification mode is the first win/fail determination condition or the second win/fail determination condition. As a result, the player can play the game so as to preferentially satisfy the success/failure determination condition in which the first jackpot is not established by the game state transition notification mode. Therefore, the game can be played by effectively using the second game state. Therefore, more profit can be awarded to the player.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the main control means has privilege delay means for delaying the start of the privilege game corresponding to the determined first or second success/failure determination condition when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the first or second success/failure determination condition for the first big win is established during the second game state.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, when it is determined by the advance determination means that the first or second success/failure determination condition for a first big win is established during the second game state, and when it is determined that the determined first or second success/failure determination condition is satisfied, the privilege delay means delays the start of the determined privilege game. As a result, the second game state is given to the player for a longer period of time, and more profits can be given to the player.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the operating means that the players can operate and the operating means by the players first, the first advantage in the first negative determination is more likely to be established than the second case, and the second operation different from the first operation is performed, and the second appointment is the second case of the first negative judge. A gaming machine S4 that is characterized by having a variable means that varies from a second advantage, which is easy to establish a judgment condition, and a variable means that varies.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines S1 to S3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the player performs the first operation on the operation means that the player can operate, the variable means changes the state between a first advantageous state in which the first success determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second success determination condition, and a second advantage state in which the second success determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first success determination condition by performing a second operation different from the first operation. Thus, based on the delay information reported by the reporting means, the operation means is operated to change the state in which the success/failure determination condition different from the success/failure determination condition in which the privilege game is delayed is easily established, thereby allowing the player to play more lottery games during the second game state. Therefore, more profits can be given to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the main control means includes, when a privilege game is given by the other identification information during the dynamic display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the privilege game carryover means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information until the other privilege game is completed, and the determination result of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over after the privilege game is completed by the privilege game carryover means after the privilege game. a win-or-fail judgment maintaining means for maintaining the win-or-fail judgment result determined in the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state.

According to the game machine S5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines S1 to S4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, when a privilege game is imparted by the other identification information during dynamic display of either one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the remaining dynamic display of one identification information is carried over by the privilege game carryover means until the other privilege game is finished. Then, the right/wrong determination result of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the privilege game ends is maintained by the right/wrong determination result determined in the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game.

As a result, the lottery game whose dynamic display is started keeps the judgment in the second game state while delaying the start of the privilege game which is a winning to shift to the first game state during the second game state, so that even if the privilege game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new win while the privilege game is delayed.

In any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the main control means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the establishment of the first success judgment condition, according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, based on the establishment of the second judgment means, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition. from the group of dynamic display modes according to establishment of a dynamic display start condition; preliminary dynamic display mode determination means for determining, before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means on the basis of the satisfaction of the first or second propriety determination condition; and signal generating means, wherein the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the advance determination information for a first jackpot for which the extended dynamic display mode is determined is stored, based on the prior dynamic display mode signal.

According to the game machine S6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group including at least the normal dynamic display mode and the extended dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the normal dynamic display mode. Based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition from the group of dynamic display modes according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determining means before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first or the second propriety determination condition. A prior dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the prior dynamic display mode determination means is generated by the preliminary dynamic display mode signal generation means and output to the slave control means. Based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the preliminary determination information for the first jackpot for which the extended dynamic display mode is determined is stored. As a result, the player is notified by the game state transition notification mode that the success/fail determination condition for the first jackpot with a delayed start is established during the second game state. Therefore, the player can more quickly determine that the remaining second game state is short by being notified of the game state transition notification mode, and can effectively utilize the remaining second game state.

In any one of the game machines S3 to S6, the main control means has a main hold information storage means for storing hold information for determining whether the first jackpot or the variable jackpot for the hit/fail decision condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail judgment condition until the dynamic display start condition is met, and the pre-determination means of the main control means makes a judgment based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means. The privilege delay means delays the start of the privilege game corresponding to the hold information of the newly established other right/failure determination condition in a state in which the hold information corresponding to one of the first right/failure determination condition and the second right/fail determination condition is determined to be the first jackpot by the prior determination means, and the hold information corresponding to the other is newly established and the hold information is determined to be the second jackpot by the prior determination means. A gaming machine S7 characterized by delaying the start of a game.
According to the game machine S7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines S3 to S6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first or the second success/failure determination condition, the hold information for determining whether the first jackpot or the probability variable jackpot will be achieved for the establishment of the success/failure determination condition is stored in the main hold information storage means until the dynamic display start condition is established. Then, based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, the determination is made by the prior determination means. In the main control means, when the holding information corresponding to either one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition is judged to be the first jackpot by the advance judgment means, the hold information corresponding to the other is newly established, and when the holding information is judged to be the second jackpot by the advance judgment means, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the hold information of the other newly established win/fail judgment condition is the first jackpot stored in the hold information storage means. Delayed by benefit delay means from start. As a result, after the privilege game corresponding to the win to shift to the first game state is executed, the privilege game corresponding to the win to shift to the second game state is executed, so that the player can play in the second game state even after two privilege games are executed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in a more advantageous game state, and to prevent the expectation of a big win from being hindered.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the result of the first lottery game determination by the success determination means; a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the result of the success determination of the second lottery game by the success determination means; and the first identification. display control means capable of dynamically controlling display of the information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively; and privilege game execution means for providing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a hit and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means in a display mode indicating a win, and when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win. Win type determination means for determining either a normal jackpot for shifting a game state after a privilege game imparted by a privilege game executing means to a normal game state or a special jackpot for shifting to a special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; determining a dynamic display mode of first identification information corresponding to the established win/fail judgment condition according to establishment of a dynamic display start condition based on establishment of the first win/fail judgment condition; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the determination condition in accordance with the establishment of the dynamic display start condition; and prior determination means for determining, before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, whether the dynamic display start condition is satisfied with respect to the first or the second success determination condition that has already been satisfied, and the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The game machine T1 is characterized by comprising a privilege start adjusting means for adjusting the start timing of the privilege game so that the privilege game corresponding to the success/failure determination condition determined to result in the normal jackpot is started prior to the start of the privilege game corresponding to the success/failure determination condition determined to result in the special jackpot when the advance determination means determines that the special jackpot will occur under the other win/fail determination condition.

According to the gaming machine T1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are established. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. When the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means is a win, either a normal big win for shifting the game state after the privilege game imparted by the privilege game executing means to the normal game state or a special big win for shifting to the special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is determined by the win type determining means. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Prior to establishment of the dynamic display start condition, whether a normal big win or a special big win will be made is judged by an advance judgment means with respect to the already established first or second right/wrong judgment condition before the dynamic display start condition is established. Under one of the first success determination condition and the second success determination condition before the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, it is determined by the advance determination means that a normal jackpot will occur, and under the other success/failure determination condition, the start of the privilege game is adjusted by the privilege start adjusting means so that the start of the privilege game of the normal jackpot precedes the start of the privilege game of the special jackpot when the advance determination means determines that the special jackpot will occur. As a result, the normal big win is started, and after shifting to the normal game state, the special big win is executed and the game is shifted to the special game state, so that the player can have a high expectation for the big win. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the attenuation of the player's desire to play.

In the gaming machine T1, the privilege start adjustment means causes the dynamic display mode determination means to determine a shortened dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display time is shorter than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition determined by the prior determination means when the normal jackpot occurs, or a dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition determined by the advance determination means when the special jackpot occurs, or determines whether the dynamic display mode determination means determines a dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display time is shorter than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. The game machine T2 is characterized in that, as the dynamic display mode, the dynamic display mode determination means determines an extended dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display time is longer than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success/fail determination condition for the normal jackpot.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines a shortened dynamic display mode with a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition determined to result in the special jackpot as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition determined to result in the special jackpot, by the privilege start adjustment means. Alternatively, the dynamic display mode determination means determines an extended dynamic display mode with a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition determined to result in a special jackpot as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the win/fail determination condition determined to result in the normal jackpot, by the privilege start adjustment means. Thus, by adjusting the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode for the normal big win or the dynamic display mode for the special big win, the start of the privilege game for the normal big win can be easily adjusted to precede the start of the privilege game for the special big win. Therefore, many benefits can be provided to the player while enjoying the dynamic display mode.

In the gaming machine described in T1 or T2, when the first or second success judgment condition is met, the dynamic display mode determined by a pending information storage means for storing pending information having at least right/failure determination information related to the true/failure determination of the first or second true/failure judgment condition satisfied before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the true/failure judging condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display mode determining means for the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storing means. before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied; and an end time determination means for determining time information related to the time until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means ends based on the determination result of the preliminary mode determining means and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means, wherein the privilege start adjustment means is configured to adjust the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination. With respect to either one of the judgment conditions and the judgment condition, when the holding information corresponding to the judgment condition judged by the prior judgment means that the normal jackpot will be obtained is stored in the holding information storage means, and the other newly established judgment condition is judged to be the winning judgment condition for the special jackpot by the advance judgment means, the reservation information corresponding to the ordinary jackpot judged by the end time judgment means is terminated. The dynamic display mode determining means is caused to determine an adjusted dynamic display mode configured with a dynamic display time such that the dynamic display ends as a dynamic display mode corresponding to the reserved information for the special jackpot, and for either one of the first win/fail judgment condition and the second win/fail judgment condition, when the hold information corresponding to the win/fail judgment condition determined by the advance judgment means when the special jackpot hits is stored in the hold information storage means, the other newly established win/fail judgment condition is determined in the advance judgment. The game machine T3 is characterized in that, when it is determined by the means that the conditions for judging the success or failure of a normal jackpot are satisfied, the dynamic display mode determination means determines an adjusted dynamic display mode constituted by a dynamic display time such that the dynamic display corresponding to the suspension information to be the normal jackpot ends before the time when the dynamic display corresponding to the suspension information to be the special jackpot determined by the end time determination means ends, as the dynamic display mode corresponding to the suspension information to be the normal jackpot.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first or second right/wrong judgment condition is established, the hold information having at least the right/wrong judgment information related to the right/wrong judgment of the established first or second right/wrong judgment condition is stored in the hold information storage means before the dynamic display start condition corresponding to the right/wrong judgment condition is held. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the first or second identification information corresponding to the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means is determined by the prior mode determination means before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the preliminary mode determining means and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display on the first or second display means, time information related to the time until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information is terminated is determined by the end time determination means. With respect to either one of the first success determination condition and the second success determination condition, when the pending information corresponding to the success determination condition determined by the advance determination means that the normal jackpot will occur is stored, and the other newly established win/fail determination condition is determined by the advance determination means to be the win/fail determination condition that will result in the special jackpot, the dynamic display of the pending information that will result in the special jackpot ends after the time until the dynamic display of the pending information that will result in the normal jackpot determined by the end time determination means ends. The dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the bonus start adjusting means as the dynamic display mode of the reserved information for the special jackpot. On the other hand, with respect to either one of the first win/fail determination condition and the second win/fail determination condition, when the hold information corresponding to the win/fail determination condition determined by the advance determination means to result in a special jackpot is stored, and the newly established win/fail determination condition is determined by the advance determination means to be the hit/fail determination condition for a normal jackpot, the dynamic display of the hold information for a normal jackpot is performed prior to the end of the dynamic display of the hold information for a special jackpot determined by the end time determination means. The dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the privilege start adjusting means as the dynamic display mode of the reserved information which is usually a jackpot. Thus, if the dynamic display time of the adjusted dynamic display mode is set so as to reduce the difference between the start of the privilege game for the normal jackpot and the start of the privilege game for the special jackpot, the player can play the privilege game at a good tempo. Therefore, the player can play more lottery games.

A win-or-fail determination information acquiring means for acquiring win-or-fail determination information of a game based on the establishment of a win-or-fail determination condition; a win-or-fail determination means for determining win/fail determination information acquired by the win-or-fail determination information acquisition means; a notification means for notifying the player of information related to the game when the operation lottery means determines a win; and a lottery probability changing means for setting the lottery probability determined by the operation lottery means as a win to be different between a first effective period within the effective period and a second effective period different from the first effective period.

According to the gaming machine U1, the win-or-fail judgment information of the game is acquired by the win-or-fail judgment information acquiring means based on the establishment of the win-or-fail judgment condition. The success/failure determination information acquired by the success/failure determination information acquisition means is determined by the success/failure determination means. Based on the determination of winning by the win/fail determining means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. A predetermined lottery is executed by the operation lottery means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player within a predetermined effective period. When the operation lottery means determines a win, information relating to the game is notified to the player by the notification means. The lottery probability that the operating lottery means determines a win is set by the lottery probability changing means to be different between a first effective period within the effective period and a second effective period different from the first effective period. As a result, when the player operates the operating means within the valid period, the probability that the information related to the game is notified can be changed depending on whether it is the first valid period or the second valid period, and the player's motivation to operate the operating means can be improved. Therefore, since the game-related information can be notified by the player's own operation, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine U1, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of minor privilege games, the first validity period is set during a period during which any one of the plurality of minor privilege games is executed, and the second validity period is set during a period during which any one of the plurality of minor privilege games different from the minor privilege game set during the first validity period is executed.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege game is composed of a plurality of small privilege games. A first validity period is set during a period during which any one of the plurality of small privilege games is executed. Further, the second validity period is set during the period in which the small privilege game different from the small privilege game for which the first validity period is set is executed among the plurality of small privilege games. Thus, it is possible to change the probability of announcing the information related to the game between the first valid period and the second valid period during the privilege game, and improve the motivation to operate the operating means even during the privilege game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game even during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the success judgment condition, a reservation information storage means for storing the reservation information having at least the success judgment information acquired by the success judgment information acquisition means; The information related to is information related to whether or not the pending information determined as winning by the prior determination means is stored among the pending information stored in the pending information storage means.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is established based on the establishment of the judgment condition, the hold information having at least the judgment information acquired by the judgment information acquisition means is stored by the held information storage means. Based on the pending information stored in the pending information storage means, the propriety determination result is determined by the preliminary determination means before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. The information related to the game notified to the player is composed of information related to whether or not the pending information determined as winning by the advance determination means is stored among the pending information stored in the pending information storage means. Therefore, by operating the operation means, the player can know the result of determination of whether or not the pending information stored in the pending information storage means is valid before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can know the success/failure determination result earlier by his/her own operation. In addition, even if winning pending information is not notified by operating the operating means, the dynamic display of the identification information can be enjoyed with the expectation that there will actually be winning pending information just by losing the lottery by the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine U2, the game machine U2 has win type determination means for determining either a normal jackpot for shifting the game state after the privilege game is executed to a normal game state or a special jackpot for shifting to a special game state where the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the information related to the game is information related to whether the win that triggered the privilege game being executed is the normal jackpot or the special jackpot. Characteristic game machine U4.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects described for the gaming machine U2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, with regard to the win determined by the success/fail determination means, either the normal big win for shifting the game state after the privilege game is executed to the normal game state or the special big win for shifting to the special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is determined by the win type determining means. Information relating to whether the win that triggered the execution of the privilege game being executed is a normal jackpot or a special jackpot is reported as game-related information.

Thereby, the player can quickly recognize the game state after the privilege game is executed during the privilege game by operating the operating means. In addition, since the lottery probability based on operating the operation means is changed even during the privilege game, it is possible to provide variation depending on the difference in the period during which the operation means is operated during the privilege game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game during the privilege game.

a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination condition is satisfied; and second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. second display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail judgment conditions are satisfied; display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means; a technique executing means, which reserves the right to execute the first lottery game until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is established based on the establishment of the first success judgment condition, and reserves the right to execute the second lottery game until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is established based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first validity determination condition based on the number of reservations held by the holding means when the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second validity determination condition based on the number of reservations held by the reservation means when the dynamic display start condition is satisfied; pre-dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode based on the number of suspensions of the retaining means when is satisfied; pending information storage means for storing pending information having at least information on the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determining means and information on the dynamic display mode determined by the pre-dynamic display mode determining means; A pending display means for displaying in a pending display mode in which the order of establishment of the right/failure determination conditions combining the first right/failure determination conditions and the second right/failure determination conditions is identifiable for each hold information while distinguishing the hold information of the first right/failure determination condition and the second right/failure determination condition; and the dynamic display mode determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means for each piece of pending information stored in the hold information storage means and the first or second identification during dynamic display each time the determination condition of the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means is satisfied. start time information updating means for determining or updating the time information until the first or second identification information starts dynamic display for each piece of pending information based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the information, and storing the information in the pending information storage means; Characteristic gaming machine V1.

According to the gaming machine V1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are established. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is win and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The right to execute the first lottery game is reserved by a holding means until the dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is established based on the establishment of the first success judgment condition. The right to execute the second lottery game is reserved by a holding means until a dynamic display start condition for starting the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is established based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition. A dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the first propriety determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the number of reservations held by the holding means upon establishment of the dynamic display start condition. In addition, the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the second propriety determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the number of reservations held by the holding means upon establishment of the dynamic display start condition. Every time a predetermined discrimination condition is established, a dynamic display mode is discriminated by a preliminary dynamic display mode discriminating means based on the number of suspensions when the discrimination condition is established for each hold held by the holding means. When the first or the second right/wrong judgment condition is established, until the dynamic display start condition is held, the hold information storage means stores the hold information having at least the order of establishment of the right/wrong judgment condition combining the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition and the information on the dynamic display mode discriminated by the prior dynamic display mode discriminating means. While discriminating the reserved information of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the reserved information storage means, the establishment order of the right/wrong judgment condition combining the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition for each piece of hold information is displayed by the hold display means as the display of the identifiable hold display mode. Each time the determination condition of the prior dynamic display mode determining means is established, based on the dynamic display mode determined by the prior dynamic display mode determining means for each piece of suspension information and the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display, the start time information updating means decides or updates time information until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information starts for each piece of suspension information, and is stored in the suspension information storage means. Then, when a predetermined condition is established, the suspension display mode displayed on the suspension display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each time information stored in the suspension information storage means by the start time information updating means. As a result, for example, while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored, the hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information during dynamic display is a longer dynamic display mode than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information during dynamic display, the start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information of the second lottery game is earlier than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the previously stored hold information of the first lottery game. However, since the reserved display mode is displayed in order in the reserved display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the second lottery game newly stored suspension display mode is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the previously stored suspension information of the first lottery game. Then, although the actual start order of the dynamic display and the establishment order of the propriety determination conditions may differ, the real dynamic display start order is rearranged and displayed by the rearrangement means, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition. In addition, the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information is determined based on the number of suspensions of the suspension means when the dynamic display start condition is satisfied, so that the dynamic display mode determined in advance to be determined by the increase or decrease of suspensions is changed during suspension. Therefore, although the order of starting the dynamic display is also changed, the time information for starting the dynamic display is determined or updated each time a predetermined discrimination condition is established, so that the player can be notified of the correct order of starting the dynamic display. Therefore, even when the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual success/failure determination conditions are established, the reservation display modes are rearranged in the dynamic display start order by the rearrangement means, so that the player's confusion can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine V1, when the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means are rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, an order monitoring means for determining whether or not a change occurs in the rearranged and displayed order as a result of updating the time information of the pending information corresponding to the rearranged and displayed pending display modes by the start time information updating means; and rearrangement update means for rearranging in order of start.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means are rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the dynamic display, the order monitoring means determines whether or not the rearranged and displayed order is changed as a result of updating the time information of the pending information corresponding to the rearranged and displayed pending display modes by the start time information updating means. When the order monitoring means determines that the order has been changed, the rearranged and displayed reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement updating means in order to start new dynamic display. Thus, after a predetermined condition is satisfied and the reserved display modes are rearranged and displayed, the rearrangement is performed even when the order of starting the dynamic display is changed due to increase or decrease of the reserved status, etc., so that the correct rearrangement order can be recognized by the player. Therefore, player confusion can be further suppressed.

The game machine V1 or V2 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying a player that a change has occurred in the change start order of the reserved display modes rearranged and displayed when the rearrangement is rearranged by the rearrangement updating means in the order of starting a new dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when rearrangement is performed by the rearrangement updating means in order to start a new dynamic display, the player is notified by the notification means that the change has occurred in the change start order of the reserved display modes rearranged and displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the change has occurred in the change start order of the reserved display modes rearranged and displayed. Therefore, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 A game machine Z1 in any one of U4, V1 to V3, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine includes an operation handle, and a ball is shot into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and on the condition that the ball wins (or passes through) an operation opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to win prizes, and a valuable value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) corresponding to the number of prizes awarded is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 A game machine Z2 in any one of U4, V1 to V3, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then for confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated under the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information. A gaming machine equipped with a special game state generating means". In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, P1 to P3, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R5, S1 to S7, T1 to T3, U1 A game machine Z3 in any one of U4, V1 to V3, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the integrated game machine, a special game advantageous to the player is provided with a variable display means that confirms and displays the identification information after dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information, the identification information starts to change due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (e.g., stop button), or after a predetermined period of time has passed. The game machine is equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a state, uses balls as game media, requires a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display of the identification information, and is constructed so that a large number of balls are put out at the time of the generation of the special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a plurality of starting holes provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by lottery, and a dynamic display of a special pattern for informing the result of the lottery is performed on a display device. In such a constitution, the success or failure of the game is individually drawn corresponding to each starting port, and after the drawing result dynamically displays the special pattern corresponding to each starting port (for example, the first special pattern and the second special pattern for the two starting ports), the result of the lottery is notified. In this way, a game machine has been proposed in which a plurality of special symbols can be displayed dynamically at the same time.
For example, in Patent Document 1, dynamic display of a first special symbol is started when a game ball enters a first starting hole, and dynamic display of a second special symbol starts when a game ball enters a second starting hole. Therefore, when either one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is dynamically displayed, when the game ball enters the starting port corresponding to the other special pattern, both the first special pattern and the second special pattern are dynamically displayed at the same time. Then, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol stops in a display mode informing a big win, the game shifts to a big win game.
As types of jackpots, there are set a variable jackpot for shifting to a high-probability game state for improving the probability of winning a jackpot, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game, and a normal jackpot for shifting to a low-probability game state with a jackpot probability lower than that of the high-probability game state. When a normal jackpot is started during a high-probability game with one special symbol, the result is determined based on the probability of the normal game state with the other special symbol that has already started to fluctuate and has not been fixed and stopped (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).
By the way, in such a game machine, since the dynamic display is executed independently for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, when the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are won in a short time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, when the normal jackpot is executed after the probability variable jackpot is executed, the high probability game state is terminated in a short time, and the player's motivation for the game is attenuated in a short time.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine that dynamically displays a plurality of special symbols at the same time and that suppresses the player's desire to play the game from diminishing.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 has main control means for executing main control of the game, and subordinate control means for executing the control of the game according to instructions from the main control means, the main control means executing the success/failure determination of the first lottery game based on satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, and the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. Based on the success/failure determination result of the technique, the second success/failure determination signal is generated based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. and a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating that the win is determined by the win/fail determination means, and when the first or second identification information indicating the win is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is awarded, and the main control means, when the win/loss determination means determines that the win is determined to be a win, changes the game state after the privilege game to the first game state. a win type determining means for determining whether a second jackpot to shift to a second game state more advantageous to the player than the game state is made; a prior determining means for determining, based on the establishment of the first or the second winning judgment condition, whether the winning is the first big winning or the second big winning against the established winning judgment condition before a dynamic display start condition, which is a condition for starting the dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the established winning judgment condition, is established; and a judgment result of the preliminary judging means. a prior determination signal generation means for generating a prior determination signal for notifying the prior determination information about the determination result to the slave control means based on the above, and outputting the prior determination signal to the slave control means, the slave control means, based on the reception of the prior determination signal, the slave hold information storage means for storing the prior determination information until a dynamic display start condition of the propriety determination condition corresponding to the prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination signal is satisfied; and based on the prior determination information stored in the slave hold information storage means, a secondary monitoring means for determining whether or not advance determination information indicating a first big win is stored; a preliminary notification determining means for determining whether or not to notify the player of game state transition information relating to the preliminary determination information determined to result in the first jackpot based on the fact that the slave monitoring means determines that the preliminary determination information indicating the first big win is stored; and an informing means for informing a game state transition informing mode based on.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the preliminary judgment signal generating means of the main control means generates the preliminary judgment signal capable of identifying a right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the judgment result of the preliminary judgment means, and the game state transition notification mode is configured in a notification manner capable of identifying whether the right/wrong judgment condition corresponding to the preliminary judgment information is the first right/wrong judgment condition or the second right/wrong judgment condition.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the main control means has privilege delaying means for delaying the start of the privilege game corresponding to the determined first or second win-or-fail judgment condition when the prior judging means judges that the first or second win-or-fail judgment condition for the first jackpot is established during the second game state.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, and includes: an operating means operable by the player; and a variable means for changing between a first advantageous state in which the first success determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second success determination condition by the player's first operation of the operation means, and a second advantageous state in which the second success determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first success determination condition by performing a second operation different from the first operation. have.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the main control means comprises, during the dynamic display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, when a privilege game is given with the other identification information, a privilege game carryover means for carrying over the remaining dynamic display of the one identification information until the privilege game of the other identification information ends; (2) a success judgment maintaining means for maintaining the success judgment result of the identification information with the success judgment result determined in the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 5, wherein the main control means determines a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition based on the establishment of the first success judgment condition from a group of dynamic display modes composed of at least a normal dynamic display mode and an extended dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the normal dynamic display mode according to the establishment of the dynamic display start condition, and based on the establishment of the second success judgment means, determines the established win. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the failure determination condition from the dynamic display mode group according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition; preliminary dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the satisfaction of the first or second yes/no determination condition before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied; and generating a preliminary dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determination means. and a preliminary dynamic display mode signal generation means for outputting to the secondary control means, wherein the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the preliminary determination information for a first jackpot in which the extended dynamic display mode is determined is stored, based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 3 to 6, wherein the main control means has main pending information storage means for storing pending information for determining whether a first jackpot or a probability variable jackpot will be achieved against the established win/fail judgment condition based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail judgment condition, and the preliminary judgment means of the main control means stores hold information until the dynamic display start condition is established, based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means. The privilege delaying means of the main control means stores the start of the privilege game corresponding to the holding information of the newly established other winning judgment condition in the holding information storage means when the holding information corresponding to one of the first winning judgment condition and the second winning judgment condition is judged to be the first jackpot by the prior judgment means, and the holding information corresponding to the other is newly established and the holding information is judged to be the second jackpot by the preliminary judgment means. This delays the start of the privilege game corresponding to the holding information that is the first big win.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means.
In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal.
Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently.
In the main control means, when the win is determined by the win/fail determining means, the winning type determining means determines whether the game state after the privilege game is the first big win for shifting to the first game state or the second big win for shifting to the second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Based on the establishment of the first or the second success/failure determination condition, whether the first big win or the second big win for the established success/failure determination condition is determined by the preliminary determination means before the dynamic display start condition, which is the condition for starting the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition, is established. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, a prior determination signal for notifying the slave control means of prior determination information regarding the determination result is generated by the prior determination signal generation means and output to the slave control means.
Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the preliminary determination signal, the preliminary determination information is stored in the slave pending information storage means until the dynamic display start condition of the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the preliminary determination information is satisfied. Based on the preliminary determination information stored in the secondary reservation information storage means, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the preliminary determination information indicating that the first jackpot will be won is stored.
Based on the fact that the slave monitoring means determines that the advance judgment information indicating the first big win is stored, the advance notification determination means determines whether or not to inform the player of the game state transition information related to the advance judgment information judged to be the first big win. As a result, when it is determined to notify the player, the notifying means notifies the player of the game state transition notification mode based on the game state transition information.
Thus, by notifying the game state shift notification mode, if the current game state is the second game state, the player can determine that the remaining time of the second game state is short and play the game by effectively using the remaining time. Therefore, there is an effect that more profit can be awarded to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the prior determination signal generation means generates a prior determination signal capable of identifying the yes/no determination condition corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means. The game state transition notification mode is constituted by a notification mode in which it can be identified whether the win/loss determination condition corresponding to the prior determination notification mode is the first win/fail determination condition or the second win/fail determination condition. As a result, the player can play the game so as to preferentially satisfy the success/failure determination condition in which the first jackpot is not established by the game state transition notification mode. Therefore, the game can be played by effectively using the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, when it is determined by the advance determination means that the first or second success/failure determination condition for a first big win is established during the second game state, and when it is determined that the determined first or second success/failure determination condition is satisfied, the privilege delay means delays the start of the determined privilege game. As a result, the second game state is given to the player for a longer period of time, and there is an effect that more profit can be given to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the player performs the first operation on the operation means that the player can operate, the variable means changes the state between a first advantageous state in which the first success determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second success determination condition, and a second advantage state in which the second success determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first success determination condition by performing a second operation different from the first operation. Thus, based on the delay information reported by the reporting means, the operation means is operated to change the state in which the success/failure determination condition different from the success/failure determination condition in which the privilege game is delayed is easily established, thereby allowing the player to play more lottery games during the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that more profit can be awarded to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, when a privilege game is imparted by the other identification information during dynamic display of either one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the remaining dynamic display of one identification information is carried over by the privilege game carryover means until the other privilege game is finished. Then, the right/wrong determination result of the first identification information or the second identification information carried over by the privilege game carry-over means after the privilege game ends is maintained by the right/wrong determination result determined in the game state at the start of the dynamic display regardless of the game state after the privilege game.
As a result, the lottery game whose dynamic display is started keeps the judgment in the second game state while delaying the start of the privilege game which is a winning to shift to the first game state during the second game state, so that even if the privilege game is started while the dynamic display is being performed, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from giving up winning a new win while the privilege game is delayed.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition from the dynamic display mode group including at least the normal dynamic display mode and the extended dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the normal dynamic display mode. Based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition from the group of dynamic display modes according to the satisfaction of the dynamic display start condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined by the preliminary dynamic display mode determining means before the dynamic display start condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first or the second propriety determination condition. A prior dynamic display mode signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display mode determined by the prior dynamic display mode determination means is generated by the preliminary dynamic display mode signal generation means and output to the slave control means. Based on the preliminary dynamic display mode signal, the secondary monitoring means determines whether or not the preliminary determination information for the first jackpot for which the extended dynamic display mode is determined is stored.
As a result, the player is notified by the game state transition notification mode that the success/fail determination condition for the first jackpot with a delayed start is established during the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can more quickly determine that the remaining second game state is short and effectively utilize the remaining second game state by being notified of the game state transition notification mode.
According to the game described in technical idea 7, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of technical ideas 3 to 6, the following effects are obtained. That is, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the first or the second success/failure determination condition, the hold information for determining whether the first jackpot or the probability variable jackpot will be achieved for the establishment of the success/failure determination condition is stored in the main hold information storage means until the dynamic display start condition is established. Then, based on the hold information stored in the main hold information storage means, the determination is made by the prior determination means.
In the main control means, when the holding information corresponding to either one of the first success judgment condition and the second success judgment condition is judged to be the first jackpot by the advance judgment means, the holding information corresponding to the other is newly established, and when the holding information is judged to be the second jackpot by the advance judgment means, the start of the privilege game corresponding to the holding information of the newly established other success judgment condition is the first jackpot stored in the holding information storage means. Delayed by benefit delay means from start.
As a result, after the privilege game corresponding to the win to shift to the first game state is executed, the privilege game corresponding to the win to shift to the second game state is executed, so that the player can play in the second game state even after two privilege games are executed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in a more advantageous game state, and it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big win from being hindered.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines )
114 Display control device ( first display means, part of second display means )
201 MPU ( judgment means)
202b jackpot type counter (part of game state determination means)
S1256 period information determination means
Part of S1257 production execution means

Claims (1)

determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition and executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition;
a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result of the first determination;
a second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result of the second determination;
a first privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means;
a second privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means,
A game state determination means capable of determining one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a game state to be set after the first privilege game when the determination means determines that the specific first determination result is obtained;
period information determining means capable of determining period information corresponding to a period until the first identification information for setting the first game state is stopped and displayed when the second game state is set;
an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the period information determined by the period information determination means;
The gaming machine is capable of executing an effect including at least a suggestive mode of suggesting the period information to the player as the effect executed by the effect executing means ,
The suggesting mode is variable according to the passage of the period, and is configured in advance in a mode until the period corresponding to the period information ends,
The game machine is
acquisition means for acquiring information to be used in the second determination by the determination means based on the establishment of an acquisition condition;
and storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means at least until the second determination condition is satisfied,
The game machine, wherein the effect executing means can execute the effect by varying the effect mode of the effect when the second determination result of the second determination is the specific second determination result.

Images